health sciences

Bachelor of
HEALTH SCIENCES
(Audiology/Biomedicine/Dietetics/
Environmental and Occupational
Health/Exercise and Sports Science/
Medical Radiation/ Nursing/
Nutrition/Speech Pathology)
SCIENCE (Forensic Science)
Diploma in Nursing
Academic Session 2012/2013
USM Vision
Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow
USM Mission
USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university
that empowers future talent and enables the bottom billions
to transform their socio-economic well being
i
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
Full Name
Identity Card (IC)/Passport No.
Current Address
Permanent Address
E-mail Address
Telephone No. (Residence)
Mobile Phone No. (if applicable)
School
Programme of Study
ii
CONTENT
PAGE
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VISION AND MISSION
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
CONTENT
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
SCHOOL MAIN ADMINISTRATIVES
SCHOOL STAFF LIST
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
9.0
INTRODUCTION
ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
MAJOR PROGRAMMES
4.1.
Biomedicine ……………………………………………
4.2.
Dietetics …………………………………………….…
4.3.
Nursing …………………………………………………
4.4.
Forensic Science ………………………………………
4.5.
Medical Radiation ………………………………………
4.6.
Audiology………………………………………………
4.7.
Speech Pathology………………………………………
4.8.
Exercise and Sports Science……………………………
4.9.
Nutrition……………………………………………….
4.10.
Environmental and Occupational Health….………....
COURSES SYNOPSIS
5.1.
Core Courses Level 100.............……………….………
5.2.
Core Courses Level 200 …………...................……….
5.3.
Core Courses Level 300 …………………....................
5.4.
Core Courses Level 400 ………………………………
ELECTIVE COURSES
FACILITIES
GENERAL INFORMATION
8.1.
Career Guidance ………………………………………
8.2.
Prizes, Awards and Dean's List ………….……………
8.3.
Society …………….….…………………………………
8.4.
Postgraduate Programmes…………………….…………
8.5.
Overseas Training Scheme ……………………………
DIPLOMA OF NURSING
1-2
3 - 27
28 - 45
45 - 91
45 - 49
50 - 53
54 - 58
59 - 62
63 - 66
67 - 72
73- 78
79 - 82
83 - 86
87 - 91
92 - 194
93 - 106
107 - 135
136 - 170
171 - 194
195 - 205
206
207 - 212
207 - 211
211
212
212
212
213 - 252
10.0
11.0
INDEX..........................................................................................
STUDENT’S FEEDBACK...........................................................
253 - 264
265
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
iii
i
ii
iii
iv - v
vi
vii - xiv
ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2012/2013
[09 SEPTEMBER 2012 - 07 SEPTEMBER 2013 (52 WEEKS)]
* Registration for New Students, 1 - 2 September 2012
* Orientation Week/Minggu Haluan Diri Siswa, 3 - 9 September 2012
WEEK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SEMESTER
I
Teaching &
Learning
Period
MID-SEMESTER BREAK
I
16
17
18
19
ACTIVITIES
Teaching &
Learning
Period
Revision Week
I
Examinations
DATE
Sunday, 09/09/12 - Thursday, 13/09/12
Sunday, 16/09/12 - Thursday, 20/09/12
Sunday, 23/09/12 - Thursday, 27/09/12
Sunday, 30/09/12 - Thursday, 04/10/12
Sunday, 07/10/12 - Thursday, 11/10/12
Sunday, 14/10/12 - Thursday, 18/10/12
Sunday, 21/10/12 - Thursday, 25/10/12
Monday, 29/10/12-Thursday, 01/11/12
Sunday, 04/11/12-Thursday, 08/11/12
Friday, 09/11/12 - Saturday, 17/11/12
Sunday, 18/11/12 - Thursday, 22/11/12
Sunday, 25/11/12 - Thursday, 29/11/12
Sunday, 02/12/12 - Thursday, 06/12/12
Sunday, 09/12/12 - Thursday, 13/12/12
Sunday, 16/12/12 - Thursday, 20/12/12
Friday, 21/12/12 - Saturday, 29/12/12
REMARKS
Malaysia Day
Sunday, 16/9/12
Hari Raya Qurban
Sunday,
26/10/12-28/10/12
Hari Keputeraan Sultan
Kelantan
Sunday & Monday,
11 & 12/11/12
Deepavali
Tuesday, 13/11/12
Maal Hijrah
Thursday, 15/11/12
Christmas, Tuesday,
25/12/12
Sunday, 30/12/12 - Thursday, 03/01/13
Sunday, 06/01/13 - Thursday, 10/01/13
Sunday, 13/01/13 - Thursday, 17/01/13
Maulidul Rasul
Thursday, 24/01/13
20 - 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
INTER- SEMESTER BREAK
(4 Weeks)
II
Teaching &
Learning
Period
MID-SEMESTER BREAK
II
Teaching &
Learning
Period
Friday, 18/01/13 - Saturday, 16/02/13
Sunday, 17/02/13 - Thursday, 21/02/13
Sunday, 24/02/13 - Thursday, 28/02/13
Sunday, 03/03/13 - Thursday, 07/03/13
Sunday, 10/03/13 - Thursday, 14/03/13
Sunday, 17/03/13 - Thursday, 21/03/13
Sunday, 24/03/13 - Thursday, 28/03/13
Sunday, 31/03/13 - Thursday, 04/04/13
Friday, 05/04/13- Saturday, 13/04/13
Sunday, 14/04/13 - Thursday, 18/04/13
Sunday, 21/04/13 - Thursday, 25/04/13
Sunday, 28/04/13 - Thursday, 02/05/13
Sunday, 05/05/13 - Thursday, 09/05/13
Sunday, 12/05/13 - Thursday, 16/05/13
Sunday, 19/05/13 - Thursday, 23/05/13
Sunday, 26/05/13 - Thursday, 30/05/13
iv
Chinese New Year
Sunday,
10/02/13
Labour Day
Wednesday, 01/05/13
Wesak Day
May 2013
39
40
41
42
43 - 52
Friday, 31/05/13 - Saturday, 08/06/13
Revision Week
Examinations
Long Vacation/Industrial
Training/ KSCP
(10 Weeks)
Sunday, 09/06/13 - Thursday, 13/06/13
Sunday, 16/06/13 - Thursday, 20/06/13
Sunday, 23/06/13 - Thursday, 27/06/13
Friday, 28/06/13 - Saturday, 07/09/13
Hari Raya Puasa
29/06/13 - 08/09/13
Independant Day
31/08/13
STRUCTURE PERIOD OF LONG VACATION COURSES (KSCP)
43 - 45
46 - 47
48
49 - 52
3 weeks
2 weeks
1 week
4 weeks
Holiday
Teaching Period
Examination
Holiday
v
Friday, 28/06/13 - Saturday, 20/07/13
Sunday, 21/07/13 - Thursday, 25/07/13
Sunday, 28/07/13 - Thursday, 01/08/13
Friday, 02/08/13 - Saturday, 07/09/13
SCHOOL MAIN ADMINISTRATIVES
vii
SCHOOL STAFF LIST
Tel: 609-764 7880/609 7677509/7510/7518 Fax: 609-7677515
NO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NAME
Professor Ahmad
Haji Zakaria
Associate Professor
Pim Chau Dam
POSITION
Dean
Deputy Dean
Academic & Student
Development /Quality
Management
Representative
7783
Associate Professor
Dr. Zafarina
Zainuddin
Associate Professor
Dr. Shaharum
Shamsuddin
Deputy Dean
Research & Graduate
Studies
7616 / 7779
[email protected]
Deputy Dean
Division of Industry &
Community Network
7782
[email protected]
NAME
Professor
Dinsuhaimi Sidek
Dr. Mohd Normani
Zakaria
Dr. Zuraida Zainun
Dr. Nik Adilah Nik
Othman
Ms. Aw Cheu Lih
TELEPHONE
7777 / 7784
AUDIOLOGY PROGRAMME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
Programme
6410/6428
Chairman/Lecturer
Lecturer
7646
Lecturer
Lecturer
7559
7571
Lecturer
7786
BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME
Dr. Lim Boon Huat
Programme
7619
Chairman/Lecturer
Professor Dr. Norazmi Lecturer
7605
EMAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
EMAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Mohd. Nor
8.
Professor Dr. Zainul
Fadziruddin
Zainuddin
Seconded to MOSTI
9.
Professor Dr. Zalina
Ismail
Coordinator, Centre for
7766
Neurocognitive Science, (Brain Network)
BRAINetwork/ Lecturer
[email protected]
10.
Associate Professor
Farid Che Ghazali
Associate Professor
Pim Chau Dam
Lecturer
7539
[email protected]
Deputy Dean Academic
and Student
Development /Quality
Management
Representative/Lecturer
7783
[email protected]
11.
viii
04-6533091
[email protected]
NO.
12.
NAME
Associate Professor
Dr. Shaharum
Shamsuddin
13.
Associate Professor
Dr. Sharifah Mastura
Syed Mohamad
14.
15.
Dr. Few Ling Ling
Dr. Hasmah
Abdullah
Dr. Hermizi Hapidin
Dr. Mohd Dasuki
Haji Sul’ain
Dr. Nik Norliza Nik
Hassan
Dr. Noor Izani Noor
Jamil
20.
21.
22.
Mr. Nor Azmi Zainal
23.
Dr. Shyamoli
Mustafa
Dr. Tee Get Bee @
Yvonne
Dr. Wan Amir
Nizam Wan Ahmad
Dr. Wan Ezumi
Mohd Puad @
Mohd Fuad
Dr. Wan Nor Azilah
@ Wan Nor Amilah
Wan Abdul Wahab
Dr. Yusmazura
Zakaria
Mr. Zamri Ibrahim
Dr. Zefarina
Zulkafli
Dr. Idris Long
16.
17.
18.
19.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Dr. Rapeah Suppian
Dr. See Too Wei
Cun
Ms. Nurhidanatasha
Abu Bakar
BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
Deputy Dean
7615/7504
Division of Industry &
Community Network/
Quality Coordinator/
Lecturer
Coordinator, Health
Informatic/Lecturer
EMAIL
[email protected]
(BJIM)
7782
(Dean Office)
7568
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
7536
7534
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
7634
7581
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
7532
[email protected]
Lecturer
7604
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
7547
7613
7537
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
7565
[email protected]
Lecturer
7597
[email protected]
Lecturer
7652
[email protected]
Lecturer
7626
[email protected]
Lecturer
7552
[email protected]
Lecturer
7781
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
7543
7799
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
7778
7814
[email protected]
[email protected]
Coordinator, Science
Laboratory
Management Unit
/Lecturer
ix
NO.
33.
34.
NAME
Dr. Nor Fazila Che Mat
Dr. Tan Suat Cheng
35.
Associate Professor
Dr. Shariza Abdul
Razak
Mr. S. Daniel Robert
Dr. Sakinah Harith
Dr. Marina Abdul
Manaf
36.
37.
38.
39.
Associate Professor Siti
Hawa Ali
40.
Associate Professor
Mohd Isa Haji Bakar
Dr. Mujahid Bakar
Ms. Rehanah Mohd.
Zain
Dr. Rohani Ismail
Dr. Rosminah
Mohamed
Dr. Rohasliney Hashim
Dr. Wan Faizah Wan
Yusof
Ms. Hjh. Wan Aminah
Haji Hasbullah
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
Lecturer
7768
Lecturer
7776
DIETETICS PROGRAMME
Programme
7638
Chairman/
Lecturer
Lecturer
7635
Lecturer
7637
Lecturer
7617
ELECTIVE PROGRAMME
Programme
7570
Chairman/
Senior Lecturer
Senior Lecturer
7555
EMAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
Senior Lecturer
7788
7564
[email protected]
[email protected]
Senior Lecturer
Senior Lecturer
7789
7586
[email protected]
[email protected]
Senior Lecturer
Lecturer
7598
7540
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
7566
[email protected]
(Study Leave)
48.
Dr. Che Rabiaah
Mohamed
49.
Ms. Radziah Mohd
Fauzi
Ms. Jayah K. Pubalan
Ms. Kasmah Wati Pardi
Ms. Rahimah Mohd
Anshari
Ms. Sabarishah Hashim
50.
51.
52.
53.
NURSING PROGRAMME
Programme
7577
Chairman
/Lecturer
Lecturer
7588
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
Lecturer
7550
7533
7558
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Lecturer
7551
[email protected]
Lecturer
7807
[email protected]
Lecturer
7557
[email protected]
(Study Leave)
54.
55.
Dr. Dariah Mohd
Yusoff
Ms. Norazliah Hj
Samsudin
x
NO.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
NURSING PROGRAMME
NAME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
EMAIL
Ms. Rosmawati
Lecturer
7611
[email protected]
Mohamed
Dr. Soon Lean Keng
Lecturer
7546
[email protected]
Ms. Intan Idiana Hassan
Lecturer
7636
[email protected]
Ms. Zakira Mamat @
Lecturer
7554
[email protected]
Mohamed (Study Leave)
Ms. Hartini Muhamad
Nursing Tutor
7735
[email protected]
Ms. Nik Asiah Nik Lah
Nursing Tutor
7735
[email protected]
Ms. Nik Nor Azlina Abd. Nursing Tutor
7738
[email protected]
Kadir
Ms. Siti Aishah Haji
Nursing Tutor
7737
[email protected]
Ghazali
Ms. Zahniyah Che Ishak
Nursing Tutor
7736
[email protected]
Ms. Salwismawati
Nursing Tutor
7738
[email protected]
Badrin
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMME
Dr. Hj. Mohd Nazhari
Programme
7650
[email protected]
Hj. Mohd Nawi
Chairman/
Medical
Lecturer
Associate Professor
Lecturer
7535
[email protected]
Dr. Haliza Abdul
Rahman
Dr. Maliki Hapani
Lecturer
7625
[email protected]
Mr. Mohd Nasrom Hj.
Lecturer
7800
[email protected]
Mohd Nawi
Ms. Faridah Naim
Lecturer
7804
[email protected]
Dr. Nurulilyana
Lecturer
7810
[email protected]
Sansuddin
SPEECH PATHOLOGY PROGRAMME
Ms. Azlinda Abd. Ghani Programme
7592
[email protected]
Chairman/
Lecturer
Mr. Khairy Anuar Mohd Lecturer
7614
[email protected]
Khairuddin
Ms. Nurul Hidayah Dean Lecturer
7809
[email protected]
Kamarudin
Dr. Nik Fariza Husna
Medical
7805
[email protected]
Nik Hassan
Lecturer
NUTRITION PROGRAMME
Professor Wan Abdul
Programme
7648
[email protected]
Manan Wan Muda
Chairman/
Lecturer
Dr. Foo Leng Huat
Lecturer
7548
[email protected]
xi
NO.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
NUTRITION PROGRAMME
NAME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
EMAIL
Dr. Hamid Jan Jan
Lecturer
7618
[email protected]
Mohamad
Associate Professor
Lecturer
7649
[email protected]
Dr. Wan Rosli Wan
Ishak @ Wan Ahmad
Dr. Soo Kah Leng
Lecturer
7631
[email protected]
Dr. Norfarizan Hanoon
Lecturer
7633
[email protected]
Noor Azmi
Dr. Sharifah Zahhura
Lecturer
7767
[email protected]
Syed Abdulalh
EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE PROGRAMME
Associate Professor Dr. Programme
7602
[email protected]
Mohamed Saat Ismail
Chairman/
Lecturer
Mr. Erie Zuraidee
Lecturer
[email protected]
Zulkifli (Study Leave)
Mr. Nurul Azuar
Lecturer
7641
[email protected]
Hamzah
Ms. Vina Tan Phei Sean Lecturer
[email protected]
(Study Leave)
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
Associate Professor Dr. Lecturer
7585
Oleksandr
Krasilshchikov
Dr. Soumendra Saha
Lecturer
7599
Associate Professor Dr. Lecturer
7765
Wan Aasim Wan
Adnan
Dr. Srilekha Saha
Lecturer
7605
Dr. Mohd Zulkifli Abd. Lecturer
7620
Rahim
Dr. Rosniwati Ghafar
Lecturer
7816
MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME
Ms. Chen Suk Chiang
Programme
7639
Chairman/
Lecturer
Professor Ahmad Haji
Dean/
7777 / 7784
Zakaria
Lecturer
Associate Professor Dr. Lecturer
7556
Mohamad Jamel Basha
Adlan
Dr. Arefuddin Ahmed
Lecturer
7567
Dr. Wan Nordiana
Lecturer
7811
W. Abd. Rahman
xii
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
NO.
98.
99.
100.
101.
MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME
NAME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
Mr. Mohd Fahmi Mohd Lecturer
7576
Yusof
Ms. Siti Aishah Abdul
Lecturer
7623
Aziz
FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME
Dr. Mohamad Hadzri
Programme
7553
Yaacob
Chairman/
Lecturer
Associate Professor
Lecturer
7583
EMAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Dr. R. Kuppuswamy
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
Associate Professor
Dr. Sayed Waliullah
Shah
Associate Professor
Dr. P.T. Jayaprakash
Dr. Nik Fakhuruddin
Nik Hassan
Mr. S. Panneerchelvam
Mr. T. Nataraja
Moorthy
Associate Professor
Dr. Zafarina Zainuddin
Lecturer
7582
[email protected]
Lecturer
7601
[email protected]
Lecturer
7621
[email protected]
Lecturer
Lecturer
7587
7589
[email protected]
[email protected]
7616 / 7779
[email protected]
Deputy Dean
Research &
Graduate Studies/
Lecturer
Dr. Affizal Ahmad
Lecturer
7595
[email protected]
Dr. Ahmad Fahmi Lim
Lecturer
7596
[email protected]
Abdullah
Dr. Noor Zuhartini Md. Lecturer
7785
[email protected]
Muslim
Dr. Naji Arafat Mahat
Lecturer
7808
[email protected]
Dr. Geshina Ayu Mat
Lecturer
7773
[email protected]
Saat
DIPLOMA OF NURSING PROGRAMME
Ms. Noor Aini Hussain Programme
7531
[email protected]
Ms. Anisah Mat Desa
Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir
Ms. Fazdillah Husin
Ms. Hasni Embong
Ms. Low Kim Lian
Ms. Mas Nor Saloni
Chairman/
Lecturer
Tutor
Tutor
Tutor
Tutor
Tutor
Tutor
7744
7733
7743
7741
7747
7732
Ibrahim
xiii
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
NO.
120.
121.
122.
NAME
DIPLOMA OF NURSING PROGRAMME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
Ms. Noor Jasmani
Hassan
Ms. Nor Rahan
Mohamad
Ms. Norizam
Muhammad Yusof
EMAIL
Tutor
7746
[email protected]
Tutor
7780
[email protected]
Tutor
7734
[email protected]
Tutor
Tutor
7745
7742
[email protected]
[email protected]
Tutor
7750
[email protected]
Tutor
7749
[email protected]
Tutor
Clinical
Instructor
Clinical
Instructor
Clinical
Instructor
Clinical
Instructor
7748
6672
[email protected]
[email protected]
6672
[email protected]
6672
[email protected]
6672
[email protected]
Clinical
Instructor
6672
[email protected]
(Study Leave)
123.
124.
Ms. Norliza Hussin
Ms. Nurhayati
127.
128.
Mohamad Nor
Ms.Tuan Ruasmani
Tuan Daud
Ms. Zaihan Abd.
Rahman
Ms. Zuraida Yusoff
Ms. Chu Be Lai
129.
Ms. Halizan Yusoff
125.
126.
(Study Leave)
130.
Ms. Masturah Hamzah
131.
Ms. Norizan Che
Mohd Yusoff
(Study Leave)
132.
Ms. Zaharah
Muhamad
The School of Health Sciences is also supported by academic staff from the School of
Medical Sciences, School of Dental Sciences, School of Physics, School of Social
Science, School of Mathematics, School of Distance Education and external lecturers
from Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Universiti Putra Malaysia, Royal Malaysia Police,
Department of Chemistry Malaysia and the Fire and Rescue Department of Malaysia.
xiv
NO.
1.
2.
3.
NAME
Mr. Md. Lukmi
Ismail
Mr. Hera Jauhar Lal
Singh a/l Kishen
Singh
Ms. Wan Suriati Wan
Nik
4.
Ms. Syuhazlina
Marini Awg. Mat
5.
Ms. Mirawaty Mat
Ghani
6.
Mr. Rohasreyn
Hashim
ADMINISTRATION
POSITION
TELEPHONE
Chief Science
7541
Officer
Senior Science
7629
Officer
EMAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
Research &
Graduate Studies
(Research) / Senior
Science Officer
7545
[email protected]
Senior Assistant
Registrar
(Administrative)
Assistant
Registrar
(Academic)
Assistant Registrar
7507
[email protected]
7516
[email protected]
7522
[email protected]
(Research &
Graduate Studies)
xv
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Background
The treatment and prevention of diseases have long been the foundation of conventional
thoughts in matters of health. These thoughts have undergone changes, albeit slowly,
towards the concept of a more holistic management of health, based not only on the
biology of diseases but also incorporating aspects of sociological sciences, behavior and
the environment. This concept of health gives cognizance not only to patients but to the
healthy individual as well.
Rapid advancement in technology has helped to hasten these changes in concepts,
methodologies and the way health services are disbursed. These facts are taken into
account during the development of programmes at the School of Health Sciences with the
expressed intention of producing graduates who would be able to compete in the job
market both locally and at the international level.
With these principles as its foundations, the School of Health Sciences USM was
established at the Health Campus in Kelantan on the 1st of November 1999. The School's
main objective is to holistically expand the Health Sciences disciplines. Within the ambit
of Health Sciences are included areas of specialties like Biomedicine, Dietetics, Nursing,
Forensic Science, Medical Radiation, Exercise and Sports Science, Audiology, Speech
Pathology, Nutrition and Environmental Health. In addition, several other potential health
related subjects will also be offered in due course. Thus the establishment of the School
of Health Sciences is a direct effort by USM to help fulfill the national requirement for
manpower in the areas of health and paramedical disciplines which is currently
experiencing a severe shortage of trained personnels.
The 2012/2013 academic session is the thirteenth for the School. Since the academic
session 2002/2003, eight, batches of students have graduated from various programmes.
In the academic session 2007/2008, the School of Health Sciences saw another milestone
with the reintroduction of Diploma in Nursing which was previously offered under the
School of Medical Sciences.
All programmes offered at the School of Health Sciences will be of four (4) years
duration (eight semesters). At the end of the programmes, graduates will be conferred the
Bachelor of Health Science (BHSc) (Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains Kesihatan) for their
respective disciplines with the exception of the Forensic Science programme which will
be conferred the Bachelor of Science (Forensic Science) [Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains
(Sains Forensik)] degree. Meanwhile, graduates from the Diploma in Nursing Programme
will be conferred a Diploma in Nursing.
1
Philosophy
The School of Health Sciences has a philosophy that values education as the driving force
behind the progress and development of mankind. We are committed to producing
graduates who are able to pursue their own goals and direction while contributing to the
development of an industrialised and civilised Malaysia. To fulfil the above aspiration,
the School provides an education that is sustainable, futures-oriented and globally
focused.
The School adopts a diverse and comprehensive interdisciplinary wellness-based
programme for educational, scientific and human capital development. The curriculum
provides the foundation for intellectual inquiry as well as a pragmatic contribution
focused on the wellness of individuals and communities. As a consequence, the teachinglearning methods are focused on integrative problem-solving where students are
encouraged to make group decisions that have a local emphasis with globalised
consequences.
Thus, the School of Health Sciences is committed to the promotion of scholarship that
has a foundation in scientific thinking, and professional interdisciplinary education
supported by a strong research culture. This will enable our graduates to respond to the
challenges of the 21st century with a sense of social consciousness and accountability.
This effort is expected to uplift the nation status towards attainment of being an advanced
nation by the year 2020. Excellence is regarded as the foundation of this noble effort.
Mission
To achieve and maintain excellence in health sciences by:
•
•
•
Producing graduates with a high level of intellectual inquiry and
professionalism.
Developing graduates with a strong sense of ethics and commitment to
humanity.
Transforming knowledge into an instrument for sustainable development and
wellness of society.
Vision
We are committed to be a centre of excellence in health sciences towards the wellness of
society through intellectual inquiry, creativity, innovation and dissemination of
knowledge.
2
2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1
Course Registration
Registration is an important activity during the period of study at the University.
It is the first step for the students to sit for the examination at the end of each
semester. Sign up for the right courses each semester will help to facilitate the
graduation of each student from the first semester till the final semester.
2.1.1
Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor Degree and
University’s Diploma Student
Student Data & Records Section (SDRP)
Academic Management Division Registry
(Level 1, Chancellory Building)
Tel. No. : 04-6532925/3169/4195
Fax No. : 04-6574641
Website : registry.usm.my/updr/
SDRP office is the secretariat / manager / coordinator of course
registration for the Bachelor Degree and Diploma of the University.
Further enquiries about course registration activities for the first degree
and diploma can be made at any time at the office of the Student Data
& Records Section.
2.1.2
Course Registration Platform
i)
E-Daftar (E-Registration)
E-Daftar is a platform for course registration through
website.The registration is done directly through Campus Online
portal (campusonline.usm.my). Only students with active
account are allowed to register for courses in the E-Daftar.
Registration under E-Daftar for Semester 1 usually starts 1-2
days after the release of 'Official' examination result of the
Semester 2 from the previous academic year. The system closes
a day before Semester 1 begins (usually in September). E-Daftar
registration for Semester 2 usually starts 1-2 days after Semester
1 ‘Provisional’ examination result is released until a day before
Semester 2 begins (normally in February). The actual timing of
registration under E-Daftar will be announced by the Student
Data & Records Section usually during the Revision Week of
every semester and
will be displayed on the
3
schools/centres/hostels’ bulletin board and in the USM’s official
website.
Under E-Daftar, students can register any courses offered by
USM, except co-curriculum courses. Registration of Cocurriculum courses is still placed under the administration of the
Director of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme at the
Main Campus or the Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum
Programme at the Engineering Campus and the Coordinator of
the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Health Campus.
Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students’ course
registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their preregistration application successful.
ii)
Access to E-Daftar System
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
iii)
E-Daftar System can be accessed through Campus
Online portal (campusonline.usm.my).
Students need to register in this portal to be a member.
Each member will be given an ID and password.
Students need to use the ID and password to access to their
profile page, which includes the E-Daftar menu.
Students need to click at the E-Daftar menu to access and
register for the relevant courses.
Students are advised to print the course registration
confirmation slip upon completion of the registration
process or after updating the course registration list
(add/drop) within the E-Daftar period.
E-Daftar system can only be accessed for a certain
period of time.
Guidelines to register/access to E-Daftar portal are
available at the Campus Online portal’s main page.
Online Course Registration (OCR)
OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are
applicable to students who are academically active and under
Probation (P1/P2) status. Students, who face difficulties to
register their courses in the E-Daftar can register their courses
during the official period of OCR alternatively. Each school is
responsible for scheduling this activity. Students must refer to
the schedule at the notice board of their respective schools.
4
Official period for OCR normally starts on the first day of the
semester (without the penalty charge of RM50.00). After this
official period, the registration will be considered late. (The
penalty of RM50.00 will be imposed if no reasonable excuse is
given.) During the non-penalty period, OCR will be conducted
at each school. After Week Six, all registration, including adding
and dropping courses will be administered by the Examination
& Graduation Section Office (Academic Management Division,
Registry).
2.1.3
2.1.4
The Frequency of Course Registration in One Academic Session
i)
Normal Study Semester
- 2 times per year (beginning of Semester 1 & Semester 2)
ii)
Long semester break (about one month after the final
examination of Semester 2)
- Once per year
- Applicable for relevant students only
General Guidelines Before Students Register for Courses
i)
Matters / Information / Documents Required to be noted /
considered / referred by students before course registration:
-
ii)
Refer to the respective school’s website to get updated
information for courses offered or course registration.
Decide courses to be registered according to the semester
as stipulated in the Study Program Guide Book.
List courses to be registered and number of units (unit
value) for each course.
Provide Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred).
Construct Teaching and Learning Timetable for the
registered courses (to avoid overlapping in timetable).
Read and comprehend the reminders regarding
policies/general requirements for the course registration.
The number of maximum and minimum units that can be
registered in every semester are stated as below:
Academic Status
Active
P1
P2
Minimum Unit
9
9
9
5
Maximum Unit
21
12
10
-
Determination for an academic status in a semester is based
on the academic performance of the students in the previous
semester (Grade Point Average, GPA):o GPA 2.00 & above = Active Academic Status
o GPA 1.99 & below = Probation Academic Status (P1/P2)
-
iii)
Students who meet the minimum period of residency (6
semesters for 3 years programme, 7 semesters for 3.5 years
programme or 8 semesters for 4 years programme) are
allowed to register courses with total units below 9. The
semester in which the student is on leave is not considered
for the residency period.
Type of course codes during registration:T
E
M
U
=
=
=
=
Core courses
Elective courses
Minor courses
University courses
Grade and number of units
obtain from these courses
are considered for graduation
Two (2) other course codes are:Y =
Z =
audit courses
prerequisite courses
Grade and number of units obtain from these courses are not
considered for graduation
iv)
v)
Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor.
-
Approval from the Academic Advisor is required for the
students under Probation status before being allowed to
register during the OCR period. Probation students cannot
assess E-Daftar for registration.
-
Approval from the Academic Advisor is not required for the
students under Active Status to register courses through EDaftar.
Students are not allowed to register and to repeat any course that
has achieved a grade 'C' and above.
6
2.1.5
Information/Document Given To All Students Through Campus
Online Portal (www.campusonline.com.my)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
2.1.6
The information of Academic Advisor.
Academic information such as academic status, GPA value,
CGPA value and year of study.
Cangred and Course Registration Form.
List of courses offered from all schools/centres.
Teaching and Learning Timetable for all schools/centres/units
from the three campuses.
List of pre-registered courses which have been added into the
students’ course registration record (if any).
Reminders about the University course registration
policies/general requisites.
Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses
a)
Registration for Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed.
•
However, if any problem occurs, registration for language
courses can still be carried out / updated during the official
period of OCR at the office of the School of Language,
Literacies & Translation.
•
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the
language courses are under the responsibility and
administration of the School of Language, Literacies &
Translation.
•
Any problems related to the registration of language courses
can be made to the School of Language, Literacies &
Translation. The contact details are as follow:
General Office
Malay Language Programme
Chairperson
English Language Programme
Chairperson
Foreign Language Programme
Chairperson
: 04-6534542
: 04-6533974
: 04-6533406
: 04-6533396
Engineering Campus Programme
Chairperson
: 04-5995407
Health Campus Programme
Chairperson
: 09-7671252
7
for Main
Campus
students
b)
c)
2.1.7
Registration for Co-Curriculum courses through E-Daftar is not
allowed.
•
Registration for Co-Curriculum courses is either done
through pre-registration before the semester begins or
during the first/second week of the semester. Co-Curriculum
courses will be included in the students’ course registration
account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their preregistration application successful.
•
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the CoCurriculum courses are under the responsibility and
administration of the Director of the Centre for CoCurriculum Programme for Main Campus (046535243/45/48), Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum
Programme for Engineering Campus (04-5995091),
Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme for Health
Campus (09-7677547).
Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if necessary,
must be made within the first week. After the first week, a fine
of RM50.00 will be charged.
Registration of ‘Audit’ Course (Y code)
Registration for the ‘Audit’ course (Y code) is not allowed in the EDaftar. It can only be made during the official period of OCR in the
School or Centre involved. Students who are interested must complete
the course registration form which can be printed from the Campus
Online Portal or obtained it directly from the School. Approval from
the lecturers of the course to be audited and the Dean / Deputy Dean
(Academic) [signed and stamped] in the course registration form are
required.
Registration on ‘Audit’ courses (Y code) is not included in the
calculation of the total registered workload units. Grades obtained from
‘Audit’ course are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and total
units for graduation.
2.1.8
Registration of Prerequisite Course (Z code)
Registration of the Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the total
registered workload (unit). Grades obtained from the Prerequisite
courses are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and units for
graduation.
8
2.1.9
Late Course Registration / Late Course Addition
Late course registration or addition is not allowed after the official
period of the OCR ends without any reasonable excuses. General
information on this matter is as follows:
i)
Late course registration and addition are only allowed in the first to
the third week with the approval of the Dean. Students will be
fined RM50.00 if the reasons given are not reasonable.
ii) Application to add a course after the third week will not be
considered, except for the special cases approved by the
University.
2.1.10
Dropping Courses
Dropping the course is allowed until the end of the sixth week.
For this purpose, students must meet the requirements set by the
University as follows: i)
Dropping Course Form must be completed by the student and
signed by the lecturer of the course involved and the Dean /
Deputy Dean of their respective schools and submit it to the
general office of the School/Centre which is responsible of
offering the courses involved.
ii) Students who wish to drop a language course must obtain the
signature and stamp of the Dean of the School of Language,
Literacies and Translation, as well as the signature and stamp of
the Dean of their respective schools.
iii) Students who wish to drop the Co-Curriculum courses must obtain
the approval of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme and the
signature and stamp of the Dean of their respective schools.
iv) The option for dropping courses cannot be misused. Lecturers have
the right not to certify the course that the student wish to drop if
the student is not serious, such as the record of attendance at
lectures, tutorials and practical is unsatisfactory, as well as poor
performance in course work. The student will be denied to sit for
the examination and will be given grade 'X' and is not allowed to
repeat the course during the period of Courses during the Long
Vacation (KSCP).
9
2.1.11
Course Registration Confirmation Slip
Course registration confirmation slip that has been printed / obtained
after registering the course should be checked carefully to ensure no
errors, especially the code type of the registered course codes. Any data
errors for course registration must be corrected immediately whether
during the period of E-Daftar (for student with active status only) or
during the period of OCR at the Schools.
2.1.12
Revising and Updating Data / Information / Students Personal and
Academic Records
Personal and academic information for each student can be checked
through the Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my).
Students are advised to always check all the information displayed on
this website.
2.1.13
-
Any application/notification for correction / updating of personal
data such as the spelling of names (names must be spelled as
shown on the Identification Card), Identification Card number and
address (permanent address and correspondence address) must be
notified to the office of the Student Data & Records Section.
-
Any application / notification for correction of academic data such
as information on Major, Minor, MUET result and the course code
should be reported to the office of the Student Data & Records
Section.
-
Application / notification for correction of the examination/results
data should be reported to the office of the Examination and
Graduation Section.
Academic Advisor
Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each student.
Academic Advisors are comprised of academic staff (lecturers).
Normally, confirmation from Academic Advisors will be made known
to every student during the first semester in the first year of their
studies.
Academic Advisors will advice the students under their responsibility
on the academic-related matters. Among the important advice for the
student is the registration planning for certain courses in each semester
during the study period. Before registering the course, students are
advised to consult and discuss with their Academic Advisor to
determine the courses to be registered in a semester.
10
Final year students are advised to consult their respective academic
advisors before registering via E-Daftar to ensure they fulfil the
graduation requirements. Students under the Probation status (P1/P2)
should obtain the approval from the Academic Advisor before they
register for courses in a semester through OCR at the School and they
are not allowed to register through E-Daftar.
2.2
Interpretation of Unit/Credit
a)
Unit
Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is
determined by the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the
students. In general, a unit is defined as follows:
Type of Course
Definition of Unit
Theory
1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per
week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester.
Practical/Laboratory
1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours
per week for 13 - 14 hours in one semester
Language Proficiency
1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours
per week for 13 - 14 weeks in one
semester.
Industrial Training/
Teaching Practice
1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training.
b)
Contact
Contact is defined as formal face-to-face meeting between an
academic staff and his/her students and it may take the form of
lectures, tutorials, seminar, laboratory and field work.
c)
Accumulated Credit Unit
Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate,
students must accumulate the total number of credits stipulated
for the program concerned.
2.3
Examination System
Examination would be held at the end of every semester. Students have
to sit for the examination of the courses they have registered. Students
are required to settle all due fees and fulfil the standing requirements for
lectures/tutorials/practical and other requirements before being allowed
to sit for the examination of courses they registered. Course evaluation
11
will be based on the two components of coursework and final
examinations. Coursework evaluation includes tests, essays, projects,
assignments and participation in tutorials.
Duration of Examination
Evaluated Courses
Examination Duration
2 units
1 hour for coursework of more than 40%
2 units
2 hours for coursework of 40% and below
3 units or more
2 hours for coursework of more than 40%
3 units or more
3 hours for coursework of 40% and below
Barring from Examination
Students will be barred from sitting the final examination if they do not
satisfy the course requirements, such as absence from lectures and
tutorials for at least 70%, and have not completed/fulfilled the required
components of coursework. Students will also be barred from sitting the
final examination if they have not settled the academic fees. A grade 'X'
would be awarded for a course in which a student is barred. Students
will not be allowed repeating the course during Course during the Long
Vacation (KSCP).
Grade Point Average System
Student academic achievement for registered courses will be graded as
follows:
Alphabetic
Grade
Grade Points
A
A-
4.00
3.67
B+
B
3.33 3.00
B-
C+
C
C-
D+
D
2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67
1.33
1.00
D-
F
0.67 0
Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course
would be given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the
course during the KSCP (See below) or normal semester. Students
awarded with grade 'C' and above for a particular course will not be
allowed to repeat the course whether during KSCP or normal semester.
The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point
Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a
particular semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the academic
performance of students in any semester.
12
CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student
from one semester to another during the years of study.
The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:
Grade Point Average =
n
∑ Ui Mi
i=1
________
n
∑ Ui
i=1
where
n = Number of courses taken
Ui = Course units for course i
Mi = Grade point for course i
Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Course
Semester I
Unit Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP
ABC XX1
ABC XX2
4
4
3.00
2.33
B
C+
12.00
9.32
BCDXX3
3
1.67
C-
5.01
CDEXX4
4
2.00
C
8.00
EFGXX5
3
1.33
D+
3.99
EFGXX6
2
20
2.67
B-
5.34
43.66
GPA = 43.66 = 2.18
20
Course
Semester II ABCXX7
Unit
3
Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP
1.00
D
3.00
ABBXX8
4
2.33
C+
9.32
BBCXX9
4
2.00
C
8.00
BCBX10
YZXX1
4
3
18
2.67
3.33
BB+
10.68
9.99
40.99
GPA = 40.99 = 2.28
18
CGPA = Total Accumulated GP
43.66 + 40.99 84.65
Total Accumulated Unit =
20 + 18
= 38 = 2.23
13
From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total
grade point accumulated for all the registered courses and divided by
the total number of the registered units.
Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti Panjang)
(KSCP)
KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and
obtained a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who
have obtained 'X' or 'F*' grade are not allowed to take the course during
KSCP.
The purpose of KSCP is to:
i)
Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for
graduation.
ii) Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for
graduation.
iii) Assist "probationary" students to enhance their academic status.
iv) Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course,
which is not offered in the following semester.
However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking
courses that they have attempted before and achieved a grade as
stipulated above, provided that the course is being offered. Priority is
given to the final year students. Usually, formal lectures are not held,
and teaching is via tutorials.
The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of
examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is
available in the University's Academic Calendar.
The Implementation KSCP
a)
Students are allowed to register a maximum of 3 courses and
the total number of units registered must not exceed 10.
b) Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest marks/the
best grades obtained in a particular course in the normal semester
before KSCP. The final overall grade is determined as follows:
Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade + Marks
or grade for KSCP examination
14
c)
GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in KSCP)
and also involves courses taken in the second semester and those
repeated in KSCP. If the GPA during KSCP as calculated above
is 2.00 or better, the academic status will be active, even though
the academic status for the second semester was on probation
status. However, if the GPA for KSCP (as calculated above) is 1.99
or below, the academic status will remain as probation status for
the second semester.
d) Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation
requirements) in the second semester are not allowed to register for
KSCP.
Academic Status
Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for
any examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be
allowed to pursue his/her studies for the following semester.
Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who
achieves a GPA of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation
status for three consecutive semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed
to pursue his/her studies at the university. On the other hand, if the
CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student concerned will be allowed to
pursue his/her studies and will be maintained at P2 status.
Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University
Examination Council has the absolute right to terminate any student's
studies if his/her academic achievement do not satisfy and fulfil the
accumulated minimum credit in line with the number of semesters
completed by the student as given in the table below.
Total Accumulated Minimum Credit
Units
Number of Semesters
Pure
Applied
Professional
nd
15
15
16
th
End of 4 semester
35
35
38
th
End of 6 semester
55
55
60
th
75
75
80
End of 2 semester
End of 8 semester
The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any
student's studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not
registered for the courses, has not attended examination without valid
reasons), as well as medical reasons can be disqualified from pursuing
his/her studies.
15
Examination Result
A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Tele-academic line: (60083-7899), Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will
usually be released and announced after the School Examination
Council meeting and presumably one month after final examination.
Full result (grade) can be enquired through the Tele-academic line:
(600-83-7899), Campus Online Portal and short message service
(SMS) will be released and announced after the University
Examination Council meeting and is usually two weeks after the
provisional results are released.
The official semester results (SEMGRED) will be issued to students
during the second week of the following semester.
2.4
Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer
Definition of Unit Exemption
Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to students
who are pursuing their studies in USM that are exempted from the
graduation requirements. Students only need to accumulate the
remaining units for graduating purpose. Only passes or course grades
accumulated or acquired in USM will be included in the calculation of
the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for graduation purpose.
Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption
a)
Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private Institutions
of Higher Learning:
i)
Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken at
diploma level.
ii) Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in two or
more combinations) in order to obtain exemption of one
course at degree level. However if the School would like to
approve only one course at the diploma level for unit
exemption of one course at degree level, the course at
diploma level must be equivalent to the degree course and
has the same or more units.
iii) Courses taken during employment (in service) for diploma
holders cannot be considered for unit exemption.
16
iv) The minimum achievement at diploma level that can be
considered for unit exemption is at least 'C' grade or 2.0 or
equivalent.
v) The total number of semesters exempted should not exceed
two semesters.
vi) In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial training, a
student must have work experience continuously for at least
two years in the area. If the student has undergone
industrial training during the diploma level study, a student
must have work experience for at least one year. The
students are also required to produce the report on the level
and type of work performed. Industrial training unit
exemption cannot be considered for semester exemption as
the industrial training is carried out during the long vacation
in USM.
vii) Unit exemption for university and option courses can only
be given for courses such as Bahasa Malaysia (LKM400),
English Language, Islamic and Asian Civilisations and as
well as co-curriculum.
b)
IPTS (Private Institution of Higher
Supervised/External Diploma Graduates
i)
c)
Learning)
USM
Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external diploma
graduates are given unit exemption as stipulated by the
specific programme of study. Normally, unit exemption in
this category is given as a block according to the agreement
between USM (through School that offers the programme)
with the IPTS.
Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public
Institution of Higher Learning)/IPTS who are studying at the
Bachelor Degree level may apply to study in this university and
if successful, can be considered for unit exemptions subject to
the following conditions:
i)
Courses taken in the previous IPT are equivalent (at least
50% of the course must be the same) with courses offered in
USM.
ii) Students taking courses at advanced diploma level in IPT
that is recognised to be equivalent to the Bachelor Degree
course at USM may be considered for unit exemption as in
c) i).
17
iii)
The total maximum unit exemption allowed should not exceed
one third of the total unit requirement for graduation.
Total Number of Exempted Semesters
Semester exemption is based on the total unit exempted as below:Total Unit Exempted
<9
9-32
>32
Total Semester Exempted
1
2
Application Procedure for Unit Exemption
Any student who would like to apply for exemption unit is required to
complete the Unit Exemption Form which can be obtained at the
counter of Admission and Enrolments Unit or the respective schools.
The form must to be approved by the Dean/Deputy Dean of the School
prior to the submission to the Admission and Enrolments Unit for
consideration.
Definition of Credit Transfer
Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of a total number of credits
obtained by USM students taking courses in other IPTA (Public
Institution of Higher Learning) within the period of study at USM, and
is combined with credits obtained at USM to fulfil units requirement
for his/her programme of study. The transferred examination result or
grades obtained in courses taken at other IPTA will be combined in the
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) calculation.
Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit Transfer
USM full-time Bachelor Degree level students who would like to
attend specific Bachelor Degree level courses at other IPTA.
USM full-time diploma level students who would like to attend specific
diploma level courses at other IPTA.
18
Conditions
a)
Basic and Core Courses
i)
Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained
from other courses in other IPTA that are equivalent (at
least 50% of the content are the same) with the courses
offered by the programme.
ii) Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have
the same number of units or more. For equivalent courses
but with less number of units, credit transfers can be
approved by combining a few courses. Credits transferred
are the same as the course units as offered in USM.
Average grade of the combined course will be taken into
account in CGPA calculation.
b)
Elective or Option Courses
i)
Students may attend any appropriate courses in other IPTA
subject to permission from the School as well as the
approval of other IPTA.
ii) The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at
other IPTA. No course equivalence condition is required.
c)
Minor Courses
i)
For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should
adhere to either conditions (a) or (b), and take into account
of the programme requirement.
d)
The total maximum units transferred should not exceed one third
of the total number of units for the programme.
e)
Credit exemption from other IPTA can be considered only once
for each IPTA.
f)
The examination results obtained by a student taken at other
IPTA will be taken into account for graduation purpose. Grade
obtained for each course will be combined with the grades
obtained at USM for CGPA calculation.
g)
Students who have applied and approved for credit transfer are
not allowed to cancel the approval after the examination result is
obtained.
19
h)
Students are required to register courses at other IPTA with not
less than the total minimum units as well as not exceeding the
maximum units as stipulated in their programme of study.
However, for specific cases (e.g. students on extended semester
and only require a few units for graduation), the Dean may
approve such students to register less than the minimum and the
semester will not be counted in the residential requirement. In
this case, the CGPA calculation will be carried out as in KSCP.
i)
USM students attending courses at other IPTA and if failed in
any courses are allowed to resit the examination if there is such
provision in that IPTA.
j)
If the method of calculation of examination marks in the other
IPTA is not the same as in USM, a grade conversion method will
be carried out according to the existing scales.
k)
USM students who have registered courses at other IPTA and
decided to return to study in USM, must adhere to the existing
course registration conditions in USM.
Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit Transfer
USM students who would like to attend courses/credit transfer at other
IPTAs should apply using Unit Exemption Form.
The application form should be submitted for the Dean's approval for
the programme of study within three months before the application is
submitted to other IPTA for consideration.
2.5
Academic Integrity
"Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without
integrity is dangerous and weak" – Samuel Johnson
Being a student of the University Sains Malaysia requires a firm
adherence to the basic values, integrity, purpose and meaning of a
university education. The most essential values in academia are rooted
on the principles of truth seeking in knowledge and honesty with
regards to the intellectual property of oneself and of others. Thus,
students must bear the responsibility of maintaining these principles in
all work done in their academic endeavour.
20
Academic dishonesty violates the fundamental purpose of preserving
and maintaining the integrity of university education and will not be
tolerated. The following, although not exhaustive, are examples of
practices or actions that are considered dishonest acts in academic
pursuit.
(a)
Cheating
Cheating is the unauthorised use of information or other aids in
any academic exercise. There are numerous "infamous" ways
and methods of cheating including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copying from others during a test or an exam.
Using unauthorised materials or devices (calculator, PDA,
mobile phone, pager, etc.) during a test or an exam.
Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam
for you and vice-versa.
Sharing answers or programmes for an assignment or project.
Tampering with marked/graded work after it has been
returned, then resubmitting it for remarking/regrading.
Allowing others to do the research, writing, programming, or
other types of assignment.
Submitting identical or similar work in more than one course
without consulting or prior permission from the lecturers
involved.
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding conduct
during examination (Part II, Provision 8):
Conduct during examination
8. No student can(a) take any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other
materials, other than those authorised by the examiner, into or out of
any examination room, or receive any form of books, worksheets,
documents, pictures or any other materials from outsiders when in
examination room. Students can receive any form of books,
worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials recommended
by the examiner or the Board of Examiners, and authorized by the
Vice-Chancellor
(b) write, or have somebody else to write, any information or to draw
diagrams which can be related to the examination taken by the
student, on any parts of the body, or on the clothing’s worn by the
student.
(c) contact with other students during an examination through any form
of communication, or
(d) cheat or try to cheat or act in any way that can be interpreted as
cheating.
21
(b)
Plagiarism
Plagiarism is "academic theft". It violates the intellectual
property rights of the author. Simply put, it is the use, in part or
whole, of other's words or ideas and claiming it as yours without
proper attribution to the original author. It includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copying and pasting information, graphics or media from the
Internet into your work without citing the source.
Paraphrasing or summarising other's written or spoken words
that are not common knowledge, without referencing the
source.
Not putting quote marks around parts of the source that you
copy exactly.
Using someone else's work or acquiring papers, assignment,
project or research you did not do and turning it in as if you
had done the work yourself.
Giving incorrect information about the source of reference.
Not acknowledging collaborators in an assignment, paper,
project or research.
Plagiarism is, however, often misunderstood. There are
numerous sources in the Internet that describe plagiarism and
explain acceptable ways for using borrowed words. Students
should explore the relevant materials.
22
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding
prohibition against plagiarism (Part II, Provision 6):
Prohibitions against plagiarism
6. (1) A student shall not plagiarise any idea, writing, data or invention
belonging to another person.
(2) For the purpose of this rule, plagiarism includes:
(a) the act of taking an idea, writing, data or invention of another
person and claiming that the idea, writing, data or invention is
the result of one's own findings or creation; or
(b) an attempt to make out or the act of making out, in such a way,
that one is the original source or the creator of an idea,
writing, data or invention which has actually been taken from
some other source.
(3) Without prejudice to the generality of sub rule (2), a student
plagiarises when he/she:
(a) publishes, with himself/herself as the author, an abstract,
article, scientific or academic paper, or book which is wholly
or partly written by some other person;
(b) incorporates himself/herself or allows himself/herself to be
incorporated as a co-author of an abstract, article, scientific or
academic paper, or book, when he/she has not at all made any
written contribution to the abstract, article, scientific or
academic paper, or book;
(c) forces another person to include his/her name in the list of coresearchers for a particular research project or in the list of
co-authors for a publication when he/she has not made any
contribution which may qualify him/her as a co-researcher or
co-author;
(d) extract academic data which are the result of research
undertaken by some other person, such as laboratory findings
or field work findings or data obtained through library
research, whether published or unpublished, and incorporate
those data as part of his/her academic research without giving
due acknowledgement to the actual source;
(e) uses research data obtained through collaborative work with
some other person, whether or not that other person is a staff
member or a student of the University, as part of another
distinct personal academic research of his/her, or for a
publication In his/her own name as sole author, without
obtaining the consent of his/her co-researchers prior to
embarking on his/her personal research or prior to publishing
the data;
23
(f)
transcribes the ideas or creations of others kept in whatever
form, whether written, printed or available in electronic form,
or in slide form, or in whatever form of teaching or research
apparatus, or in any other form, and claims whether directly or
indirectly that he/she is the creator of that idea or creation;
(g) translates the writing or creation of another person from one
language to another whether or not wholly or partly, and
subsequently presents the translation in whatever form or
manner as his/her own writing or creation; or
(h) extracts ideas from another person's writing or creation and
makes certain modifications without due reference to the
original source and rearranges them in such a way that it
appears as if he/she is the creator of those ideas.
(c)
Fabrication
Unauthorised invention, alteration, falsification or misleading
use of data, information or citation in any academic work
constitutes fabrication. Fabricated information neither represent
the student's own effort nor the truth concerning a particular
investigation or study thus violates the principle of truth seeking
in knowledge. Some examples are:
•
•
•
•
•
(d)
Making up or changing of data or result, or using someone
else's result, in an experiment, assignment or research.
Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to.
Intentional listing of incorrect or fictitious references.
Falsifying of academic records or documents to gain
academic advantage.
Forging signatures of authorisation in any academic record or
other university document.
Collusion
The School does not differentiate between those who commit an
act of academic dishonesty with those who knowingly allow or
help others in performing those acts. Some examples of
collusion include:
•
•
•
•
Paying, bribing or allowing someone to do an assignment,
test/exam, project or research for you.
Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project
or research for something in return.
Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others.
Providing material, information, or sources to others knowing
that such aids could be used in any dishonest act.
24
(e)
Unfair Advantage
A student may obtain an unfair advantage over another, which is
also a breach of academic integrity, in several ways including:
•
•
•
•
(f)
Gaining access to, stealing, reproducing or circulating of
test or exam material prior to its authorised time.
Depriving others of the use of library material by stealing,
defacing, destroying or hiding it.
Intentionally interfering with other's effort to do their
academic work.
Altering or destroying work or computer files/programmes
that belong to others or those that are meant for the whole
class.
Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity
Both students and academic staff must assume the responsibility
of protecting and upholding the academic integrity of the
university. In the event that a student encounters any incident
that denotes academic dishonesty, the student is expected to
report it to the relevant lecturer. The lecturer is then responsible
to substantiate the violation and is encouraged to confront the
perpetrator(s) to discuss the facts surrounding the allegation, and
report the matter to the Deputy Deans or the Dean of the School.
If the lecturer found that the student is guilty, an appropriate
punitive grading may be applied, depending on the extent of the
violation. Examples of punitive grading are giving lower grade
or "F" on the assignment, test, project, or lower grade or "F" for
the whole course.
If the violation is deemed serious by the lecturer, the matter will
be brought to the attention of the University Disciplinary
Authority where appropriate action will be taken. If a student is
caught in an examination, the University Examination Board
will pursue the matter according to the university's procedure.
The consequence then may range from a warning, fine not
exceeding RM200, exclusion from any specific part or parts of
the University for a specified period, suspension from being a
student of the University for a specified period, or expulsion
from the University (University and University College Act
1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule
1999).
25
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding
Disciplinary Punishment (Part II, Provision 48):
Disciplinary punishment
48.
2.6
A student who commits a disciplinary offense under these Rules and
found guilty of the offense can be punished according to any one or any
two or more of the following appropriate actions;
(a) warning;
(b) fine not more than two hundred ringgit;
(c) banned from entering any or certain premises of the University for
a specified period;
(d) suspended from being a student of the University for a specified
period;
(e) dismissed from the University
USM Mentor Programme
Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves the staff
undergoing special training as a consultant and guide to USM
community who would like to share their feelings and any psychosocial
aspects that could harm their social functions. This programme
manages psychosocial issues in a more effective manner and finally
could improve the well-being of individuals in order to achieve life of
better quality.
Objectives
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
As a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing
with stress, psychosocial problems and many more in order to
reinforce the well-being of the USM community.
To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one
another by appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent
who promotes caring society for USM
To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help
To prevent damages in any psychosocial aspects before they
reach a critical stage.
For more information, please visit www.usm.my/mentor
26
2.7
Student Exchange Programme
(a)
Study Abroad Scheme
The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM students
to study one or two semesters abroad at any USM partners
institutions. Ideally, students are encouraged to participate in the
exchange programme within their third to fifth semester (3 years degree
programme) and within third to seventh semester (4 years degree
programme).
Studies abroad are planned beforehand with the Dean or Deputy
Dean of the respective School, and with the International Office.
Credits earned at an associate university are transferable as a part
of credit accumulation for graduation.
(b)
Student Exchange Programme between Local Higher
Education Institutions (RPPIPT)
This is a programme that allows students of public higher learning
institutions to do an exchange programme for a semester between the
public higher institutions itself. Students can choose any relevant
courses and apply for credit transfers.
For more information, please visit http://www.usm.my/io or contact the
Academic Collaboration Unit, International Office at +604-653
2775/2778.
2.8
Graduation Requirements
In order to graduate, students must fulfil both the minimum residence
and the academic requirement such as:
(a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e
total credits and the required number of credits for each component
in the programme [Core, Elective, University and Optional (if
appropriate) courses].
(b) Obtain a minimum grade points of 2.00 and above for all Core
courses.
(c) Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme.
(d) Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point 2.00 for the language
courses (Bahasa Malaysia and English), Ethnics Relation and the
TITAS courses.
27
3.0
UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
3.1
Summary of University Requirements
Students are required to take 15 - 22 units of the following
University/Option courses for University requirements:
University Requirements
Unit
1 Bahasa Malaysia
2
2 English Language
4
3 Local Students
• Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 Units)
• Ethnic Relations (2 Units)
• Core Entrepreneurship* (2 Units)
6
International Students
• Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
• Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language
(2 Units)
Third
Language/Co-Curriculum /Skill Course/Options
4
Students have to choose one of the followings:
• Third Language Package
• Co-Curriculum** (1-6 units)
• Skill Course/Options
Total
3 - 10
15 - 22
*
Students from Schools which have a similar course as this are
exempted from following this course. The units should be
replaced by an option course.
** Students from the School of Education are required to choose a
uniformed body co-curriculum package. Students from the School
of Medical Sciences and School of Dentistry are required to
register two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in year Two.
Students from the School of Health Sciences are required to
register one (1) unit of Co-Curriculum course.
Details of the University requirements are given in the following
sections.
28
3.2
Bahasa Malaysia
(a) Local Students
The requirements are as follows:
•
LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV
All Malaysian students must take LKM400 and pass with the
minimum of grade C in order to graduate.
Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as follows:
No
Qualification
Grade Level of Type Units Status
Entry
1. (a) SPM/MCE/SC
2 Graduation
1 - 6 LKM400 U
(or equivalent qualification)
requirement
P/S
(b) STPM/HSC
(or equivalent qualification)
Note: To obtain credit units for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum
grade of C is required.
Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation if they have different Bahasa
Malaysia qualification from the above.
(b) International Students
•
International students pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in Science,
Accounting, Arts (ELLS), Education (TESL) and Housing,
Building and Planning.
All international students in this category are required to take the
following courses:
Code
LKM100
•
Type
U
Units
2
International students (non-Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s
degrees in Arts.
29
International students in this category are required to take and pass
three Intensive Malay Language courses before they commence their
Bachelor’s degree programmes.
Code
LKM101
Course
Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan I
Duration
4 months
LKM102
LKM201
Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan II
Bahasa Malaysia Pertengahan
4 months
4 months
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of
students is as follows:
Code
LKM300
•
Type
U
Units
2
International students (Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in
Arts.
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of
students is as follows:
Code
LKM200
LKM300
Type
U
U
Units
2
2
Note: Students must pass with a minimum grade of C for type U
courses.
30
3.3
English Language
All Bachelor’s degree students must take 4 units of English Language
courses in fulfillment of the University requirement for graduation.
(e) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses
No
English Language
Qualification
Grade
Level of
Entry
Status
1.
*MUET
LSP401/402/403/404
†Discretion of Dean
Band 6
A-C
LHP
Compulsory/
451/452/453/ Option/Type U
(2 Units)
454/455/456/
457/458/459
2.
*MUET
LSP300
†Discretion of Dean
Band 5
A-C
LSP
401/402/403/
404
Compulsory/
Type U
(2 Units)
3.
*MUET
LMT100
†Discretion of Dean
Band 4
A-C
LSP300
Compulsory/
Type U
(2 Units)
4.
*MUET
†Discretion of Dean
Band 3/2/1
(Score
0 - 179)
LMT100/
Re-sit MUET
Pre-requisite/
Type Z
(2 Units)
* MUET: Malaysia University English Test.
† Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation if they have different English Language
qualification from the above.
Note:
•
•
•
•
Students are required to accumulate four (4) units of English for
graduation.
In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students have
to pass with a minimum grade of C.
Students with a Score 260 - 300 (Band 6) in MUET must
accumulate the 4 units of English from the courses in the postadvanced level (LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/ 458/459*).
They can also take foreign language courses to replace their English
language units but they must first obtain a written consent from the
Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation.
(Please use the form that can be obtained from the School of
Languages, Literacies and Translation.)
[*The number of units for LHP457 is 4 and for LHP451, 452, 453,
454, 455, 456, 458 and 459 is 2.]
Students with a score of 179 and below in MUET are required to
resit MUET to improve their score to Band 4 or take LMT100 and
pass with a minimum grade of C.
31
(b) English Language Courses (Compulsory English Language Units)
The English Language courses offered as University courses are as
follows:
No Code/Unit
Course Title
School (If Applicable)
1.
LMT100/2
Preparatory English
Students from all Schools
2.
LSP300/2
Academic English
Students from all Schools
3.
LSP401/2
General English
Students from:
School of Education Studies (Arts)
School of Fine Arts
School of Humanities
School of Social Sciences
4.
LSP402/2
Scientific and
Medical English
Students from:
School of Biological Sciences
School of Physics
School of Chemical Sciences
School of Mathematical Sciences
School of Industrial Technology
School of Education Studies
(Science)
School of Medical Sciences
School of Health & Dental
Sciences
School of Pharmaceutical Sciences
5.
LSP403/2
Business and
Communication
English
Students from:
School of Management
School of Communication
6.
LSP404/2
Technical and
Engineering English
Students from:
School of Computer Sciences
School of Housing, Building and
Planning
Schools of Engineering
7.
LDN 101/2 English For Nursing I Students from School of Health
Sciences
8.
LDN 201/2 English For Nursing
II
32
Students from School of Health
Sciences
3.4
Local Students - Islamic and
Relations/Core Entrepreneurship
Asian
Civilisations/Ethnic
(a) Islamic and Asian Civilisations (The course is conducted in Bahasa
Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum
grade of C):
HTU 223 - Islamic and Asian Civilisation (TITAS) (2 units)
This course aims to increase students’ knowledge on history,
principles, values, main aspect of Malay civilization, Islamic
civilization and its culture. With the academic exposure to cultural
issues and civilization in Malaysia, it is hoped that students will be
more aware of issues that can contribute to the cultivation of the
culture of respect and harmony among the plural society of
Malaysia.
Among the topics in this course are Interaction among Various
Civilization,
Islamic
Civilization,
Malay
Civilization,
Contemporary Challenges faced by the Islamic and Asian
Civilization and Islamic Hadhari Principles.
(b) Ethnic Relations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum
grade of C):
SHE 101 - Ethnic Relations (2 units)
This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia. This
course is designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce students
to the basic concept and the practices of social accord in Malaysia,
(2) to reinforce basic understanding of challenges and problems in
a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to provide an understanding and
awareness in managing the complexity of ethnic relations in
Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is hoped that students will be
able to identify and apply the skills to issues associated with ethnic
relations in Malaysia.
(c) Core Entrepreneurship (The course is conducted in Bahasa
Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum
grade of C):
WUS 101 - Core Entrepreneurship (2 units)
33
This course aims to provide basic exposure to students in the field
of entrepreneurship and business, with emphasis on the
implementation of the learning aspects while experiencing the
process of executing business projects in campus. The mode of
teaching is through interactive lectures, practical, business plan
proposal, execution of entrepreneurial projects and report
presentations. Practical experiences through hands-on participation
of students in business projects management will generate interest
and provide a clearer picture of entrepreneurship world. The main
learning outcome is the assimilation of culture and
entrepreneurship work ethics in their everyday life. This initiative
is made to open the minds and arouse the spirit of entrepreneurship
among target groups that possess the potentials to become
successful entrepreneurs. By exposing entrepreneurial knowledge
to all students, it is hoped that it will accelerate the effort to
increase the number of middle class entrepreneurs in the country.
For more information, please refer to the Co-curriculum Program
Reference Book.
3.5
International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option
(a) Malaysian Studies
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum
grade of C) for all international students:
SEA205E - Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of
government and the major trends in contemporary Malaysia.
Emphasis will be given both to current issues in Malaysian politics
and the historical and economic developments and trends of the
country. The discussion begins with a review of the independence
process. An analysis of the formation and workings of the major
institutions of government – parliament, judiciary, bureaucracy,
and the electoral and party systems will follow this. The scope and
extent of Malaysian democracy will be considered, especially in
light of current changes and developments in Malaysian politics.
The second part of the course focuses on specific issues: ethnic
relations, national unity and the national ideology; development
and political change; federal-state relations; the role of religion in
Malaysian politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the modern
world system; civil society; law, justice and order; and directions
for the future.
34
(b) Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units)
International students need to fulfill a further 2 units of option
course or additional Bahasa Malaysia/English Language course.
3.6
Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options
Students have to choose one of the followings (A/B/C):
(A) Third Language Package (6 Units)
Third Language Courses are offered as University courses. They are
offered as a package of three (3) levels, 2 units per level. The total
number of units per package is 6. Students are requested to complete
all levels (3 semesters). The packages offered are as follows:
Commn.
Arabic
Commn.
Chinese
Commn.
Japanese
Commn.
German
Commn.
Korean
LTA100/2
LTC100/2
LTJ100/2
LTG100/2
LTK100/2
LTA200/2
LTC200/2
LTJ200/2
LTG200/2
LTK200/2
LTA300/2
LTC300/2
LTJ300/2
LTG300/2
LTK300/2
Commn.
French
Commn.
Spanish
Commn.
Tamil
Commn.
Thai
LTP100/2
LTE100/2
LTT100/2
LTS100/2
LTP200/2
LTE200/2
LTT200/2
LTS200/2
LTP300/2
LTE300/2
LTT300/2
LTS300/2
(B) Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (4 - 6 Units)
Students who choose to take packaged co-curriculum courses are
required to complete all levels of the package. It is compulsory for
students from the School of Education to choose a uniformed body cocurriculum package from the list below (excluding Seni Silat Cekak).
The co-curriculum packages offered are as follows:
•
Armed Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (6
Units) (3 years)
35
PALAPES
PALAPES
PALAPES
SUKSIS
Tentera Darat Tentera Laut Tentera Udara (Student Police
(Army)
(Navy)
(Air Force)
Volunteer)
Seni Silat
Cekak
WTD102/2
WTL102/2
WTU102/2
WPD101/2
WCC123/2
WTD202/2
WTL202/2
WTU202/2
WPD201/2
WCC223/2
WTD302/2
WTL302/2
WTU302/2
WPD301/2
WCC323/2
• Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (4 Units) (2 Years)
Kelana Siswa
(Rover Training)
Bulan Sabit Merah
(Red Crescent)
Ambulans St. John
(St. John Ambulance)
WLK101/2
WBM101/2
WJA101/2
WLK201/2
WBM201/2
WJA201/2
• Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (2 Units) (1 Year)
SISPA (Siswa Siswi Pertahanan Awam) (Public Defense)
(offered in Health Campus only)
WLK101/2
WLK201/2
(C) Co-Curriculum/Skill Course/Options (1 – 6 Units)
All students are encouraged to follow the co-curriculum courses and
are given a maximum total of 6 units for Community Service, Culture,
Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and Leadership (Students from the
School of Medical Sciences and School of Dentistry are required to
register for two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in Year Two).
(Students from the School of Health Sciences must take at least one of
the co-curriculum courses while those from the School of Education
must take the uniformed co-curriculum package [excluding Seni Silat
Cekak]). Students who do not enroll for any co-curriculum courses or
who enroll for only a portion of the 3 units need to replace these units
with skill/option courses. The co-curriculum, skill and option courses
offered are as follows:
(i) Community Service, Culture, Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and
Leadership Co-Curriculum Courses
36
Packaged
(Students are required to complete all levels)
Khidmat Masyarakat
(Community Service)
(2 Years)
Jazz Band
(3 Years)
Karate
(3 Semesters)
Taekwondo
(3 Semesters)
WKM101/1
WCC108/1
WSC108/1
WSC115/1
WKM201/1
WCC208/1
WSC208/1
WSC215/1
WCC308/1
WSC308/1
WSC315/1
Non-Packaged (1 Semester)
Culture
Sports
WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting)
WSC105/1 - Bola Tampar (Volley
Ball)
WCC105/1 - Gamelan
WSC106/1 - Golf
WCC107/1 - Guitar
WSC110/1 - Memanah (Archery)
WCC109/1 - Koir (Choir)
WSC111/1 - Ping Pong (Table Tennis)
WCC110/1 - Kraftangan (Handcrafting)
WSC112/1 - Renang (Swimming)
WCC115/1 - Tarian Moden (Modern
WSC113/1 - Aerobik (Aerobic)
Dance)
WCC116/1 - Tarian Tradisional
WSC114/1 - Skuasy (Squash)
(Traditional Dance)
WCC117/1 - Teater Moden (Modern
WSC116/1 - Tenis (Tennis)
Theatre)
WCC118/1 - Wayang Kulit Melayu
WSC119/1 - Badminton
(Malay Shadow Play)
WCC119/1 - Senaman Qigong Asas (Basic WSC122/1 - Selaman SCUBA (SCUBA
Qigong Exercise)
Diving)
WCC219 - Senaman Qigong Pertengahan
WSC123/1 - Kriket (Cricket)
(Intermediate Qigong Exercise)
WCC124/1 - Kompang Berlagu
WCC124/1 - Sepak Takraw
WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak (Culinary Art)
WSC 125/1 - Futsal
WCC127/1 - Kesenian Muzik Nasyid
WSC 126/1 - Bola Jaring (Netball)
(Nasyid Musical Art)
Innovation & Initiative
Leadership (Kepimpinan)
WCC120/1 - Canting Batik (Batik Painting) WSC 127/1 - Pengurusan Acara 1
(Event Management 1)
WCC121/1 - Seni Khat (Calligraphic Art)
WSC 227/1 - Pengurusan Acara 2
(Event Management 2)
WCC125/1 - Seni Wau Tradisional
(Traditional Kite Art)
WCC128 - Seni Sulaman & Manik Labuci
(Embroidery & Beads Sequins
Art)
WCC 130 - Seni Fotografi SLR Digital
(Digital SLR Photography Art)
37
(ii) HTV201/2 - Teknik Berfikir (Thinking Techniques)
(iii) Other option/skill courses as recommended or required by the
respective school (if any)
(iv) English Language Courses
The following courses may be taken as university courses to fulfill
the compulsory English Language requirements (for Band 5 and
Band 6 in MUET) or as skill/option courses:
No
1.
Code/Unit
LHP451/2
Course Title
Effective Reading
2.
LHP452/2
Business Writing
3.
LHP453/2
Creative Writing
4.
LHP454/2
Academic Writing
5.
LHP455/2
English Pronunciation Skills
6.
LHP456/2
Spoken English
7.
LHP457/4
Speech Writing and Public Speaking
8.
LHP458/2
English for Translation
(Offered only in Semester II)
9.
LHP459/2
English for Interpretation
(Offered only in Semester I)
38
(v) Foreign Language Courses
The foreign language courses offered by the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation can be taken by students as option or
compulsory courses to fulfill the number of units required for
graduation. Students are not allowed to register for more than one
foreign language course per semester. They must complete at least
two levels of a foreign language course before they are allowed to
register for another foreign language course. However, students are
not required to complete all four levels of one particular foreign
language course. The foreign language courses offered are as
follows:
Arabic
LAA100/2
LAA200/2
LAA300/2
LAA400/2
French
LAP100/2
LAP200/2
LAP300/2
LAP400/2
Chinese
LAC100/2
LAC200/2
LAC300/2
LAC400/2
Japanese
LAJ100/2
LAJ200/2
LAJ300/2
LAJ400/2
Thai
LAS100/2
LAS200/2
LAS300/2
LAS400/2
39
German
LAG100/2
LAG200/2
LAG300/2
LAG400/2
Tamil
LAT100/2
LAT200/2
LAT300/2
Spanish
LAE100/2
LAE200/2
LAE300/2
LAE400/2
Korean
LAK100/2
LAK200/2
LAK300/2
3.7
Foundation Courses
Foundation courses are compulsory for all students pursuing the health
science bachelor degrees in School of Health Sciences. These courses
cover the basic knowledge and skills essential for various health related
disciplines and are intended to prepare the students to undertake more
advance courses later on. The total number of units required for
graduation varies according to the respective programmes. Generally,
each student is required to take between 16-25 units. Below is the
summary of the Foundation Courses:
No.
Course
Code
Course Title
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTU201/2
GTU301/3
8.
9.
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
Structure and Function of Human I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetic
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Human II
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Health and Society
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
3.8
Course Offered
Year Semester
1
I
1
I
1
I & II
1
II
1
I & II
2
I & II
3
I & II
3
3
I & II
I & II
Core Courses
These courses form the major component of the programme of studies
and reflect the specialisation and expertise of each programme. Please
refer to the list of core courses of the respective programme.
3.9
Electives Courses
The purpose of offering elective courses is to ensure that students are
presented with knowledge which not only complement the core courses
but also will enhance and broaden their foundation of knowledge. The
school encourages students to freely select any of the courses offered.
All students of the school of Health Sciences are required to register a
total of 8-20 units of elective courses. The units from electives courses
will contribute to the total number of units for graduation.
40
Students are reminded to ONLY select courses indicated by the school and to
avoid selecting courses from own programme or any programmes unless
permitted and approved by the School Board. Students are strongly encouraged
to select electives courses offered within their respective academic year level.
They may choose courses from one level lower or higher than their academic
year, though this practice should be guided closely by academic advisor. The
Elective Courses offered by School of Health Sciences are as listed below.
Courses offered as Elective Courses
Course
Code
GEG103/3
Semester 1
Title of Course
Semester II
Title of Course
Unit
GTX 101/2 Science of Medical Radiation
2
GEG109/2
GEG204/3
2
3
2
GEG203/2
Health Economics
2
GEG213/3
History of Health Sciences
Gender Perspectives in
Health
Human Resource
Management in Healthcare
Organizations
Stress Management
3
GEG204/3
2
GEG302/3
Violence & Society
3
GTS207/3
GEG308/2
2
GEG209/2
3
1
2
GEG213/3
GEG214/2
GEG303/2
Stress Management
Health and Personality
Tissue Banking
3
2
2
2
GEG304/2
2
2
GEG305/2
GEG309/2
LAJ100/2
Japanese Language I
2
GEG310/2
LAA200/2
LAJ200/2
Arabic Language II
Japanese Language II
2
2
GEG311/2
GTB107/3
GTJ108/2
Communication & Self
Development
Forensic Sciences
Principles of Forensic
Dentistry
Principle of Laboratory
Animal Sciences
Botany and Health
Epidemiology
Health Communication &
Education
Arabic Language I
Japanese Language I
Arabic Language II
Japanese Language II
2
GTB404/3
LAA100/2
Tropical Natural Resource
Management
Basic Chemistry
Basic Immunology
Communication & Self
Development
Principles of Health
Management
Toxicology
Arabic Language I
Gender Perspectives in
Health
Principle of Individual
and Team Sports
Aquatic Ecosystems
GTF101/3
GTB203/1
GEG304/2
GTJ317/2
3
Course
Code
GEG109/2
History of Health
Sciences
GTX 103/2 Physics of Medical
Radiation
GEG114/2 Oral Health
GEG201/2 Women’s Health
GEG208/2
Fitness and Health
Unit
LAA100/2
LAJ100/2
LAA200/2
LAJ200/2
* GEGxxx/x= Courses are offered only as Elective Course and is subjected to changes.
41
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
3.10
PROGRAMME
3.10.1
Status of Students and Level of Study
Students are designated as equivalent to first, second, third or fourth year
according to the total units accumulated as follows:Course of Study
(Total Credit Unit
Required for
Graduation)
Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative Credit
Acquired
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Biomedicine
(124 Units)
0 - 32
33 - 68
69 - 104
≥ 105
Dietetics
(122 Units)
0 - 30
31 - 60
61 - 90
≥ 91
Nursing
(132 Units)
0 - 38
39 - 77
78 - 110
≥ 111
Medical Radiation
(124 Units)
0 - 36
37 - 70
71 - 105
≥ 106
Forensic Science
(130 Units)
0 - 40
41 - 75
76 - 107
≥ 108
Audiology
(130 Units)
0 - 35
36 - 70
71 - 102
≥ 103
Speech Pathology
(134 Units)
0 - 33
34 - 69
70 - 103
≥ 104
Exercise And Sports
Science
(126 Units)
0 - 31
32 - 68
69 - 102
≥ 103
Nutrition
(121 Units)
0 - 32
33 - 66
67 - 98
≥ 99
Environmental and
Occupational Health
(125 Units)
0 - 38
39 - 70
71 - 102
≥ 102
3.10.2
Biomedicine Programme
This is a 4-year programme. The total unit required for graduation is
124, which includes core (99 units), elective (10 units) and university
(15 units) courses.
42
3.10.3
Nursing Programme
The nursing programme was developed by taking into account the
following criteria:
(i)
The requirement of the Malaysian Nursing Board is to have
sufficient nursing skill training components for registration. The
registered nurse does not need to adhere to this requirement.
(ii)
However, this component must be taken by students with
matriculation, ‘Sijil Tinggi Pelajaran Malaysia’ and other
diploma qualifications.
The nursing programme is structured as follows:
Semester 1-6: The courses in Semester 1-6 must be taken by all
students. Registered nurses can be awarded the Bachelor of Health
Sciences (Nursing) upon completion of 115 units (core course-85 units;
elective courses-15 units; university courses-15 units) in three years.
Registered nurses may be given unit exemptions of not more than 1/3 of
the total unit requirement for graduation.
Semester 7-8: Students other than registered nurses are required to
undergo nursing skill training components over a period of one year in
order to fulfill the Malaysian Nursing Board registration. These
students will then be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor of Health
Science (Nursing) upon completion of 132 units (4 years).
3.10.4
Forensic Science Programme
This is a 4-year programme requiring a total of 130 units for
graduation. This consists of core courses (107 units), elective courses
(8 units) and university courses (15 units).
3.10.5
Dietetics Programme
This is a 4-year programme requiring 122 units for graduation. It
consists of core courses (91 units), elective courses (16 units) and
university courses (15 units).
3.10.6
Medical Radiation Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 124 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (94 units), elective courses (15
units) and university courses (15 units).
43
3.10.7
Audiology Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 130 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (100 units), elective courses (15
units) and university courses (15 units).
3.10.8
Speech Pathology Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 134 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (104 units), elective courses (15
units) and university courses (15 units).
3.10.9
Exercise and Sports Science Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 126 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (96 units), elective courses (15
units) and university courses (15 units).
3.10.10 Nutrition Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 121 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (86 units), elective courses (20
units) and university courses (15 units).
3.10.11 Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 125 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (100 units), elective courses (10
units) and university courses (15 units).
44
Below is the synopsis of the structure of degree programme
Programme
Biomedicine
4.0
Unit Requirements for Graduation
Core
Elective
University
Total
Courses
Courses
Courses
99
10
15
124
Nursing
102
15
15
132
Forensic Science
107
8
15
130
Dietetics
91
16
15
122
Medical Radiation
94
15
15
124
Audiology
100
15
15
130
Speech Pathology
104
15
15
134
Exercise and Sports
Science
96
15
15
126
Nutrition
86
20
15
121
Environmental and
Occupational Health
100
10
15
125
MAJOR PROGRAMMES
4.1
BIOMEDICINE
Introduction
The Biomedicine programme offered by the School of Health Sciences is a full
time educational programme requiring 4 years or 8 semesters to complete. At
the end of the programme, graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health
Science (Biomedicine). This programme was started in the 2000/2001 academic
session with the initial intake of 30 students. The intake depends on the
availability of appropriate infrastructure and number of academic staff of the
school.
The programme is multidisciplinary in nature and allows students to explore the
latest information and technology in the fields of Biomedical Sciences. It
encompasses all aspects of laboratory diagnosis, disease prevention and research
in the fields of Biomedical Sciences, which includes Pathology, Immunology,
Haematology, Transfusion Science, Human Biochemistry, Clinical
Biochemistry, Medical Microbiology and Parasitology, Pharmacology,
Physiology, Anatomy and Genetics. In addition, courses such as Psychology and
Behavioural Science, Health and Society, Ethics and Law for Health
Professionals, Biostatistics and Research Methodology, Laboratory Animal
Sciences, Epidemiology and Information Technology will be offered. Industrial
45
training, Biomedical Practicum and Research Project will be introduced in the
final stage of the studies to equip the students with the knowledge and skills in
the diagnostic and clinical laboratory, disease prevention and research fields.
Students are also required to take several elective courses and some university
courses. The latter includes Malay Language, English Language, Advanced
English, Islamic and Asian Civilization (TITAS). Skill development courses
such as Thinking Techniques and English Language are also included to better
equip them with the working environment.
This programme was carefully designed to cater for the man-power
requirements of both the private and public sectors of the nation. The curriculum
takes cognizance of the need to be proactive in its approach, whereby curricula
of institutions from the US, Europe and Australia were used as benchmarks.
This is to ensure that the curriculum is of quality and of high standards capable
of producing graduates who are competent and are comparable to any in the
world. Academic staff of the school together with those from the Medical and
Dental Schools are responsible for the teaching of all courses. All of them are
well trained and are experts in their respective fields.
Students of the Biomedicine Programme must complete a total of 124 credit
units as explained in the Course Structure before they can graduate.
List of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU105/3
GTU104/3
GTB105/3
GTB106/3
GTB107/3
GTU103/3
GTB217/2
GTB204/3
GTB218/3
GTU302/3
GTB212/3
GTB221/3
GTB219/3
GTB222/4
GTB220/3
GTB310/3
GTB315/2
GTB307/3
Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine
Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Structure and Function of Humans II
Human Biochemistry
Laboratory Science
Epidemiology
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Immunology I
Molecular Biology Techniques
Immunology II
Biostatistics
Basic Microbiology
Basic Haematology
Pharmacology I
Pathology
Medical Bacteriology
Clinical Biochemistry
Medical Virology and Micology
Medical Parasitology
46
Unit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
2
3
No.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Course
Code
GTB318/3
GTU303/2
GTB316/3
GTB317/3
GTB407/4
GTB408/9
GTB409/4
GTB404/3
GTB410/3
GTU201/2
GTU301/3
GEG310/2
Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine
Programme
Pharmacology II
Research Methodology
Transfusion Science and Blood Banking
Clinical and Laboratory Haematology
Industrial Training
Biomedical Practicum
Research Project
Toxicology
Laboratory Management
Health and Society
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Laboratory Animal Sciences
Total Credit Unit of Core Courses
Unit
3
2
3
3
4
9
4
3
3
2
3
2
99
Programme Learning Outcome:
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply core knowledge in biomedical sciences and display theoretical and practical
skills in diagnosis and research.
PO2: Perform laboratory diagnostic tests based on standard protocols; manage
diagnostic and/or research laboratories; perform research projects under
supervision; and utilise up-to-date information and communication technologies.
PO3: Demonstrate and apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems
and making decisions in diagnostic laboratories.
PO4: Apply communication skills at working environment in a diagnostic laboratory,
medical and research institutions.
PO5: Work in groups to solve health-related problems and participate as a team player
in community healthcare and services.
PO6: Demonstrate ethics and professional values in performing diagnosis and solving
problems in laboratory investigations.
P07: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance laboratory services and
research in biomedical sciences.
PO8: Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship skills in biomedical fields
and relevant professions.
PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in activities
related to teaching, service and research in biomedical sciences.
47
GTU201/2
GTB217/2
GTB221/3
GTB204/3
Code
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU103/3
GTB106/3
Code
Health and Society
Immunology I
Basic Haematology
Molecular Biology Techniques
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Laboratory Science
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
10
2
2
3
3
48
Unit
12
3
3
3
3
Unit
GTB107/3
GTB212/3
GTB219/3
GTB218/3
GEG310/2
Code
GTU104/3
GTB105/3
GTU105/3
Code
Epidemiology
Basic Microbiology
Pharmacology I
Immunology II
Laboratory Animal Sciences
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Structure and Function of Humans II
Human Biochemistry
Psychology and Behavioural
Science
Core Course
Year 1 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme
14
3
3
3
3
2
Unit
9
3
3
3
Unit
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Code
Toxicology
Industrial Training
Biomedical Practicum
Research Project
Medical Bacteriology
Clinical and Laboratory Haematology
Pharmacology II
Pathology
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
GTB220/3
GTB317/3
GTB318/3
GTB222/4
GTU301/3
GTB404/3
GTB407/4
GTB408/9
GTB409/4
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Code
11
3
4
9
4
49
Unit
16
3
3
3
4
3
Unit
GTB408/9
GTB409/4
GTB410/2
Code
GTB315/2
GTB307/3
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTB310/3
GTB316/3
Code
Biomedical Practicum
Research Project
Laboratory Management
Core Course
Year 4 Semester II
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Clinical Biochemistry
Transfusion Science and Blood
Banking
Medical Virology and Micology
Medical Parasitology
Core Course
Year 3 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme
11
9
4
2
Unit
16
2
3
3
2
3
3
Unit
4.2
DIETETICS
Introduction
The Dietetics programme is a full time programme offered over 4 years or 8 semesters.
Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Dietetics). The programme
will help to fullfil the manpower needs for Dieticians in Malaysia. Students will be
exposed to all aspects of food care and nutritional requirements for patients especially
those requiring special diets as well as knowledge of community nutritional requirements.
The graduates are expected to be able to function as dietitians as well as consultants in
related fields and in the field of nutrition as therapeutic food.
Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTU201/2
GTU301/3
GTU302/3
GTN101/3
GTN202/3
GTN207/3
GTN208/3
GTN209/3
GTN210/2
GTN211/3
GTN212/3
GTD211/2
GTN301/3
GTN309/3
GTD311/3
GTN310/2
GTD321/3
GTD315/2
GTN311/3
GTD318/4
GTD310/4
GTD317/4
GTN401/3
GTD406/3
Title of Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Sciences
Health and Society
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Biostatistics
Food Science
Principles of Food Preparation
Principles of Nutrition
Nutritional Biochemistry
Nutrition in the Life Cycle
Nutrition for Health and Fitness
Food Analysis
Assessment of Nutritional Status
Dietetics Skills and Communication
Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum
Nutrition and Diseases
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
Food and Nutritional Toxicology
Therapeutic Diet Preparation
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II
Food Service Management
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I
Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I
Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I
Food Service and Industry Practicum
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II
50
Unit
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
4
4
4
3
3
No.
29.
30.
31.
Course
Code
GTD407/3
GTD408/3
GTN407/3
Title of Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme
Unit
Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II
Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II
Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar
3
3
3
Total Credit Unit of Core Courses
91
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply knowledge in nutrition and dietetics for problem identification, formulation
and solution.
PO2: Apply in-depth dietetics knowledge to analyse, interpret, evaluate and improve
nutritional status of patients in hospital and community in general.
PO3: Demonstrate critical thinking and scientific knowledge in dietetics.
PO4: Communicate effectively as an individual and in groups.
PO5: Demonstrate the ability to work as a team in healthcare settings.
PO6: Demonstrate professional ethics and moral values in their profession.
PO7: Undertake professional development and engage in life-long learning.
PO8: Integrate knowledge in nutrition and dietetics in entrepreneurship.
PO9: Demonstrate the ability to be a leader among the healthcare professionals.
51
Core Course
Year 2 Semester 1
Code
Nutritional Biochemistry
Nutrition in the Life Cycle
Principles of Food Preparation
Nutrition for Health and Fitness
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Food Science
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTN101/3
GTN208/3
GTN209/3
GTN202/3
GTN210/2
Core Course
Year 1 Semester 1
Code
11
3
3
3
2
Unit
9
3
3
3
Unit
52
GTN211/3
GTN212/3
GTD211/2
GTU301/3
Code
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTN207/3
GTU201/2
Code
Food Analysis
Assessment of Nutritional Status
Dietetics Skills and Communication
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Sciences
Principles of Nutrition
Health and Society
Core Course
Year 1 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme
11
3
3
2
3
Unit
3
3
3
2
11
Unit
GTD310/4
GTN401/3
GTD317/4
GTD406/3
Code
GTN309/3
GTD311/3
GTN310/2
GTU302/3
GTN301/3
Code
Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I
Food Service and Industry Practicum
Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II
Year 4 Semester 1
Core Course
Community Nutrition and Dietetics
Services Practicum
Nutrition and Disease
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
Food and Nutritional Toxicology
Biostatistics
Year 3 Semester 1
Core Course
4
3
4
3
14
53
Unit
14
3
3
2
3
3
Unit
GTD407/3
GTD408/3
GTN407/3
Code
GTD321/3
GTD318/4
GTN311/3
GTD315/2
Code
Year 3 Semester II
Core Course
Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II
Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II
Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar
Year 4 Semester II
Core Course
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I
Food Service Management
Principles of Medical Nutrition
Therapy II
Therapeutic Diet Preparation
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme
9
3
3
3
Unit
12
3
4
3
2
Unit
4.3
NURSING
Introduction
The Bachelor of Health Science (Nursing) is one of the programmes offered by the
School of Health Sciences, USM.
This is a 4-year (8-semester) programme. It consists of the following components:
(a)
Biological Sciences
(b)
Behavioural Sciences
(c)
Nursing Sciences
(d)
Clinical Skills
(e)
Computer Skills
(f)
Research and Scientific Writing Skills
(g)
Communication and Information Distribution Skills
(h)
Critical Thinking and Problem Solving Skills
(i)
Co-Curricular Activities
(j)
Social Skills
(k)
Teaching and Patient Management Skills
These components are incorporated into the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic
knowledge of nursing practice. In addition, it improves the nursing profession at par with
other healthcare professions. Scientific knowledge and evidenced-based care aid in
promoting competent, independent and safe practitioners. The graduates of this
programme are expected to be of calibre, innovative, proactive, with critical thinking and
problem solving abilities. The university and elective courses enable the graduates to
expand their mind set and horizon.
54
4.3.1
No.
List of Core Courses of the Nursing Programme
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTU106/3
GTB105/3
GTB107/3
GTJ101/4
GTJ108/2
GTU201/2
GTU302/3
GTB212/3
GTB217/2
GTB219/3
GTJ205/4
GTJ207/2
18
19
20
GTJ209/3
GTJ210/3
GTJ211/2
21
22
23
24
25
GTJ212/2
GTU301/3
GTU303/2
GTJ309/2
GTJ310/2
26
27
28
GTJ311/2
GTJ312/6
GTJ313/2
29
30
GTJ314/2
GTJ315/2
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
GTJ316/2
GTJ317/2
GTJ318/2
GTJ405/5
GTJ406/4
GTJ407/4
GTJ408/4
Title of Core Courses in the Nursing Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Human Biochemistry
Epidemiology
Nursing Foundation I
Health Communication and Education
Health and Society
Biostatistics
Basic Microbiology
Immunology I
Pharmacology I
Nursing Foundation III
Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and
Renal/Urology)
Nursing Foundation II
Primary Health Care, Family and Community
Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and
Respiratory)
Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Research Methodology
Critical Care Nursing
Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and
Musculoskeletal)
Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
Research Project (one academic session)
Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology,
Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology)
Nursing Education
Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology,
Hematology and Oncology)
Gerontology Nursing
Principles of Health Management
Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing
Medical Nursing Practicum
Surgical Nursing Practicum
Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum
Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum
Total Unit of Core Courses
55
Unit
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
4
2
2
3
3
3
4
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
4
4
4
3
102
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1- Demonstrate application of knowledge in nursing profession.
PO2- Practices holistic, competent and safe nursing practice
PO3- Acquire critical thinking and problem solving skills to make appropriate decision
in nursing practice and management.
PO4- Communicate effectively in every level of the organisation and society.
PO5- Practice social responsibilities as a team members in nursing managment of
patients.
PO6- Apply learned nursing knowledge in a professional and ethical manner.
PO7- Practice continous lifelong learning in nursing profession.
PO8- Apply scientific and analytical thinking in research and entrepreneurship for
sustainability.
PO9- Acquire effective management principles and demonstrate effective leadership.
56
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
Code
GTJ209/3
GTJ205/4
Epidemiology
Immunology I
Primary Health Care, Family and
Community
Nursing Foundation II
Nursing Foundation III
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Health and Society
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU105/3
GTU201/2
GTB107/3
GTB217/2
GTJ210/3
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
Code
15
3
4
3
2
3
Unit
11
3
3
3
2
Unit
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Structure and Function of Humans II
Human Biochemistry
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Health Communication and Education
Nursing Foundation I
Core Course
Year 1 Semester II
57
Pharmacology I
Basic Microbiology
Biostatistics
Medical-Surgical Nursing I
(Cardiovascular and Respiratory)
GTJ212/2 Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing
GTJ207/2 Medical-Surgical Nursing II
(Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology)
GTB219/3
GTB212/3
GTU302/3
GTJ211/2
Code
GTU104/3
GTB105/3
GTU103/3
GTJ108/2
GTJ101/4
Code
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme
15
2
2
3
3
3
2
Unit
3
3
3
2
4
15
Unit
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Medical Nursing Practicum
Surgical Nursing Practicum
Research Project (one academic session)
5
4
6
Unit
Core Courses
Unit
Year 3 Semester 1
Research Methodology
2
Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine
2
and Musculoskeletal)
Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
2
Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology,
2
Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology)
Principles of Health Management
2
Research Project (one academic session
6
course)
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
19
GTJ408/4
GTJ407/4
Code
GTJ316/2
GTJ309/2
GTJ318/2
GTJ314/2
GTJ315/2
Code
Core Course
Year 4 Semester II
Critical Care and Community
Nursing Practicum
Maternal, Child and Women Health
Nursing Practicum
Core Course
Year 3 Semester II
Nursing Education
Medical-Surgical Nursing V
(Dermatology, Immunology,
Hematology and Oncology)
Gerontology Nursing
Critical Care Nursing
Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing
4
4
Unit
10
2
2
2
2
2
Unit
58
15
8
*The research project (one academic session) will be offered in Year 3 (Semester 1) to registered nurses that have been given exemption
from the practicum courses (the whole of Year 4). Matriculation and STPM students must take this course in Year 4 (Semester 1).
GTJ405/5
GTJ406/4
*GTJ312/6
Code
GTU301/3
GTJ317/2
GTJ312/6*
GTJ311/2
GTJ313/2
GTU303/2
GTJ310/2
Code
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme
4.4
FORENSIC SCIENCE
Introduction
This programme is the first forensic science programme offered in Malaysia. It is a very
popular programme and is highly demanded amongst prospective students. Students will
be exposed to the latest knowledge and technologies in the field of Forensic Science via
courses which have been developed meticulously. Renowned programmes from other
countries such as the US, Europe and Australia were used as a benchmark. Teaching
staff of the School together with others from the Medical and Dental Schools of USM,
Chemistry Department of Malaysia, The Fire and Rescue Department, and The Royal
Malaysia Police will together ensure that the programme is run smoothly and in an
excellent manner. This programme is expected to help cater for the national requirements
for Forensic scientists which are very much needed in the country. A total of 130 credit
units is required for graduation as explained under the course structure section.
List of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU104/3
GTF103/3
GTF104/3
GTF105/2
GTF106/3
GTF107/3
GTF108/2
GTB204/3
GTF200/3
GTF203/2
GTF204/3
GTF205/3
GTF206/3
GTF207/2
GTF208/2
GTF209/2
GTF210/3
GTF211/2
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTF300/2
GTF301/3
GTF305/4
GTF306/3
Title of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme Unit
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Physical Chemistry
Inorganic Chemistry
General Chemistry Practical I
Analytical Chemistry I
Organic Chemistry I
General Chemistry Practical II
Molecular Biology Techniques
Criminalistic
Introduction to Criminology
Forensic Psychology
Analytical Chemistry II
Organic Chemistry II
Analytical Chemistry Practical
Organic Chemistry Practical
Pollutions and Environment Chemistry
Material Chemistry
Natural Products Chemistry
Biostatistic
Research Methodology
Biological Evidence
Physical Evidence
Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs
Fire Investigation
59
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
3
4
3
No.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Course
Code
GTF309/3
GTF311/3
GTF312/3
GTF313/3
GTF314/2
GTF400/3
GTF402/4
GTF406/6
GTF407/8
GTF408/2
Title of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme Unit
Forensic DNA Analysis
Forensic Anthropology
Organic Chemistry III
Food Chemistry
Forensic Serology
Forensic Medicine
Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives
Research Project
Forensic Practicum
Forensic Documents Examination
Total Unit of Core Courses
3
3
3
3
2
3
4
6
8
2
107
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply the core knowledge of forensic sciences together with the other specialty
areas of forensic sciences and display the ability to organize them specifically in
the analysis of evidence in forensic investigations.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills required in the process of analysis, application and
problem solving in forensic laboratory and/or at the real scene of crime.
PO3: Demonstrate the ability to use scientific critical thinking skills to obtain necessary
information, investigate and conduct experiment or research in solving forensic
related problems.
PO4: Communicate clearly and manage the scene of crime, and identify other associated
skills in determining the type of forensic investigations with ethics and
professional manners.
PO5: Work in groups or peers in different stages of criminal investigations; searching
for forensic evidences, forensic analysis, crime scene management, and reporting
the findings.
PO6: Display ethics and professional manners in the practice of forensic investigation
and case presentation.
PO7: Identify and adapt with the most recent technologies and resources and
opportunities for the advancement of forensic science services and lifelong
education.
PO8: Apply good management skills and demonstrate entrepreneurship capaticities
particularly in decisión making and planning.
PO9: Demonstrate leadership skills through active involvement in social projects and
the employment of fundamental knowledge in forensic sciences for the purpose of
crime prevention.
60
GTB204/3
GTF204/3
GTF205/3
GTF206/3
GTF207/2
GTF208/2
Code
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTF103/3
GTF104/3
GTF105/2
Code
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
Molecule Biology Techniques
Psychology Forensic
Analytical Chemistry II
Organic Chemistry II
Analytical Chemistry Practical
Organic Chemistry Practical
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Physical Chemistry
Inorganic Chemistry
General Chemistry Practical I
16
3
3
3
3
2
2
Unit
3
3
3
3
2
14
Unit
61
GTF210/3
GTF211/2
GTF200/3
GTF203/2
GTF209/2
Code
GTU104/3
GTF106/3
GTF107/3
GTF108/2
Code
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1I
Criminalistic
Introduction to Criminology
Pollutions and Environment
Chemistry
Material Chemistry
Natural Products Chemistry
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1I
Structure and Function of Humans II
Analytical Chemistry I
Organic Chemistry I
General Chemistry Practical II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme
12
3
2
3
2
2
Unit
11
3
3
3
2
Unit
GTF402/4
GTF407/8
GTF408/2
Code
GTF300/2
GTF301/3
GTF306/3
GTF312/3
GTF313/3
Code
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Balistic and Chemistry of Explosives
Forensic Practicum
Forensic Documents Examination
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Biological Evidence
Physical Evidence
Fire Investigation
Organic Chemistry III
Food Chemistry
4
8
2
14
Unit
14
2
3
3
3
3
Unit
62
GTF403/3
GTF406/6
Code
GTF314/2
GTF309/3
GTF311/3
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTF305/4
Code
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1I
Forensic Medicine
Research Project
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1I
Biostatistic
Research Metodology
Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry
of Drugs
Forensic Serology
Forensic DNA Analysis
Forensic Anthropology
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme
9
3
6
Unit
2
3
3
17
3
2
4
Unit
4.5
MEDICAL RADIATION
The Bachelor of Health Science (Medical Radiation) is a 4-year (8 semesters) full time
academic programme which has been offered since academic year 2001/2002 to students
with qualification of A-level, STPM, matriculation, diploma in radiography or equivalent.
The government of Malaysia has accredited this programme since 2004.
This programme provides theoretical and practical training experiences, which will allow
students to understand, able to explain and utilise ionising and non-ionising radiation in
the diagnosis and treatment of patients. The offering of this programme is expected to
assist in fulfilling the national requirements for trained personnel in the medical radiation
science disciplines. This programme opens up career opportunities in the field of
diagnostic radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy and medical radiation protection
which required knowledge and skills in these areas in order to ensure the safety of the
graduates, medical and health professionals, patients and members of the general public.
The students are required to complete a total of 124 units for the purpose of graduation.
The whole programme consists of 94 units of core courses, 15 units of university courses
and 15 units of elective courses.
List of Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTU106/3
GTX101/3
GTX102/3
GTX103/3
GTX210/3
GTX212/3
GTX213/3
GTX214/3
GTU301/3
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTX302/2
GTX307/3
GTX314/2
GTX316/3
GTX317/3
Title of Core Courses in the the Medical Radiation
Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioral Sciences
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Introduction to Medical Radiation
Mathematics of Radiation Science
Medical Radiation Physics I
Medical Radiation Physics II
Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics
Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine
Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Radiation Protection and Safety I
Radiation Protection and Safety II
Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry
Diagnostic Radiology Imaging
Nuclear Medicine Imaging
63
Unit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
2
3
3
No.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Course
Code
GTX320/3
GTX321/4
GTX402/2
GTX405/2
GTX406/6
GTX407/3
GTX408/3
GTX410/4
GTX411/4
GTX412/3
GTX413/3
Unit
Title of Core Courses in the the Medical Radiation
Programme
Principles of Radiotherapy
3
Imaging Techniques I
4
Brachytherapy
2
Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I
2
Research Project
6
Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II
3
Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy
3
Imaging Techniques II
4
Radiotherapy Techniques
4
Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques
3
Professional Training
3
Total Unit of Core Courses
94
Programme Learning Outcomes
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1:
Apply the knowledge of medical radiation sciences and display related skills in
diagnostic radiology, nuclear medicine, radiation therapy and radiation
protection in medical application.
PO2:
Demonstrate technical and practical skills required in medical imaging and
radiotherapy procedures.
PO3:
Apply scientific thinking in solving problem related to medical imaging and
radiation therapy.
PO4:
Apply communication skills in a hospital based working environment or
research institutions.
PO5:
Display good social ability and able to work as a team member with other
healthcare professionals.
PO6:
Demonstrate professionalism, good attitude and ethical values during patient
management and clinical practices.
PO7:
Apply lifelong education and information management by having up-to-date
ICT skills.
PO8:
Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship in medical radiation
profession.
PO9:
Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient
management and medically related professional activities.
64
GTX210/3
Code
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU105/3
GTX101/3
Code
Medical Radiation Physics II
Courses
Year 2 Semester I
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Psychology and Behavioral Sciences
Introduction to Medical Radiation
Courses
Year 1 Semester I
3
3
3
3
Unit
3
3
12
Unit
65
GTX213/3
GTX214/3
GTX212/3
Code
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTX102/3
GTX103/3
Code
Introduction to Medical Imaging
Mathematics
Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine
Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology
Courses
Year 2 Semester II
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Mathematics of Radiation Science
Medical Radiation Physics I
Courses
Year 1 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme
9
3
3
3
Unit
12
3
3
3
3
Unit
GTX402/2
GTX405/2
GTX406/6
GTX410/4
GTX412/3
GTX413/3
Code
GTU301/3
GTX302/2
GTX314/2
GTX316/3
GTX317/3
Code
Brachytherapy
Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I
*Research Project
Imaging Techniques II
Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques
Professional Training
Courses
Year 4 Semester I
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Radiation Protection and Safety I
Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry
Diagnostic Radiology Imaging
Nuclear Medicine Imaging
Courses
Year 3 Semester I
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
6
4
3
3
20
Unit
13
Unit
66
GTX411/4
GTX406/6
GTX407/3
GTX408/3
Code
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTX307/3
GTX321/4
GTX320/3
Code
Courses
Year 3 Semester II
*Research Project
Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II
Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning
in Radiotherapy
Radiotherapy Techniques
Courses
Year 4 Semester II
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Radiation Protection and Safety II
Imaging Techniques I
Principles of Radiotherapy
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme
13
4
3
3
3
Unit
15
3
2
3
4
3
Unit
4.6
AUDIOLOGY
Introduction
This programme is designed to produce audiologists who are knowledgeable and able to
practice in the field of audiology to fulfill the needs of public and private sectors.
Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Audiology). This 4-year (8
semesters) programme includes the theoretical and practical (clinical) learning experience
through our Core, University and Elective courses to equip the students to be competent
as a practicing audiologist. Thus, students will acquire the necessary academic
qualification to become a professional audiologist and play their role as part of the health
care team.
List of Courses of the Audiology Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU105/3
GTA101/2
GTA102/3
GTP101/2
GTU201/2
LKM400/2
HTU223/2
GTU104/3
GTU103/3
GTA103/2
Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Psychology and Behavioral Science
Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech
Physics for Audiologist
Child Language Development
Health and Society
Bahasa Malaysia IV
TITAS (Islamic and Asian Civilization)
Structure and Function of Humans II
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear
& Throat)
GTP102/2 Basic Linguistics
GTP103/2 Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language
Pathology
GTP104/3 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing
WUS101/2 Entrepreneurship
WSCxxx/1 Co-curriculum (Sports)
LSP300/2 Academic English
GTA201/2 Audiology Instrumentation
GTA202/3 Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology
Techniques
GTP202/3 Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders
GTP204/2 Peadiatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology
GTP205/2 Speech Acoustics and Phonetics
GTA203/3 Advanced Audiology Technique
GTA204/2 Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening
GTA205/2 Neurology for Hearing and Speech
67
Unit
3
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
2
No.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
Course
Code
GTJ317/2
SHE101/2
WCCxxx/1
LSP402/2
GTA206/2
GTA207/2
GTU302/3
GTB107/3
GTJ108/2
WSCxxx/1
GTA301/3
GTA302/3
GTA303/3
GTU301/3
GTU303/2
GTA304/4
GTA305/3
GTA306/3
GTP305/2
GEG203/2
GTA401/6
GTA402/3
GTA403/5
GTP407/2
GTA404/2
GTA405/5
GEG304/2
Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme
Principles of Health Management
Ethnics Relation
Co-curriculum (Cultural)
Scientific and Medical English
Otology
Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System
Biostatistics
Epidemiology
Health Communication and Education
Co-curriculum (Sports)
Basic Hearing Amplification Technology
Audiology Clinic I
Paediatric Audiology
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Research Methodology
Audiology Clinic II
Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology
Auditory Rehabilitation
Counselling for Special Population
Health Economy
Research Project
Noise and Hearing
Audiology Clinic III
Learning Disabilities
Ethics and Law for Health Professionals
Audiology Clinic IV
Communication and Self Development
Total Unit of Core Courses
68
Unit
2
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
1
3
3
3
3
2
4
3
3
2
2
6
3
5
2
2
5
2
130
Programme Learning Outcome:
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Demonstrate fundamental and advanced knowledge, (theoretically and clinicall) in
the field of audiological sciences.
PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills in diagnosis and re/habilitative
audiology.
PO3: Display critical and scientific thinking in integrating the audiological knowledge
in assessment, interpretation, management, and re/habilitation aspects of hearing,
balance and related disorders.
PO4: Demonstrate communication skills in dealing with patients, family members and
health-related professionals and other related working environments.
PO5: Participate effectively in multi-disciplinary teams in managing patients with
hearing and balance disorders.
PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conducts and ethical standards and demonstrate
sensitivity to the differences in culture and religion.
PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance clinical services and research
in audiology.
PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills in audiology-related fields and practice systemic
management in clinical audiology.
PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient
management and health-related professions.
69
Structure and Function of
Humans I
Psychology and Behavioural
Sciences
Health and Society
Anatomy and Physiology of
Hearing and Speech
Physics for Audiologist
Child Language
Development
Bahasa Malaysia IV
TITAS
GTU101/3
LKM400/2
HTU223/2
GTA102/3
GTP101/2
GTA101/2
GTU201/2
GTU105/3
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
Code
19
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
3
Unit
70
WUS101/2
WSCxxx/1
LSP300/2
GTP104/3
GTP102/2
GTP103/2
GTU104/3
GTU103/3
GTA103/2
Code
Structure and Function of Humans II
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Anatomy and Physiology for
Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat)
Basic Linguistics
Introduction to Clinical Audiology
and Speech-Language Pathology
Developmental Psychology for
Speech and Hearing
Entrepreneurship
Co-Curriculum (Sports)
Academic English
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 2
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme
Unit
20
2
1
2
2
3
2
3
3
2
GTP205/2
GTJ317/2
SHE101/2
WCCxxx/1
LSP402/2
GTP204/2
GTA202/3
GTP202/3
GTA201/2
Code
19
Audiology Instrumentation
Introduction to Psychoacoustic and
Audiology Techniques
Introduction to Speech and Language
Disorders
Peadiatrics for Audiology and
Speech Pathology
Speech Acoustics and Phonetics
Principles of Health Management
Ethnic Relation
Co-curriculum (Cultural)
Scientific and Medical English
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
2
Unit
71
WSCxxx/1
GTU302/3
GTB107/3
GTJ108/2
GTA205/2
GTA206/2
GTA207/2
GTA203/3
GTA204/2
Code
Advanced Audiology Technique
Basic Clinical Management and
Hearing Screening
Neurology for Hearing and Speech
Otology
Electrophysiology Test for
Auditory System
Biostatistics
Epidemiology
Health
Communication
and
Education
Co-curriculum (Sports)
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 2
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme
20
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
2
Unit
GTA401/6
GTA402/3
GTA403/5
GTP407/2
Code
GTA302/3
GTA303/3
GTU303/2
GTU301/3
GTA301/3
Code
Year 4 Semester 1
Research Project
Noise and Hearing
Audiology Clinic III
Learning Disabilities
Core Courses
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Basic Hearing Amplification
Technology
Audiology Clinic I
Paediatric Audiology
Research Methodology
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
16
6
3
5
2
Unit
14
3
3
2
3
3
Unit
72
GTA405/5
GEG304/2
GTA404/2
Code
GTA306/3
GTP305/2
GEG203/2
GTA304/4
GTA305/3
Code
Year 4 Semester 2
Ethics and
Law for Health
Professionals
Audiology Clinic IV
Communication and Self Development
Core Courses
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 2
Audiology Clinic II
Advanced Hearing Amplification
Technology
Auditory Rehabilitation
Counselling for Special Population
Health Economy
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme
9
5
2
2
Unit
14
3
2
2
4
3
Unit
4.7
SPEECH PATHOLOGY
Introduction
Speech pathology is a health science profession that deals with the identification,
assessment, diagnosis, intervention and management of communication disorders
(disorders of language, speech sounds, fluency and voice) and swallowing problems. The
professionals in this profession are known as Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan
(Pertuturan) in the government sector or Speech-Language Pathologist in the private
sector.
Speech Pathology Programme provides an academic program for students to obtain
Bachelors of Health Science (Speech Pathology) as a qualification to work as the
Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) or Speech-Language Pathologist. The main
aim of Speech Pathology Programme is to produce professionals who have the theoretical
knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. Therefore, to achieve this main aim,
the objectives of Speech Pathology Program are to:
-
Offer an academic programme that can produce professional who are
knowledgeable and skilful in speech pathology.
Provide students with the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in preparation
to work as competence professionals.
Develop sense of professionalism to ensure ethical practices provided to the
public.
Give initial exposure to encourage involvement in research, parallel to
advancement in speech pathology profession.
This is a 4-year professional programme that provides students with theoretical
knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. Students will undertake programme
core courses that cover topics on communication sciences and disorders, medical and
health sciences, linguistics, education, psychology and research, plus several elective and
university courses. The students will also have to accumulate 400 clinical educational
hours during clinical years i.e. from Year 2 to Year 4 and complete a research project
during the final year.
List of Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU105/3
GTP101/2
GTA101/2
GTU104/3
GTU103/3
GTP102/2
GTP103/2
Title of Core Courses in the Speech Pathology
Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Child Language Development
Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech
Structure and Function of Humans II
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Basic Linguistics
Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language
Pathology
73
Unit
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
No.
9.
10.
Course
Code
GTP104/3
GTA103/2
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
GTP201/2
GTP202/3
GTP203/2
GTP204/2
GTP205/2
GTA202/3
GTP206/1
GTP207/2
GTP208/3
GTA205/2
GTA206/2
GTU302/3
GTP301/2
GTP302/2
GTP303/2
GTP304/3
GTU303/2
GTP309/3
GTP305/2
GTP306/3
GTP307/3
GTP308/4
GTP310/2
GTP401/2
GTP402/6
GTP403/6
GTP404/2
GTP407/2
GTP406/6
Title of Core Courses in the Speech Pathology
Programme
Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing
Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear and
Throat)
Linguistics for Speech Pathology
Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders
Speech Pathology Clinic I
Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology
Speech Acoustic and Phonetics
Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Technique
Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology
Speech Pathology Clinic II
Speech Disorders
Neurology for Hearing and Speech
Otology
Biostatistics
Psycholinguistics
Language Disorders
Neuropsychology
Speech Pathology Clinic III
Research Methodology
Hearing Impairment
Counselling for Special Population
Voice and Resonance Disorders
Acquired Communication Disorders
Speech Pathology Clinic IV
Speech Pathology Clinical Placement
Augmentative and Alternative Communication
Research Project
Speech Pathology Clinic V
Swallowing Problems
Learning Disabilities
Speech Pathology Clinic VI
Total Unit of Core Courses
74
Unit
3
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
1
2
3
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
4
2
2
6
6
2
2
6
104
Programme Learning Outcome
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Demonstrate theoretical and clinical knowledge related to speech sciences
specifically the principles and methods of assessment, intervention and prevention
of communication and swallowing disorders.
PO2: Demonstrate appropriate technical and clinical skills in speech sciences during
formulation and execution of the prevention, assessment and intervention process.
PO3: Apply critical thinking in integrating the theoretical knowledge, analysing and
interpreting assessment findings for prognosis and diagnosis, problem solving and
decision making.
PO4: Demonstrate communication and interpersonal skills in dealing with patients,
family members, other healthcare professionals and community.
PO5: Collaborate effectively with other team members of healthcare professionals in
managing patients with communication and swallowing disorders.
PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conduct and ethical standard and demonstrate
sensitivity to the differences in culture and religion practices.
PO7: Apply current development in speech sciences, clinical skills and utilise ICT
knowledge to enhance their profession and support lifelong learning.
PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills and practice systemic management in speech
sciences.
PO9: Demonstrate leadership and social skills.
75
GTP101/2
GTA101/2
GTU101/3
GTU105/3
Code
Structure and Function of Humans I
Psychology and Behavioural
Science
Child Language Development
Anatomy and Physiology of
Hearing and Speech
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
10
2
2
3
3
Unit
76
GTA103/2
GTP104/3
GTU104/3
GTU103/3
GTP102/2
GTP103/2
Code
Structure and Function of Humans II
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Basic Linguistics
Introduction to Clinical Audiology
and Speech-Language Pathology
Developmental
Psychology
for
Speech and Hearing
Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing
and Speech (Ear and Throat)
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
15
2
3
3
3
2
2
Unit
GTP205/2
GTA202/3
GTP203/2
GTP204/2
GTP201/2
GTP202/3
Code
Linguistics for Speech Pathology
Introduction to Speech and
Language Disorders
Speech Pathology Clinic I
Paediatrics for Audiology and
Speech Pathology
Speech Acoustic and Phonetics
Introduction to Psychoacoustic and
Audiology Technique
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
14
2
3
2
2
2
3
Unit
77
GTP207/2
GTP208/3
GTA205/2
GTA206/2
GTU302/3
GTP206/1
Code
Practical Phonetics for Speech
Pathology
Speech Pathology Clinic II
Speech Disorders
Neurology for Hearing and Speech
Otology
Biostatistics
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
13
2
3
2
2
3
1
Unit
GTP402/6
GTP403/6
GTP404/2
GTP401/2
GTP310/2
Code
GTP301/2
GTP302/2
GTP303/2
GTP304/3
GTU303/2
GTP309/3
Code
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Speech Pathology Clinical
Placement
Augmentative and
Alternative Communication
Research Project
Speech Pathology Clinic V
Swallowing Problems
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Psycholinguistics
Language Disorders
Neuropsychology
Speech Pathology Clinic III
Research Methodology
Hearing Impairment
6
6
2
18
2
2
Unit
2
2
2
3
2
3
14
Unit
78
GTP407/2
GTP406/6
Code
GTP305/2
GTP306/3
GTP307/3
GTP308/4
Code
Core Course
Year 4 Semester II
Learning Disabilities
Speech Pathology Clinic VI
Core Course
Year 3 Semester II
Counselling for Special Population
Voice and Resonance Disorders
Acquired Communication Disorders
Speech Pathology Clinic IV
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
8
2
6
Unit
12
2
3
3
4
Unit
4.8
EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE
Introduction
The objective of this programme is to produce graduates who are academically sound and
able to function as the experts in the field of Exercise and Sports Science relevant to the
requirement of the public and private sectors of the industry. It also takes cognisance of
helping to achieve the national aspiration of creating healthy citizens.
Students undergoing this programme are expected to acquire a high level of academic
competency and knowledge that is at par with graduates of similar institutions within and
outside the country. The uniqueness of this programme is that it allows the graduates to
be flexible and capable of continued development in their specific career. This is based
on the curriculum design which helps strengthen the knowledge of exercise and sports
sciences while at the same time students will be exposed to the health and sporting events
relevant to the field.
List of Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTU105/3
GTU104/3
GTS101/2
GTS102/3
GTU103/3
GTU201/2
GTB217/2
GTS201/3
GTS202/2
GTS203/2
GTS204/2
GTS205/3
GTS206/3
GTS207/3
GTN207/3
GTU301/3
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTS301/3
GTS302/2
GTS303/3
GTS304/3
Title of Core Courses in the Exercise and Sports
Science Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Psychology and Behavioral Science
Structure and Function of Humans II
Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science
Sociology and Philosophy of Sports
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Health and Society
Immunology I
Exercise Physiology
First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
Kinanthropometry
Tests and Measurements for Sports Science
Sports Psychology
Sports Training Methodology
Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports
Principles of Nutrition
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Sports Nutrition
Motor Learning
Sports Injuries and Rehabilition
Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology
79
Unit
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
No.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Course
Code
GTS305/2
GTS306/3
GTS307/3
GTS401/3
GTS402/6
GTS403/4
GTS404/2
GTS405/3
GTS406/3
GTS407/3
Title of Core Courses in the Exercise and Sports
Science Programme
Applied Sports Physiology
Coaching Science and Performance Analysis
Physical Activity, Growth and Development
Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription
Research Project
Industrial Training
Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices
Sports Management
Adapted Physical Activity
Therapeutic Exercises
Total Unit of Core Courses
Unit
2
3
3
3
6
4
2
3
3
3
96
Programme Learning Outcomes
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Posess comprehensive knowledge with a strong foundation in exercise and sports
physiology.
PO2: Proficiently identify and apply the appropriate tests and technical analysis.
PO3: Demonstrate analytical thinking, application of knowledge and problem-solving in
research laboratories and at the actual playing field.
PO4: Display professional communication skills for accurate information dissemination.
PO5: Provide professional services to aid optimum health and fitness for the
community.
PO6: Demonstrate responsibility, accountability and portray professional ethics and
noble values.
PO7: Apply continuous learning and exploration of new knowledge in line with the
latest development.
PO8: Incorporate management and entrepreneurship skills that will branch out as other
career option s related to the field.
PO9: Display leadership and team management skills in taking charge of group tasks
and in community.
80
GTS203/2
GTB217/2
GTU201/2
GTS201/3
GTS202/2
Code
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTU106/3
GTS101/2
Code
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
Health and Society
Exercise Physiology
First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation
(CPR)
Kinanthropometry
Immunology I
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science
11
2
2
2
3
2
Unit
11
3
3
3
2
Unit
81
GTN207/3
GTS205/3
GTS206/3
GTS207/3
GTS204/2
Code
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTS102/3
Code
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Tests and Measurements for Sports
Science
Sports Psychology
Sports Training Methodology
Principles and Training in Individual
and Team Sports
Principles of Nutrition
Core Course
Year 1 Semester II
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Sociology and Philosophy of Sports
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme
14
3
3
3
3
2
Unit
9
3
3
3
Unit
GTS402/6
GTS403/4
GTS404/2
GTS401/3
Code
GTU301/3
GTS301/3
GTS302/2
GTS303/3
GTS304/3
Code
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Fitness Testing and Exercise
Prescription
Research Project
Industrial Training
Contemporary Issues in Sports
Science Practices
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Sports Nutrition
Motor Learning
Sports Injuries and Rehabilition
Sports Biomechanics and
Kinesiology
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
15
6
4
2
3
Unit
14
3
3
2
3
3
Unit
82
GTS405/3
GTS406/3
GTS407/3
Code
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTS307/3
GTS305/2
GTS306/3
Code
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester II
Sports Management
Adapted Physical Activity
Therapeutic Exercises
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester II
Applied Sports Physiology
Coaching Science and Performance
Analysis
Physical Activity, Growth and
Development
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme
9
3
3
3
Unit
13
3
2
3
2
3
Unit
4.9
NUTRITION
Introduction
The nutrition programme offers a 4-year (8 semesters) full time course leading to a
Bachelor Degree in Health Science (Nutrition). The offering of the programme is to cater
for the needs for more nutritionists in Malaysia.
The programme applies multidisciplinary approaches, and is taught by experts from basic
sciences, food science, and dietetic, medical, social science and community services.
The nutrition programme has the purpose in delivering knowledge in the basic human
nutrition and focuses towards community nutrition in Malaysia. It provides an academic
programme that is able to produce versatile graduates and in fulfilling the needs of the
job market in the future.
Students will be exposed to every aspect of food, dietary nutrient requirement, evaluation
of nutritional status and issues of lifelong nutrition cycle. Students will also learn the
problems of nutrition in a community and methods in overcoming these problems. The
research component will also be taught and students are required to carry out a research
project in the final year. Teaching is conducted via lectures, seminar, practical, self study
and directed learning.
List of Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Course
Code
GTU101/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTU103/3
GTU201/2
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTU301/3
GTB107/3
GTN101/3
GTN202/3
GTN207/3
GTN208/3
GTN209/3
GTN210/2
GTN211/3
GTN212/3
GTN301/3
Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme
Structure and Function of Humans I
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Health and Society
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Ethics and Law for the the Health Professionals
Epidemiology
Food Science
Principle of Food Preparation
Principle of Nutrition
Nutrition Biochemistry
Nutrition in the Life Cycle
Nutrition for Health and Fitness
Food Analysis
Assessment of Nutritional Status
Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum
83
Unit
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
No.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Course
Code
GTN309/3
GTN310/2
GTN311/3
GTN312/3
GTN314/2
GTN401/3
GTN403/6
GTN405/3
GTN407/3
GTD211/3
GTD311/3
GTD315/2
Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme
Nutrition and Diseases
Food and Nutrition Toxicology
Food Service Management
Food Microbiology
Nutrition Anthropology
Food Services and Industry Practicum
Research Project in Nutrition
Current Issues in Nutrition
Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars
Dietetic and Communication Skills
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
Principles in Medical Nutrition Therapy II
Total Unit for Core Courses
Unit
3
2
3
3
2
3
6
3
3
2
3
2
86
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills
for problem identification and solution.
PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills required in patient care, patients and
community services, and apply scientific knowledge in research.
PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems and making
decisions related to nutrition field.
PO4: Apply communication skills at any working environment in nutrition laboratory,
health and research institutions.
PO5: Work in groups as healthcare profesionals to solve nutrition- and health-related
problems and participate as a team player in community healthcare and services.
PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes and professional ethics in nutrition
applications and services.
PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and to identify resources to enhance
services and research in nutritions.
PO8: Display management and entrepreneurship skills in nutrition-related fields and
professions.
PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills as healthcare professionals in activities
related to nutrition, healthcare and research.
84
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
Code
GTN208/3
GTN209/3
GTN202/3
GTN210/2
Nutrition Biochemistry
Nutrition in the Life Cycle
Principles of Food Preparation
Nutrition for Health and Fitness
Structure and Function of Humans I
Psychology and Behavioural
Science
Food Science
Health and Society
GTU101/3
GTU105/3
GTN101/3
GTU201/2
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
Code
11
3
3
3
2
Unit
3
2
11
3
3
Unit
85
GTN211/3
GTN212/3
GTD211/3
GTU301/3
Code
GTU104/3
GTU103/3
GTN207/3
GTB107/3
Code
Food Analysis
Assessment of Nutritional Status
Dietetic and Communication Skills
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
Core Course
Year 2 Semester II
Structure and Function of Humans II
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Principles of Nutrition
Epidemiology
Core Course
Year 1 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme
12
3
3
3
3
Unit
12
3
3
3
3
Unit
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Code
GTN403/6
GTN401/3
GTN310/2
Training in Food Industries and
Services
Research Project in Nutrition
Biostatistics
Training in Community Nutrition
and Dietetic
Nutrition and Diseases
Principles of Medical Nutrition
Therapy I
Food and Nutrition Toxicology
GTU302/3
GTN301/3
GTN309/3
GTD311/3
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Code
9
6
3
Unit
2
14
3
3
3
3
Unit
86
GTN405/3
GTN407/3
Code
GTN314/2
GTU303/2
GTN312/3
GTN311/3
GTD315/2
Code
Current Issues in Nutrition
Nutrition and Dietetic Seminar
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester II
Food Microbiology
Food Service Management
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy
II
Nutrition Anthropology
Research Methodology
Core Course
Year 3 Semester II
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme
6
3
3
Unit
12
2
2
3
3
2
Unit
4.10
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Introduction
The Environmental and Occupational Health Programme is a full time 4 years (8
semesters) undergraduate academic programme. The students will be awarded the
Bachelor Degree of Health Science (Environmental and Occupational Health) upon
successful completion of the programme.
This programme emphasises knowledge in the field of environmental and occupational as
a competitive advantage, which enables graduates to communicate effectively with
medical professionals involved in treatment and rehabilitation of individuals suffering
environmental and occupational related diseases. The programme is designed and
developed with care to fulfill the specific needs of potential employers, regulators and
modern society in general. The students will be trained on international quality
management systems, including ISO9001, ISO14001, OSHAS18000, ILO-OSH 2001 and
MS 1722: 2003.
Students will also be exposed to knowledge in the field of quantitative chemistry with
special attention on skills of handling analytical instruments in quantifying pollutants in
outdoors and indoors samples, independently. Students will gain real life experience
through an 4 months Smart Partnership Scheme established between the university,
industries and government institutions.
87
List of Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
1.
2.
Course
Code
GTK101/3
GTK102/3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
GTK103/3
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTU106/3
GTB106/3
GTF101/3
GTK201/3
GTK202/3
GTK203/3
GTU201/2
GTB107/3
GTK301/4
GTK302/3
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
GTK303/3
GTK304/3
GTK305/3
GTK306/3
GTK307/3
GTU301/3
GTU302/3
GTU303/2
GTK401/8
GTK402/8
GTK403/4
GTK404/3
GTK405/3
No.
Title of Core Courses in the Environmental and
Occupational Health Programme
Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health
Environmental and Occupational Health : Ecological
Perspectives
Biodiversity
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioral Science
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Laboratory Science
Basic Chemistry
Occupational Health
Pollution and Health
Occupational Health
Health and Society
Epidemiology
Environmental and Occupational Toxicology
Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering
Perspectives
Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management
Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants
Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases
Environmental and Occupational Emergency
Occupational Rehabilitation
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Biostatistic
Research Methodology
Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum
Research Project
Environmental and Occupational Laws
Environmental Management
Management of Occupational Safety and Health
Total Unit of Core Courses
88
Unit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
8
8
4
3
3
100
Programme Learning Outcome (PO)
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills
in all situations involving environmental and occupational hazards and safety.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills and capable in creating perception in order to identify
environmental and occupational health’s problems.
PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking in acquiring environmental and occupational
health information and apply scientific knowledge in research towards effective
services.
PO4: Apply communication skills effectively at any working environment in all
organizations, industrials and society.
PO5: Demonstrate social skills and participate as team player in order to catch the
organization goal and able to solve environmental and occupational health’s
problem as a group.
PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes, and professional ethics in environmental and
occupational safety, applications and services.
PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and identify resources to enhance
services and research in environmental and occupational.
PO8: Identify and manipulate entrepreneur resources and skills in environmental and
occupational related-skills and professions to facilitate society group in need.
PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership as healthcare professionals in activities related
to environmental, occupational, healthcare and research.
89
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester 1
Code
GTU201/2
GTK201/3
GTK202/3
Health and Society
Occupational Safety
Pollution and Health
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
Introduction to Environmental and
Occupational Health
Laboratory Science
Basic Chemistry
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTK101/3
GTB106/3
GTF101/3
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester 1
Code
8
2
3
3
Unit
15
3
3
3
3
3
Unit
90
GTU302/3
GTK203/3
GTB107/3
Code
GTK103/3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTK102/3
Code
Biostatistics
Occupational Health
Epidemiology
Core Courses
Year 2 Semester II
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Environmental and Occupational Health
: Ecological Perspectives
Biodiversity
Core Courses
Year 1 Semester II
9
3
3
3
Unit
15
3
3
3
3
3
Unit
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
Environmental and Occupational
Toxicology
Environmental and Occupational
Health from Engineering
Perspectives
Domestic, Laboratory and
Industrial Waste Management
Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester 1
Environmental and Occupational
Health Practicum
Research Project
GTK301/4
Code
GTK401/8
GTK402/8
GTU301/3
GTK303/3
GTK302/3
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester 1
Code
16
8
8
Unit
13
3
3
3
4
Unit
91
GTK403/4
GTK404/3
GTK405/3
Code
GTK307/3
GTU303/2
GTK306/3
GTK305/3
GTK304/3
Code
Environmental and Occupational Laws
Environmental Management
Management of Occupational Safety and
Health
Core Courses
Year 4 Semester II
Measurement and Monitoring of
Contaminants
Environmental and Occupational
Related Diseases
Environmental and Occupational
Emergencies
Occupational Rehabilitation
Research Methodology
Core Courses
Year 3 Semester II
10
4
3
3
Unit
14
3
2
3
3
3
Unit
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
5.0 COURSES SYNOPSIS
92
5.1. Core Courses
Level 100
93
GTA101/2-Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech
This course introduces anatomy terminologies and correlation between structure and
function of the human body. It emphasizes on organs related to hearing and speech, i.e.
head, neck and thora and their interrelationships. Topics which will be discussed include
introduction to anatomical terminology, main systems of speech and hearing, the skull,
respiration system, larynx and phonetic mechanism.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Fawcett, D.W., Jensh, R.P., Bloom and Fawcett's Concise Histology, 2nd Ed.,
Oxford Universitiy Press, 2002.
Anthony, J., Seikel, J., King, D.W., Drumright, D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for
Speech, Language and Hearing, 2nd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1999.
Zemlin, W.R., Speech and Hearing Science: Anatomy and Physiology, 4th Ed.,
Prentice-Hall, 2000.
GTA102/3-Physics for Audiologist
This course discusses the basic acoustics, electricity and electronics, such as magnetism
and electromagneticsm, electrostatics, battery and mobile energy sources, electric
circuits, resistors, capacitors, semiconductors, amplifiers, oscillators, interference effects
and electrical noises.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Boylestad, R.L. & Nashelsky, L., Introduction to Electricity, Electronics and
Electromagnetics, 5th ed., London: Pearson Education, 2002.
Patrick, D.R. & Fardo, S.W., Electricity and Electronics: A Survey, 5th ed., Upper
Saddle River, N.J: Prentice Hall, 2001.
Villchur, E., Acoustics for Audiologists, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group,
Inc., 2000.
GTA103/2-Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat)
This course discusses the anatomy and physiology related to detailed speech production
mechanism. This includes the skeleton, face, structures in neck, muscles and ligaments
that are involved in voice and speech production and swallowing. In addition, this course
will also include the physiology of articulation and phonation, vestibular and auditory
systems.
94
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Clark W. F. & Ohlemiller K., Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing for
Audiologist, Singular Publishing Group, 2004.
Culbertson W., Cotton S. & Tanner D., Anatomy and Physiology Study Guide for
Speech & Hearing, Plural Publishing Inc., 2005.
Atkinson M. & McHanwell S., Basic Medical Science for Speech, Hearing &
Language Students, Whurr Publishers, 2004.
GTB105/3-Human Biochemistry
This course discusses aspects of human biochemistry including protein, carbohydrate and
lipid metabolism, enzymes, hormones, and liver and renal functions. The focus will be
towards the theory and methods used in measuring biochemical parameters in human.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Boyer, R. (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley &
Sons Inc.
Devlin, T.M. (2002). Textbook of Biochemistry : With Clinical Correlations (5th
Ed.). New York, NY: Wiley-Liss.
Horton, H.A. (2006). Principles of Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ
: Prentice Hall.
Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. (2003). Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life.
Boston: McGraw-Hill.
Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K., Mayes, P.A., & Rodwell, V.W. (Eds.). (2000).
Harper's Biochemistry (25th Ed.). Stamford: Lange Medical Publication.
GTB106/3-Laboratory Science
This course introduces students to the basic laboratory techniques, management and
maintenance of laboratory equipment. Topics will be discussed include professional
attitude and ethics, safety methods and disposal of dangerous chemicals, storage and
maintenance of chemicals and reagents, keeping and record, use of laboratory plastics
and glasses, sterilization and disinfection, principle of quality management, receiving and
managing specimens. Students will also be trained in using and maintenance of
laboratory equipments such as micropipette, centrifuge, pH meter, balances,
spectrophotometer and other common laboratory analytical instruments.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Bishop M.L., Schoeff L.E. and Fody E.P., (2004). Clinical Chemistry-Principles,
Procedures & Correlations (5th. Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and
Wilkins.
Burtis C.A., Ashwood E.R. and Bruns D.E., Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry
and Molecular Diagnostics (4th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2005.
95
3.
4.
Kaplan L.A., Pesce A.J. and Kazmierczak, S. (2002). Clinical Chemistry: Theory,
Analysis, Correlation (5th. Ed.). Delmar Learning.
Ramnik Sood, Textbook of Medical Laboratory Technology (2006). India: Jaypee
Brothers.
GTB107/3-Epidemiology
This course aims to provide a comprehensive introduction to the principles and methods
of epidemiology. Discussions will begin with explanation on the causes of disease with
special emphasis on environmental factors that explain how epidemiology can be used for
the prevention of disease and for health promotion, including environmental and
occupational health. The course will provide students with the knowledge on how to best
use suitable epidemiological study design for evaluation of health programs. Students are
also encouraged to develop health skills within the clinical epidemiological framework.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Last, R. (1996). Kesihatan Awam dan Ekologi Manusia (Terjemahan: Wan Abdul
Manan, Rusli Nordin, Abdul Manaf Hamid & Noor Hidayah Ishak) Pulau Pinang:
Penerbit USM.
Timmreck, T.C. (2002). Introduction to Epidemiology (3rd ed.). MA: Jones &
Bartlett Publishers, Inc.
Wasserheil-Smoller, S. (2004). Biotatistics and Epidemiology: A Primer for
Health Professionals (3rd ed.). New York : Springer Verlag.
GTF103/3-Physical Chemistry
This course exposes students to properties of gas and liquid, matter state principles, gas
kinetic theory, chemical kinetic and chemistry thermodynamic.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
P. Atkins and J. D. Paula, Physical Chemistry, 8th Ed, Oxford University Press,
2006.
R. J. Silbey, R. A. Alberty and M. G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, 4th Ed., John
Wiley, 2004.
D. B. Ball, Physical Chemistry, 1st Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2003.
J. Laider, J. H. Meiser and B. C. Sanctuary, Physical Chemistry, 4th Ed., Houghton
Mifflin Co., 2003.
N. Levine, Physical Chemistry, 5th Ed., McGraw Hill, 2002.
GTF104/3-Inorganic Chemistry
This course exposes students to various topics on basic chemistry including
stoichiometry, atomic structures, nuclear chemistry, periodic table, chemical bonding and
properties of matters.
96
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C. Hoasecroft and A. G. Shaspe, Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., Prentice-Hall,
2004.
G. L. Miessler and D. A. Tarr, Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2003.
T. L. Brown, H. E. LeMay, B. E. Bursten and J. R. Burdge, Chemistry: The
Central Science, 9th Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2003.
R. H. Petrucci, W. S. Harwood and F. G. Herring, General Chemistry: Principles
and Modern Applications, 8th Ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 2002.
GTF105/2-General Chemistry Practical I
This course exposes students to general chemistry practical such as basic laboratory
techniques, identification of substances based on physical properties, separation of
component mixture, chemical formula, gravimetric analysis of chloride salt, paper
chromatography for separation of cations and dyes, acid-base titration, salt hydrolysis and
pH of buffer solutions, determination of the dissociation constant of a weak acid and
determination of solubility-product constat for sparingly soluble salts.
List of text/reference books:
1.
J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments – Chemistry: The Central
Science, 11th. Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2009.
GTF106/3-Analytical Chemistry I
This course exposes students to basic knowledge on chemical análysis which covers
concentration expression, statistic for analytical chemistry, chemical equilibrium, acidbase equilibrium, acid-base titration and titration, complexometry titration, gravimetry
analysis, precipitation titration, redoxs equilibrium and redox titration.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. J. Holler and S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of
Analytical Chemistry, 8th Edn., Thomson Brooks/ Cole, 2004.
G. D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
D. B. Harvey, Modern Analytical Chemistry, International Ed., Mc-Graw Hill,
2000.
97
GTF107/3-Organic Chemistry I
This course introduces the students to the origin of organic chemistry and to study the
basic concepts of electronic structure and bonding, structures and properties of organic
molecules, chemistry of hydrocarbons, alkane, cycloalkane, alkene and alkyne. The
course provides the study of chemical reactions in organic chemistry and stereochemistry.
This course also provides the knowledge of alkyl halide and nucleophilic substitution and
elimination reactions.
Main references supporting this course:
1.
2.
3.
L.G. Wade. Jr., Organic Chemsitry, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013.
T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 10th Ed., John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2011.
J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008.
Additional references supporting the course:
1.
2.
J. E. McMurry,“Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008.
P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007.
GTF108/2-General Chemistry Practical II
This course exposes students to general chemistry practical which is continued from
GTF105-General Chemistry Practical I. It covers chemical reactions, analysis of aspirin,
chemical equilibrium: Le Chatelier Principle, gravimetric determination of phosphorus in
plant food, chemical reactions of copper and percent yield, chemicals in everyday life :
what are they and how do we know?, colorimetric determination of an equilibrium instant
in aqueous solution, oxidation-reduction titration II : Analysis of bleach, activity serried
and titration curres of polyprotic acids.
List of text/reference books:
1.
J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments – Chemistry: The Central
Science, 11th Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2009.
GTJ101/4-Nursing Foundation 1
This course comprises of three components: (1) history and nursing development; (2)
practice and nursing focus; and (3) health assessment and nursing process.
History and nursing development provides students with introduction to basic nursing,
including the roles of the nurse, philosophy of the nursing practice and nursing education,
nursing history, development of the nursing profession at the national and international
level, Malaysian health care system, traditional health systems, transcultural nursing,
evidenced based practice, as well as legal and ethical issues in nursing practice.
98
Practice and nursing focus introduces students to the theories and principles of nursing,
basic theories and primary dynamic health concepts. These theories are foundations to the
other courses in years 2, 3 and 4. These are practiced in the hospitals, community and
home in a holistic manner. The focus is on critical thinking, problem solving and use of
nursing process within the nursing context.
Health assessment and nursing process focus on the practical aspects of basic nursing
such as history taking, health assessment, formulating nursing diagnosis, implementing
nursing actions, and evaluation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. (2008), Fundamental of Nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice. (8th ed). USA: New Jersey, Pearson.
Wilkinson, J. M. & Leuven, K. V. (2007). Fundamentals of Nursing: Thinking
and doing. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Publishers.
Smith, S. F., Duel, D. J., & Martin, B. C. (2008). Clinical Nursing Skills. New
Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
GTJ108/2-Health Communication and Education
This course exposes students to various topics on basic knowledge of health promotion.
Students will be introduced to the concepts and resources particularly concern the role of
health promoter in health promotion, education and communication in the context of
national health care system. Knowledge delivery of health promotion will be further
extended to the strategy identification, designing, planning, management, research,
material development and testing, monitoring and evaluation of the related health
promotion programs introduce nationwide.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Butler, J Thomas, Principles of Health Education and Health Promotion, 3rd Ed.,
Wadsworth, 2001.
Hornik, Robert C. (Ed.), Public Health Communication : Evidence for Behaviour
Change ; Lauren Earlbaum Associates, Publishers : London, 2002.
Lawrence W. Green, Marshall Kreuter, Health Program Planning: An Education
and Ecological Approach, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill Companies Inc. , 2005
GTK101/3-Introduction To Environmental And Occupational Health
This course exposes students to the areas of environmental health, occupational health,
environmental safety, and occupational safety. The importance of responsibility and civil
liberties of an individual towards the environment will be discussed. The implication and
significant of nurturing environmental and occupational health will also be highlighted.
99
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Megan., Environment, Health And Sustainable. Open University Press; London,
2006.
Harper C. L., Environment And Society; Human Perspectives On Environmental
Issues, Upper Saddle River; Pearson Prentice Hall, 2004.
Yassri A., Kjellstrom T., Theo de Kok & Guidotti T., Basic Environmental
Health. Oxford University Press; New York, 2001.
GTK102/3-Environmental And Occupational Health: Ecological Perspectives
This course exposes students to basic ecological components (e.g., abiotic, biotic,
physical, and social). The students are taught the compatibility between human health
with those basic ecological components and be aware of how the latter affects human
health. The impact of destabilise basic components with respect to human health will
also be further discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hilgenkamp K., Environmental Health: Ecological Perspectives, Jones & Bartlett
Publishers, 2006.
Molles M. C. Jr., Ecology. Concepts And Application, 2nd ed. McGraw Hill, 2002.
Marten G. G., Human Ecology: Basic Concepts For Sustainable Development,
Earthscan Publications Limited, 2001.
GTK103/3-Biodiversity
The course introduces students to major phyllums of organisms in earth. Emphasis is
given to differentiate the organisms based on their distinct characteristics. The
importance of interspecific interactions and its surroundings will be highlighted. At end
of this course, students will be able to identify various organism living in their
neighbourhood and be more conscious on activities that destroys earth biodiversity.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Levin S. A., Encyclopedia Of Biodiversity, (E-Book), 2007.
Mader S. S., Inquiry Into Life, 10th edition. McGraw-Hill, 2003.
Shiva V., Tomorrow's Biodiversity, London: Thames and Hudson, 2000.
Andesirk T & Andesirk G., Biology: Life On Earth, Prentice-Hall, 1999.
GTN101/3-Food Science
This course introduces students to foods and the different kinds of fundamental changes
in food as a result of food processing. It will focus on the scientific aspects of food
research. The basic knowledge of foods will be taught through theoretical and practical
aspects of food science.
100
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Amy Brown, Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation, 2nd Ed., Thomson
Wardsworth Pub., 2004.
Mehas KY, Rodgers SL, Food Science: Biochemistry of Food and Nutrition, 4th
Ed., McGraw-Hill Companies, 2002.
Norman N. Potter, Joseph H. Hotchkiss, Food Science, 5th Ed., Aspen Publishers,
Inc., 1998.
GTP101/2-Child Language Development
This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures on language development. It
focuses on the acquisition and development of language among normal children. The
topics covered are theories of language acquisition and language development processes
in terms of language components i.e. semantics, syntax, morphology, phonology and
pragmatics. Relationship between language development and other relevant aspects such
as social and cognitive development are also covered in this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Owens, R.E., Language Development: An Introduction, 7th Ed., Boston: Allyn &
Bacon, 2008.
McLaughlin, S., Introduction to Language Development, London: Singular
Publishing Group, 2006.
Hoff, E., Language Development, 3rd Ed., Stamford: Wadsworth Press, 2005.
GTP102/2-Basic Linguistics
This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures to linguistics. It focuses on the
fundamental knowledge in linguistics such as phonetics, phonology, morphology, syntax,
semantic and pragmatics. Applied linguistics such as sociolinguistics and dialectology
will be also covered in this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Tallerman, M., Understanding Syntax, 2nd Ed., London: Arnold, 2005.
Nik Safiah, K., Farid, M. O. & Hashim, M., Tatabahasa Dewan. Kuala Lumpur:
Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, 2003.
Mukhlis, A. B., Pengantar Sintaksis dan Semantik Bahasa Melayu. Singapura:
Pustaka Nasional Pte. Ltd., 2002.
101
GTP103/2-Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology
This is an orientation course which provides initial exposure to the clinical aspects of
audiology and speech pathology. It focuses on the common procedures and managements
in audiology or speech therapy. The topics covered are scope of practice of the
audiologists and the speech pathologist. Assessment and management procedures for
audiology and speech pathology cases are highlighted. This course also emphasises the
theoretical and application aspects of observation skills.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Lubinski, R., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology,
3rd Ed., Oxford: Singular Press, 2007.
Flasher, L. V, & Fogel, P. T., Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist
and Audiologist, Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.
Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication Sciences and
Disorders: From Science to Clinical Practice, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, 2010.
GTP104/3-Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing
This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures to the field of psychology. It
focuses on the developmental psychology of the human from prenatal to late adulthood.
The topics covered include theories in developmental psychology and human
development in relation to biological, cognitive, personality and social asprects.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bremner, G. & Slater, A., Introduction to Developmental Psychology, Oxford:
Blackwell, 2003.
Papalia, D. E. & Olds, S. W., Human Development, 8th Ed., New York: McGrawHill, 2008.
Ulijaszek, S. J., Johnson, F. E. & Preece, M. A., The Cambridge Encyclopedia of
Human Growth and Development , Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
2000.
GTS101/2-Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science
The course introduces the student to the scientific discipline known as Exercise and
Sports Science through the exposure to the history and consequently to the latest
knowledge and the application of current technology in the field. Students will be
exposed to the basic and the sub-disciplines of exercise and sports science. The course
will also introduce students to the characteristic, employment and career opportunities
available in this are of expertise.
102
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Brown, S. P., Introduction to Exercise Sciences, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
2000.
Lumpkin, A., Introduction to Physical Education, Exercise Science and Sports
Activities, McGrawHill Book Co., 2002.
Senn, A., Power, Politics and the Olympic Games, Champaign, IL : Human
Kinetics, 1999.
GTS102/3-Sociology and Philosophy of Sports
This course provides the students with the basic concepts in sociology and the philosophy
of sports. In addition, there will be discussions and considerations on the sociological and
philosophical implications of previous and current development in the field of sports.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Coakley, J., Sport in Society: Issues and Controversies, Columbus, OH: McGrawHill, 2001.
Kretchmar, R. S., Practical Philosophy of Sport and Physical Activity, 2nd Ed.,
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005.
Morgan, W. J., Ethics in Sport, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2007.
GTU101/3-Structure and Function of Humans I
This course discusses aspects of basic anatomy including the terminologies related to cell
structures, primary tissues and human organ systems from the macro and micro
perspectives. Emphasis will be directed towards the anatomical and physiological aspects
of the various human organ systems.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Barbara Herlihy, B. (2006). The human body in health and illness (3rd Ed.).
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company.
Marieb, E. N. (2008). Anatomy & physiology coloring workbook: A complete
study guide, (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings.
Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N. (2008). Human Anatomy & Physiology (7th Ed.). San
Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co.
Sembulingam K. & Prema Sembulingam (2004). Essentials of medical physiology
(3rd Ed.). India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers.
Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H. (2008). Principles of anatomy and physiology
(12th Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Young, B. & Heath,J.W. (2006). Wheater’s functional histology: A text and color
atlas (5th Ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
103
GTU103/3-Fundamentals of Health Informatics
The fundamental of health informatics course will introduce students to the concept and
application of information and communication technology (ICT) in the field of health
sciences. Students will be exposed to latest ICT technology, technology application in
health sciences, security and usage procedure, and introduction to data structure. To
create more understanding of applied health informatics, students will be exposed to
practical applications, covering topics of computer basic such as E-learning System,
Windows XP, Mac OS X, Office Suite Application (Word Processor, Presentation and
Spreadsheet); website development, graphic and animation editing applications. For
group project, students will be assigned to a project based on their understanding on
health informatics (HI) describing a scenario of using HI in healthcare delivery
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Abdullah Embong (2000). Sistem Pangkalan Data, Konsep Asas, Reka Bentuk dan
Pelaksanaan. Malaysia: Tradisi Ilmu.
Englebard & Nelson (2002). Health Care Informatics An Interdisciplinary
Approach. Edinburgh: Mosby.
Gary B. S, et al. (2005). Discovering Computers. A Gateway to Information,
Complete, Shelly Cashman Series, Course Technology.
GTU104/3-Structure and Function of Humans II
This course concentrates on the various anatomical and physiological aspects of the
respiratory, urinary, gastrointestinal, endocrine and reproductive systems as well as the
skin.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Barbara Herlihy, B. (2006). The human body in health and illness (3rd Ed.).
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company.
Marieb, E. N. (2008). Anatomy & physiology coloring workbook: A complete
study guide, (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings.
Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N. (2008). Human Anatomy & Physiology (7th Ed.). San
Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co.
Sembulingam K. & Prema Sembulingam (2004). Essentials of medical physiology
(3rd Ed.). India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers.
Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H. (2008). Principles of anatomy and physiology
(12th Ed.). New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Young, B. & Heath,J.W. (2006). Wheater’s functional histology: A text and color
atlas (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
104
GTU105/3-Psychology and Behavioural Science
This course provides students with basic theoretical knowledge and principles of
psychology and behavioural sciences.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Coon D. (2007). Intoduction to Psychology (10th Ed.). San Francisco: Wadsworth.
Schwartz, B. and Robbins, S. J. (1996). Psychology of Learning & Behavior (4th
Ed.). NW: W. W. Norton & Company.
Wedding, D., Their, S.O. and Daschle T. (2001). Behaviour and Medicine (3rd
Ed.). NY: Hogrefe & Huber Publishers.
GTU106/3-Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
This course discusses the structures and the functions of cellular organelles. The focus
will be towards the characteristics, synthesis and biomolecular metabolism, which
includes carbohydrates, nucleic acids, lipids, proteins and vitamins and also the
characteristics and the role of enzymes in the regulation of metabolism. The second part
of the course will introduce basic genetics, which includes the structure and functions of
DNA and RNA as the genetic materials, transcription and translation, structure and
chromosomal organizations, Mendel’s Law and other traits inheritance.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Boyer, R. (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Devlin, T.M. (2002). Textbook of Biochemistry : With Clinical Correlations (5th
Ed.). New York, NY: Wiley-Liss.
Horton, H.A. (2006). Principles of Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ
: Prentice Hall.
Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. (2003). Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life.
Boston: McGraw-Hill.
Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K., Mayes, P.A., & Rodwell, V.W. (eds.). (2000).
Harper's Biochemistry (25th Ed.). Stamford: Lange Medical Publication.
Zubay, G.L. (1998). Biochemistry (4th ed.). Dubuque: Wm. C. Brown Publishers.
GTX101/3-Introduction to Medical Radiation
This course introduces students to ionising and non-ionising radiation and their use in
medical science and effects on general population including properties and spectrum of
electromagnetic radiation It also provides knowledge regarding historical background
and modern concept of atom including its quantum mechanical model and sub-atomic
particles. Radioactivity, types of radioactive decays and production and use of
105
radionuclides in medicine will be taught. Types and production of x-rays and interaction
of x-ray and gamma ray with matter and living being are also covered in this course.
Students will be exposed to the production of non-ionising radiations such as infrared,
short wave, microwave, ultrasound, lasers and their use in medicine.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bushberg, J.T. and et al, The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging: 2nd Ed.,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
John Low and Ann Reed, Electrotherapy Explained Principles and Practice, 3rd
Ed, Elsevier Ltd, 2000.
William E Prentice and William S Quillen, Therapeutic Modalities in
Rehabilitation, 3rd Ed, Mc Graw Hill, 2005.
GTX102/3-Mathematics of Radiation Science
This course discusses advanced mathematics and calculus. It will focus on function and
graph, advance function and equality solution, advance geometry, matrix, vector,
complex number, limit and the use of first principles in polynomial differentiation,
differentiation, differentiation techniques and applications, integration, advance
differentiation and integration.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Lay, D. C., Linear Algebra and Its Application, 3rd. Ed., Pearson Higher
Education, 2002.
Anton, H., Calculus, Combined, Student Resource, 6th Ed., John Wiley and Sons,
1998.
Larson, R., Calculus with Analytic Geometry, 7th Ed., Houghton Mifflin Company
College Division, 2002.
GTX103/3-Medical Radiation Physics I
This course discusses basic concepts of classical physics and relativity. The topics
include kinematics and motion, forces, work and kinetic energy, potential energy and
conservation of energy, impulse and linear momentum, rotation, static equilibrium and
relativity.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, 8th Ed., Wiley,
2007.
Tippens, P.E., Physics, 7th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007.
Giancoli, D. C., Physics: Principles with Applications, 6th Ed., Prentice Hall,
2004.
106
5.2. Core Courses
Level 200
107
GTA201/2-Audiology Instrumentation
This course discusses instrumentations used in audiology such as sound level meter,
tympanometer and audiometer. It also covers room acoustics for audiological tests,
factors which affect sound level meter measurement and utility, types of microphone,
audiometer block diagram, the function and standards of each component of calibrator
(artificial mastoid) in audiometer calibration will also be discussed. Introduction to other
audiological instrumentations are also discussed in this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2003.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009.
Martin, F. N., and Clark, J. G., Introduction to Audiology, 8th Ed., Reading: Allyn
& Bacon, 2003.
GTA202/3-Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques
This course introduces students to psychoacoustics that relates to hearing science. Basic
theories of immitance audiometry, pure tone audiometry, and speech audiometry will be
introduced.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals. 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2003.
Hepfner, S. T., The Audiogram Workbook, New York: Thieme Medical
Publishers, Inc., 1998.
Villchur, E., Acoustics for Audiologists, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group,
Inc., 2000.
GTA203/3-Advanced Audiology Technique
This course discusses detailed audiological tests in diagnosing organic and non-organic
hearing impairment and balance disorders. The related issues in audiological tests and
reports writing of hearing tests results will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2003.
108
2.
3.
Roeser, R. J., Valente, M., & Hosfod-Dunn, H., Audiology. Diagnosis, 2nd Ed.,
New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 2007.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009.
GTA204/2-Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening
This course exposes students to case management in audiology clinic via observation and
lectures related to basic clinical management such as, report-writing, code of ethics, and
their responsibility. It also discusses the concepts of hearing screening, its principal,
objectives and methods of screening tests of all stages of life, including the needs of
conducting hearing screening test at industrial sector. The sensitivity and specificity,
advantages and disadvantages of each test, factors affecting test, and the differences
between screening and diagnostic test are also discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Roush, J. (ed.), Screening for Hearing Loss and Otitis Media in Children, 1st Ed.,
San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2001.
Spivak, L. G., Universal Newborn Hearing Screening, New York: Thieme
Medical Publishers, Inc., 1998.
GTA205/2-Neurology for Hearing and Speech
This course introduces basic neurology related to hearing, balance, speech and language.
The topics will be discussed include neuroaudiology and neurology related to speech and
language. It also discusses the neurological diseases related to hearing, balance, speech
and language aspects. The topics include neuroaudiology and neurology related to speech
and language.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Berlin, C. I. (ed.), Neurotransmission and Hearing Loss: Basic Science,
Diagnosis, and Management, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1997.
Love, J. R., and Webb, W. G., Neurology for the Speech Pathologist, 4th Ed., San
Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2001.
Musiek, F. E., Baran, J. A., and Pinheiro, M. L., Neuroaudiology: Case Studies,
San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1994.
109
GTA206/2-Otology
This course includes the pathological processes, clinical symptoms, diagnostic algorithm
and protocol, and of management otological disorders. This course also discusses clinical
otology, hearing assessment, outer, middle, and inner ear pathologies, tinnitus, vertigo,
sudden hearing loss, presbycusis and congenital deafness. Students will be given the
opportunity to practice otoscopy, voice test, tuning fork test and exposure to patients at
Otolarinolaringology (ORL) clinic.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Browning, G. G., Clinical Otology and Audiology, 2nd Ed., Oxford: Butterworth
Heinemann, 1998.
Berlin, C. I., and Keats, B. J. B., Genetics and Hearing Loss, San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.
Rockeinstein, M. J., Comprehenssive Review of Otolaryngology, Philadephia:
Elsevier, Inc., 2004.
GTA207/2-Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System
This course discusses electrophysiological tests for auditory system. A variety of
electrophysiological tests will be introduced including both theory and practical. Students
are also exposed to knowledge about factors affecting accuracy of the test results. The
relationship between the test results and ear pathology will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hall, J. W., Handbook of Otoacoustic Emissions, 1st Ed., San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.
Hall, J. W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses, Boston, Mass:
Pearson, 2007.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009.
GTB204/3-Molecular Biology Techniques
This course introduces the students to basic techniques, principles as well as the
application of molecular biology technologies in research and medicine. Topics that are
covered include chromosomal structure, gene expression and regulation, extraction and
purification of nucleic acids, DNA and protein analysis, restriction endonucelease and
other enzymes in molecular biology, gene cloning and libraries, the concept of Southern,
Northern and Western blotting, bacterial transformation and amplification methods such
as PCR, LCR, SDA etc. The other advanced components of this course will also discuss
the emerging research fields of Regulatory RNAs, Genomic Imprinting, Systems Biology
and give particular focus on RNAi, microRNAs, the opportunities offered by the new
generation of genome technologies and the elucidation of gene regulatory networks.
110
Basic laboratory training in extraction of nucleic acids and protein expression will be
given. Students will also be exposed to latest molecular biology techniques such as PCR,
rt-PCR, quantitative-PCR, EMSA and Microarray. All students will be trained to use
various bioinformatics software applications related to Genomics & Proteomics such as
BioEdit, DNAsis, OLIGO etc. via a compulsary Cloning Simulation Project’ exercise.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dale, J. W. & Park, S. F. (2004). Molecular Genetics of Bacteria (4th Ed.). West
Sussex: John Wiley and Sons.
Primrose, S. B. & Twyman, R. M. (2006). Principles of Gene Manipulation and
genomics (7th Ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Ream, W. & Field K. G. (2008). Molecular Biology Techniques: An Intensive
Laboratory Course. Vikas. E-Book.
Sambrook, J. & Russell, D. (2001). Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (3rd
Ed.). USA: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press.
Watson, J. D. & Bell, S. P. (2008). Molecular Biology of the Gene (6th Ed.). San
Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings.
GTB212/3-Basic Microbiology
This course introduces students to basic principles in microbiology, which covers
bacteria, viruses, fungi and parasites. Topics which will be discussed, include microbial
diversity, genetics, physiology, biochemistry and metabolism, reproduction and control
of microorganisms, microbial interactions, medically important organisms in human
diseases, nosocomial infection, and antimicrobial therapy and resistant. Basic practical
skills such as staining methods, culture techniques and microscopy will be introduced.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Black, J.G. (2005). Microbiology: Principles and Explorations (6th Ed.). New
York: John Wiley & sons, Inc.
Talaro, K.P. (2008). Foundations in Microbiology. (6th Ed.). New York: McGrawHill Companies.
Tortora, G.J., Case. C, C.L, and Funke, B.R. (2003).Microbiology: An
Introduction (8th Ed.). Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co.
Willey, J.M., Sherwood, L.M, and Woolverton, C.J. (2008). Prescott, Harley, and
Klein’s Microbiology (7th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill Companies.
111
GTB217/2-Imunology I
This course describes the basic concepts in immunology which include the concept of
immunity and the immune response. Description of the types of lymphoid tissues and
cells, the characteristics, types and functions of various molecules such as
immunoglobulins, cytokines and the various components of the complement system as
well as immune cells such as B and T lymphocytes will also be addressed. In addition,
the concepts of antigen, immunogen, antigenicity and immunogenicity, as well as the
importance of vaccination (immunization) and the basic concept of immunopathology
will be described. The use of antigen-antibody interactions in diagnosis will be
introduced.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Clancy, J. (2006). Basic Concepts in Immunology. Boston: McGraw Hill.
Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. (2001).
Immunobiology: The Immune System in Health and Disease (5th ed.). New York:
Garland Publishing Co.
Levinson, W. and Jawetz, E. (2002). Medical Microbiology & Immunology (7th
Ed.) Boston: McGraw Hill.
Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. and Roitt, I. (2006). Immunology (7th Ed.).
Edinburgh:Mosby
Sompayrac, L. (2008). How the Immune System Works (3rd Ed.). Oxford:
Blackwell Sciences. Inc.
Stanley, J. (2002). Essentials of Immunology and Serology. USA: Delmar,
Thomson Learning.
GTB218/3-Immunology II
This course encompasses advanced concepts in immunology particularly from the
molecular immunological point of view. The involvement of immunological mechanisms
in various diseases such as autoimmune diseases, immunodeficiency, HIV infection,
transplantation and tumour immunology will be discussed. The students will also be
exposed to the priciples and immunological methods such as immunoprecipitation and
agglutination reactions, ELISA, immunofluorescence, immunoenzymatic staining and
flow cytometry as well as the production and use of monoclonal and polyclonal
antibodies. Students will undergo a short placement in the Immunology Laboratory
(School of Medical Sciences) to expose them to the actual situation in a diagnostic
immunology laboratory.
112
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. and Pober, J.S. (2003). Cellular and Molecular
Immunology (5th Ed.). Philadelphi: W.B. Saunders, Co.
Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. (2001).
Immunobiology:The Immune System in Health and Disease (5th Ed.). New York:
Garland Publishing Co.
Levinson, W. and Jawetz, E. (2002). Medical Microbiology & Immunology (7th
ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill.
Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. and Roitt, I. (2006). Immunology (7th Ed.).
Edinburgh: Mosby.
Parslow, T.C., Stites, D.P., Terr, A.L., and Inbode, J.B. (2001). Medical
Immunology (10th Ed.). New York: Lange Medical Books.
Stanley, J. (2002). Essentials of Immunology and Serology. USA: Delmar,
Thomson Learning.
GTB219/3-Pharmacology I
This course exposes students to the basic principles of Pharmacology including
pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and relationships between chemical structure and
activity of drugs. Aspects of cellular pharmacology and biochemical pharmacology are
also included. Some areas of systemic pharmacology (autonomic, cardiovascular,
respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine, antimicrobials, central nervous system,
anticoagulants and antiinflamation) will also be addressed. Methods of assessing effects
of drugs and measurements of blood levels using the latest techniques of chemical
analysis will be introduced.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Katzung, B.G. (2003). Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (9th Ed.). NY: McGrawHill Co.
Rang and Dale (2007). Pharmacology (6th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone.
Tripathi, K.D. (2008). Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (6th Ed.). India: Jaypee
brothers Medical publishers (P) Ltd.
GTB220/3-Medical Bacteriology
This course provides the students with knowledge on general characteristics of medically
important bacteria, the role of organisms in disease and health, the source, reservoirs and
transmission of bacterial diseases and its pathogenesis. This course will also provide the
students with skills in handling and processing of clinical specimens and various
techniques in the identification of pathogenic bacteria (staining, culture, serology,
molecular) and the advantages and limitations of these techniques. Knowledge and
techniques related to laboratory procedures - antibiotic sensitivity test, serological tests,
rapid diagnosis and tests for bacterial infections will also be taught.
113
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Betty, A. F., Daniel, F. S. & Alice, S. W. (2007). Bailey & Scott’s Diagnostic
Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press.
Cheesbrough, M. (2006). District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part
2 (2nd Ed.) U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press.
Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M. (2007). Jawetz, Melnick &
Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) USA: Mc Graw Hill.
Gerald, L. M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D. (2010). Mandell, Douglas, and Bennett’s
Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.) London: Churchill
Livingstone.
Maria, D.D (1997). Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby.
GTB221/3-Basic Haematology
This course introduces the students to theoretical and practical concepts of basic
hematology which include structure and function of blood cells and blood components,
hematopoiesis, ferrous metabolism, vitamin B12 and folate metabolism, red cell
metabolism and haemostasis. Particular emphasis will be given to a few important basic
concepts such as haemoglobin synthesis, structure and function of blood cells,
introduction to anemia. The students will also be exposed to basic haematological tests,
laboratory management and intrumentations used in a hematology laboratory.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Harmening D.M. (2008). Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasi,
(5th Ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Co.
Lewis S.M., Bain B.J. and Bates I. (2007). Dacie and Lewis Practical
Haematology (10th Ed.). Philadelphia:Elsevier Science.
Rodak B.F., Fritsma G.A. and Doig K. (2007). Hematology: Clinical Principles
and Applications (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:Elsevier Science.
GTB222/4-Pathology
This course introduces the students to basic pathological processes including tissue
damaging agents, cell injury, adaptations, inflammation, wound healing, haemodynamic
disturbances and neoplasm. Pathological investigative procedures such as preparation and
fixation of tissues, processing of tissues, slicing of the processed tissues with microtome
and staining techniques including routine, special and immunostains will be covered.
The students will also gain basic knowledge on cytological and museum techniques.
Students will also be exposed to actual working environment through practical classes in
Biomedicine laboratory of School of Health sciences and short attachments at the
Pathology Laboratory of the School of Medical Sciences.
114
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Abbas, K., Aster, F., Robbins and Cotran Pathologic (2010). Basis of Disease (8th
Ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders, Elsevier.
Bancroft J.D. and Gamble M. (2002). Theory and Practice of Histological
Techniques (5th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone.
Cheesbrough, M. (1987) , Medical Laboratory Manual for Tropical Countries (2nd
Ed.), MA: ELBS and Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd.
Culling, C.F.A., R.T.Allison. and W.T. Barr. (1985). Cellular Pathology
Technique (4th Ed.). MA: Butterworths & Co.Ltd.
Damjanov, I. (2000). Pathology for Health-Related Professions (2nd Ed.).
Philadelphia: Elsevier - Health Sciences Division.
Manual of Histological and Histochemical Methods, Dept of Pathology, PPSP,
USM.
Young, B., Lowe, J.S., Stevens, A. and Heath, J.W. Wheater’s Functional
Histolog: A Text and Colour Atlas (5th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone,
Elsevier 2006.
GTB224/2-Laboratory Animal Sciences
The course provides opportunities for students to learn the basic knowledge of anatomy
and physiology, care, safety and management of laboratory animals. Students will also be
introduced to rules and ethical issues involving laboratory animal in research and
teaching.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The UFAW Handbook on the care and Management of Laboratory Animals,
Volume 1&2 (7th Ed.) Oxford: Blackwell Sciences Ltd , 1999.
Hillyer E.V. and Quesenberry K.E., Ferrets (1997). Rabbits and Rodents Clinical
Medicine and Surgery, W.B. Saunders Company.
Fox J.G., Cohen B.J. and Loew F.M. (1984). Laboratory Animal Medicine,
American Collage of Laboratory Animal Medicine Series.
Smith J.B. and Mangkoewidjojo S. (1987). The Care, Breeding and Management
of Experimental Animals for Research in the Tropics, International Development
Program of Australian Universities and Colleges Limited Incorporated in the
A.C.T.
GTD211/2-Dietetics Skills and Communication
This course focuses on the theoretical and practical aspects of dietetics and
communication skills. This course will also enhance individual skills in communicating
with individual clients and a group of clients both verbally and in written form,
establishing rapport with the health care team, obtaining and evaluating food records,
planning menus, using relevant equations for the determining of calories, documention of
nutritional care process using the SOAP and ADIME formats and other educational tools.
115
This course also exposes students to many activities such as development of educational
tools, conducting mock diet interviews, case presentations, case discussions and case
report writing. The students will also attend various tutorial sessions emphasing on the
aspects of nutritional education and cultural factors which influences the patients’ diet.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bauer, K.D and Sokolik, C.A., Basic Nutrtition Counseling Skills Development,
America Wadsworth Group, 2002.
Alpers, D.H., Stenson, W.F. and Bier, D.M., Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics,
4th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008.
Winterfeldt, E.A. Bogle, M.L and Lea L. Dietetics : Practical and Future Trends,
Wadsworth Publisher Co. 2005.
GTF200/3-Criminalistics
The course introduces the students to the basic elements of Forensic Sciences. It provides
fundamental information on crime scene and collection and preservation of evidence. It
also describes the different types of impression evidence such as finger prints, foot prints,
tool marks, and tyre prints used in identification of individuals and objects. A brief
account on trace evidence materials like dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included.
Introductory topics on DNA evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned
documents also form part of the syllabus. The students are also taught photographic
techniques, digital cameras, and uses of invisible radiation in crime detection.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Brian H. Kaye, Science and the Detective, VCH, New York, 1995.
Max M. Houck and Jay A-Siegel, Fundamentals of Forensic Science, 2nd Edition,
Academic Press, 2010.
Stuart H. James and John J. Nordly, Forensic Science, CRC Press 2009.
GTF203/2-Introduction to Criminology
This course introduces students to basic concepts and theories of criminology. The
knowledge would enable students to understand issues and problems in various crimes
including juvenile, environment, media technology and institutions. Students are also
exposed to various psychometrics for criminal profiling.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Siegel, L.J (2012), Criminology : Theories, Patterns and Typologies, (11th Ed.),
CA : Nadworth.
Doerner, W.G and Lab, S.P (2011), Victimology (6th Ed.), Anderson.
Berkan, S.E (2011), Criminology : A Sociological Understanding, (5th Ed.),
Prentice Hall.
116
GTF204/4-Forensic Psychology
This course discusses areas relating to behavioural aspects and human cognitive in crime
from the perspectives of perpetrators and victims. Discussions will be concentrated on
multifarious forms of crimes, juvenile issues, and adult criminals. The role of forensic
psychologists, connections between psychology and law, the use of psychological
measurements, treatment and rehabilitation will also be clarified.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Wrightsman L.S, Linsenman M, Taflinger M, Forensic Psychology, 1st Ed.,
Wadsworth Publishing, 2000.
Baldwin, J.D. and Baldwin, J.I., Behaviour Principles in Everyday Life, 3rd Ed.,
Prentice Hall, 1997.
Turvey B., Criminal Profiling – An Introduction to Behavioral Evidence Analysis,
Academic Press, London, 2002.
GTF205/3-Analytical Chemistry II
This course exposes students to analytical chemistry knowledge that has not been covered
in Analytical Chemistry I which include spectrochemistry topics such as introduction to
spectrochemistry methods, instrumentation of optical spectrometry, molecular absorption
spectrometry, molecular flouresence spectroscopy and atomic spectroscopy. The students
are also introduced to absorbtion methods which include an introduction of solvent
extraction, gas chromatography and high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC). Under
electrochemistry methods, students are exposed to potentiometry and voltammetry.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Niessen, W. M. Liquid Chromatography--Mass Spectrometry 3rd Ed., Boca
Raton: CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006.
Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications, 3rd Ed., West
Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007.
Welz, B. Atomic Absorption Spectrometry 3rd Ed. Weinheim: Wiley-VCH (1999).
Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel
Dekker, 2004.
Robert, L. G. and Eugene, F. B. Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography 4th ed.
Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley-Interscience, 2004.
Lough, W. J. and Wainer, I. W. High Performance Liquid Chromatography:
Fundamental, Principles and Practice, London: Blackie Academic &
Professional, 1996.
Smyth, M. R. Analytical Voltammetry. John Wiley, 2007.
Gosser, D. K. Cyclic Voltammetry Simulation and Analysis of Reaction
Mechanisms Weinheim: VCH, 1993.
117
GTF206/3-Organic Chemistry II
This course exposes students to aromacity, reactions of benzene and substituted
benzenes, reactions of carbonyl compounds (carboxylic acids and their derivatives,
aldehydes and ketones) with oxygen and nitrogen nucleophiles, carbon nucleophiles and
the hydride ion. It also covers the identification of organic compounds using mass
spectrometry, infrared spectroscopy, ultraviolet/visible spectroscopy and NMR.
Main references supporting this course:
1.
2.
3.
L.G. Wade. Jr., Organic Chemsitry, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013.
T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 10th Ed., John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2011.
J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008.
Additional references supporting the course:
1.
2.
J. E. McMurry,“Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008.
P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007.
GTF207/2-Analytical Chemistry Practical
This course exposes student to various analytical chemistry practicals such as absorption
spectroscopy for determination of iron complex with 1,10-phenanthroline, application of
ion selective electrode for determination of sodium and magnesium and also
determination of flouride in drink water and toothpaste samples, separation of mixing
acid using ion exchange resin, application of infrared spectrometry technique for
quantitative analysis of m-xylene dan p-xylene in xylene mixing sample, application of
gas chromatography for separation and quantitative identification of a mixing solution of
cyclohexane, methylene chloride in toulene, High Performance Liquid Chromatography
(HPLC) technique for separation of hydrocarbon mixture, visible spectrometry technique
for determination of mole ratio of 1,10-phenanthroline in complex form, atomic
absorption spectrometry for determination of calcium, determination of sodium using
flame spectroscopy technique, voltammetric determination of lead in water samples and
also polarographic determination of ascorbic acid in fruit juice samples.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
James, M. M., Analytical Chemistry in a GMP Environment: A Practical Guide,
Wiley. New York, 2000.
Niessen, W. M., Liquid Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry 3rd Ed. , 2006.
Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications, 3rd ed. West
Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007
Welz, B. Atomic Absorption Spectrometry 3rd Ed., 1999.
Marshall, A. G. Fourier Transforms in NMR, Optical, and Mass Spectrometry: A
User's Handbook: Elsevier, 1990.
118
6.
7.
8.
Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel
Dekker, 2004.
Jennings, W. Analytical Gas Chromatography, 1987
Robert, L. G. and Eugene, F. B. Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography, 4th
Ed. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley- Interscience, 2004.
GTF208/2-Organic Chemistry Practical
This course exposes students to organic chemistry practicals such as application of thin
layer chromatography and column chromatography for analysis of organic compounds,
qualitative analysis of organic compounds, identification of functional groups, distillation
of organic samples, gas chromatographic analysis, photo-reduction of benzophenon to
benzophinacole, application of high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) for anaylsis
of natural product samples, extraction and crystallation, acid-base properties and
transesterification.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
J.A. Landgrebe, Theory and practice in Organic Laboratory with Mieroscole and
Standard, Thomson/Wadsworth 2009.
Randall G. Engel. George S. Kriz, Gary M. Lampman, Donald L. Pavia,
Introduction to Organic Laboratory Techniques. A Small Scale Approach, 3rd Ed.,
Books/Cole 2011.
Lehman, J. W. The Student's Lab Companion: Laboratory Techniques for Organic
Chemistry, Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 2004.
GTF209/2-Pollutions and Environmental Chemistry
This course will cover introduction to the environmental components, environmental act
and water quality standard, nutrient and eutrofication, heavy metals, biology oxygen
demand (BOD), chemical oxygen demand (COD), meteorology of air contamination,
concept of water population, and water contaminants, distribution of air pollutant and
environmental forensics.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Daniel, B. B and Edward, A. K. Environmental Science : Earth as a Living Planet.
United States of America : John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.
William, P. C. and Barbara, W. S. Environmental Science: A Global Concern.
United States of America : McGraw Hill, 1997.
Shradha, S., Manisha, S. and Ranjana, S. A Text Book of Environmental Studies.
New Delhi : AITBS Publishers, 2005.
Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) & Subsidiary Legislation. Kuala
Lumpur : International Law Book Services (2007).
Suzanna, M. I. Environmental Law in Malaysia. Bangi : Penerbit UKM, 2006.
119
6.
7.
Winfield, A. Environmental Chemistry, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge,
UK, 2000.
Roy, M. H. Principles of Environmental Chemistry, RSC Publishing, Cambridge,
U.K, 2007.
GTF210/3-Material Chemistry
This course covers the fundamentals of materials chemistry including principles of
materials synthesis and methods of materials characterization. It introduces to students a
broad view of how the fundamentals of chemistry are used to create the sophisticated
material and devices that improve modern life. Various classes of materials such as
solids, organic adn inorganic polymers, glasses and ceramics, metals, alloys,
semiconductors, superconductors and composite materials are covered. The course also
discusses how different materials are used in science, technology and engineering.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
H.R. Allcock, Introduction to Materials Chemstry, John Wiley & Sons, USA,
2008.
P. Gabbott, Principles and Applications of Thermal Analysis, Blackwell
Publishing, 2008.
J.S. Temenoff and A. G. Mikos, Biomaterials : The Intersection of Biology and
Material Science, Pearson International Edition, 2008.
GTF211/3-Natural Product Chemistry
This course exposes students to natural products. It covers the biosynthesis of natural
secondary metabolites. Sythentic pathway of natural products such as acetate, shikimate,
mevalonate and alkaloid are introduced using various examples. Development and
synthetic works of natural product and its analogues are introduced. This course also
explores current developments and future directions in the field of natural products.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stanforth, S. P., Natural Product Chemistry at a Glance, Blackwell Publishing,
2006.
Torssel, K. B. G., Natural Product Chemistry: Mechanic and Biosynthetic
Approach to Secondary Metabolism, John Wiley & Sons, 1982.
Sarker, S. D. and Nahar, L., Chemistry for Pharmacy Students: General Organic
and Natural Product Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
Hornback, J. M., Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005.
120
GTJ205/4-Nursing Foundation III
This course provides basic theoretical and skill components of therapeutic interventions
in nursing. The students will learn the concept and technique of asepsis, medication
administration, oxygenation, resuscitation, stress management, pain management,
perioperative care, wound care, therapeutic diet and counselling.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. (2008), Fundamental of Nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice, 8th ed, Pearson, New Jersey.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical - Surgical Nursing: Critical thinking in
client care, (4th ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A. (2004). Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th ed.).
Mosby, USA.
GTJ207/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing 11 (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology)
This course exposes the students to the theoretical and professional aspects of medicalsurgical nursing practice related to gastrointestinal and renal/urology system. It focuses
on the etiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic investigations, medical and surgical
management and complications. Students will acquire experience in providing nursing
care and health promotion for patients with gastrointestinal and renal/urology disorders in
hospital and community. The nursing practice is approached from the wellness-illness
continuum and holistic context.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Barbara, K. T. & Nancy, E. S. (2010). Introductory medical-surgical nursing. W.
W. Lippincott , Philadelphia.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing: Critical thinking in
client care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Smeltzer, S. & Bare. (2004). Brunner and sunddart’s textbook of medical-surgical
nursing, (10th. Ed.) J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia
GTJ209/3-Nursing Foundation II
Nursing Foundation II course helps to develop a strong understanding of the basic
nursing care concept in students. Specifically the knowledge and skills related to activity
of daily living (ADL). The course caters as the first attempt to general nursing care,
which can later enable student to integrate the knowledge and skills gained in this course
to other nursing disciplines.
121
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. (2008), Fundamental of Nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice, 8th ed, Pearson, New Jersey.
deWit, S.C. (2001). Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing. Toronto: W.B.
Saunders Company.
Delaune, S.C. & Ladner, P.K. (2002). Fundamentals of Nursing: Standards &
Practice (2th ed.). Delmar Thomson Learning, USA.
GTJ210/3-Primary Health Care, Family and Community
This course provides students with knowledge on principles and strategies that is utilised
as a framework for primary health care in the community. This course also provides
emphasize on the main health care problems and measures used to overcome the
problems including communicable disease.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Allender, J.A., Rector, C., & Warner, K.D. (2010). Community health nursing:
Promoting & protecting the public health (7th ed.). China: Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins
Clark, M.J. (2008). Community health nursing: Advocacy for population health
(5th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Maville, J.A., & Huerta, C.G. (2008). Health promotion in nursing (2nd ed.). New
York: Thomson Delmar Learning.
GTJ211/2-Medical -Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory)
This course exposes the students to the theoretical and professional aspects of medicalsurgical nursing practice related to cardiovascular and respiratory system. It focuses on
the etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, diagnostic investigations, medical
and surgical management and complications. Students will acquire experience in
providing nursing care and health promotion for patients with cardiovascular and
respiratory disorders in hospital and community. The nursing practice is approached from
the wellness-illness continuum and holistic context.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing.Ccritical thinking in
client care, (4th Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Smeltzer, S. & Bare. (2004). Brunner and Suddarth’s Textbook of MedicalSurgical Nursing, (10th Ed.) J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia
Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P..A., (2004), Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th
Ed.). Mosby, USA.
122
GTJ212/2-Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing
This course introduces student to theory and practical in maternal and newborn care that
begins from conception to the postpartum period in hospital and in the home. It assists the
student to acquire the necessary elements in providing care to those individuals with
conditions related to obstetrics and gynecology
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Beckham C, Ling FW, Barzanksy BM, Herbert WN, Laube DW & Smith RP
(2009). Obstetrics and Gynecology, 6 ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins
Publishers.
Coad J & Dunstall M (2005). Anatomy and Physiology for Midwives, Elsevier Ltd.,
United Kingdom.
Towle MA (2009). Maternal-Newborn Nursing Care, Pearson Education, Inc.,
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
GTK201/3-Occupational Health
This course introduces students to various safety hazards at workplace. Measures
required to minimise risks of work injury due to these hazards will be discussed. Content
of this course is streamlined with the content of module IV of the Safety and Health
Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health
(DOSH).
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ILBS., Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan
1994 dan Peraturan-Peraturan, 2005.
ILBS., Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 dan PeraturanPeraturan, 2005.
Lingard H. & Rowlinson S. M., Occupational Health And Safety In Construction
Project Management, Taylor & Francis, 2005.
Manuele F. A., On The Practice Of Safety (3 Ed.). Wiley-IEEE, 2003.
Reese C. D., Occupational Health And Safety Management; A Practical
Approach. CRC Press, 2003.
NIOSH., Keselamatan Pekerjaan. Manual Kursus Pegawai Keselamatan Dan
Kesihatan, Modul 4, 2003.
GTK202/3-Pollution And Health
This course introduces students to the science of water, soil, atmosphere and
wavelengths. Students are taught on the quality standards for water, soil, atmosphere and
wavelengths. Students are also exposed to strategy of pollution management and steps
that can be taken to control and reduce pollution.
123
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Calhoun Y., Water Pollution, Chelsea House Pub., 2005.
Frumkin H., Environmental Health : From Global To Local, John Wiley and
Sons, 2005.
Ganesan Kumar., Air Toxics: Problems And Solution, Gordon & Breach Science
Publishers, 2004.
Mirsal I. A., Soil Pollution: Origin, Monitoring & Remediation, Springer Verlag,
2004.
Harrison R. M., Pollution: Causes, Effects And Control, 4th Edition. Royal Society
of Chemistry, 2001.
Behar Alberto., Noise Control: A Primer, Singular Pub-Group, San Diego,
California, 2000.
Glenn F. Knoll., Radiation Detection And Measurement, John Wiley & Sons,
1999.
GTK203/3-Occupational Health
This course introduces student to various health hazards at workplace. Measures required
to minimise risks of occupational diseases due to these hazards will be discussed. Content
of this course is streamlined with the content of module III of the Safety and Health
Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health
(DOSH).
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Westerholm P., Professional Ethics In Occupational Health-Western European
Perspectives, Radcliffe Medical Press, 2007.
Barling J., Kelloway E. K. & Frone M. R., Handbook Of Work Stress SAGE,
2004.
Westerholm P., Nilstun T. & Øvretveit J., Practical Ethics In Occupational
Health, Radcliffe Medical Press, 2004.
Stranks J. W., Health And Safety At Work : Key Terms, Published by ButterworthHeinemann, 2002.
Koh D, Chia KS, Jeyaratnam J., Textbook Of Occupational Medicine Practice, 2nd
Ed. Singapore: World Scientific Publishing Co Pte Ltd., 2001.
Sadhra SS, Rampal KG., Occupational Health: Risk Assessment And
Management, Oxford: Blackwell Science, 1999.
Rampal K.G & Nor Hassim., Occupational Safety And Health In Malaysia,
NIOSH. Kuala Lumpur, 1997.
124
GTN202/3-Principles of Food Preparation
This course covers basic food chemistry and basic cooking methods for various types of
foods such as meat, chicken, fish, vegetables, legumes and bakery products. It will also
discuss personal hygiene, sanitation and safety related to food preparation and the
cooking of food. Besides the conventional method of cooking, the latest technique such
as using microwave for the preparation of food will also be discussed. Factors influencing
the structure, colour, texture and nutritional value during preparation of food will be
emphasised. Students will have the opportunity to use some of the cooking equipment in
the laboratory and to evaluate the effectiveness of the kitchen tools and equipments.
List of text/reference books:
1
2.
3.
Freeland-Graves J.H., Peckham G.C., Principles of Food Preparation, Prentice
Hall, 2002.
Cataldo CB, Whitney EN, DeBruyne LK, Nutrition and Diet Therapy: Principles
and Practice, 6th Ed., Thomson, 2002.
Robert G.H. & Miller R.T., Food Preparation, 2nd Ed., American Technical
Publishers, Inc., 1999.
GTN207/3-Principles of Nutrition
This course focuses on the importance of essential nutrients and optimal nutrition in the
growth process and human development. Students will be introduced to functions, needs
and food sources for essential nutrients of the human diet. They will also learn the role of
food and its relationship with the economy, psychology, sociology and culture. The
students are expected to exhibit proper attention and attitude towards nutrition in terms of
personal, family and community health.
List of text/reference book:
1.
2.
3.
4.
McGuire M & Beerman K. Nutritional Sciences: From Fundamentals to Food, 1st
Ed.. Thomson Woodsworth, 2007.
Gibney M, Vorster H & Kok F. Introduction to Human Nutrition, 1st Ed..
Blackwell Sciences Limited, 2002.
Mahan LK & Arlin M, Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, Philadelphia :
Elsevier Science, 11th Ed., 2003.
Boyle MA, Anderson SL, Personal Nutrition, 5th Ed., Thomson Learning, 2003.
125
GTN208/3-Nutritional Biochemistry
This course focuses on metabolism and homeostasis of several key nutrients of
macronutrients and micronutrients such as vitamins and minerals, body fluid and
electrolyte balance, and inter-interaction between nutrients as well as the relationships
between nutrients metabolism in maintaining optimal physiological and development of
human body and also its relationship in the aetiology and development of chronic
diseases such as cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, certain types of cancers and other
nutritional-related disorders. Several aspects of utilisation and adaptation regulation
related to nutrients metabolism will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Gropper SS, Smith JL, Groff JL. Advanced Nutrition and Human Nutrition. 4th
Ed., Thomson Wadsworth, USA, 2005.
Shills ME, Shike M, Ross AC, Caballero B and Cousins RJ. Modern Nutrition in
Health and Disease. 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2006.
Gibney MJ, Macdonald IA, Roche HM. Nutrition and Metabolism, Blackwell
Science Publishing, UK, 2003.
GTN209/3-Nutrition in a Life Cycle
This course focuses on nutritional aspects and the problems related with the growth and
physiological development of infants and the increasing nutritional demand during
pregnancy and breastfeeding. The course will also emphasise on the nutrition and growth
of children, teenagers, adults and elderly people. The discussions will cover nutritional
issues and human development in their life cycle from the fetus to the elderly.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Worthington-Roberts, BS et al, Nutrition Throughout Life Cycle, 4th Ed., London,
McGraw Hill, 2000.
Brown JE, Isaacs JS, Krinke UB, Nutrition Through Life Cycle, Wadsworth, 2004.
P. Shetty, Nutrition Through Life Cycle, Springer-Verlag Telos, 2003.
GTN210/2-Nutrition for Health and Fitness
This course provides the student with thorough coverage of the role that nutrition plays in
enhancing one's health, fitness and sport performance. The focus of the course will be on
general effects of nutrition and exercise on health-related and sports-related fitness,
nutrition for optimal health and physical performance, and the role of energy and
nutrients as the key to all exercise and sports activities. Body composition and weight
control in relation to losing or gaining weight through diet and exercise will be discussed.
Current research and practical activities will be incorporated throughout.
126
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Melvin H Williams Nutrition for Health, Fitness & Sport, 8th Ed., McGraw-Hill,
2007
Melinda M. Manore and Janice L. Thompson Sport Nutrition for Health and
Performance - 1st Ed., Human Kinetics
Robert E. C. Wildman, Sports and Fitness Nutrition, Brooks/Cole Pub Co, 2003
GTN211/3-Food Analysis
This course discusses food intake techniques, preservation and food sample preparation
prior to analysis. In depth studies about the principles of physical and chemical analyses
in determining physico-chemical properties and food nutrient contents will also be
covered. Chemical analyses cover proximate analysis, determination of fat properties, fat
content, detection of preservatives, colouring and contaminants. The students will also be
exposed to the basic techniques of food microbiology.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Suzanne Nielson, Food Analysis, 3rd Ed., Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers,
2003.
Pomeranz Y & Meloan CE, Food Analysis. Theory and Practice, 3rd Ed., New
York, Chapman and Hall, 2000.
Tee ES, Ismail MN, Nasir MA & Khatijah I, Nutrient Composition of Malaysias
Foods, 4th Ed., Kuala Lumpur, Institute for Medical Research, 1997.
GTN212/3-Assessment of Nutritional Status
This course exposes students to methods of nutritional evaluation in the individual and
community. They will be introduced to direct and indirect methods of assessment of
nutritional status. The focus is on food calculation and nutrient intake, anthropometric
measurement, dietary evaluation, biochemical evaluation and clinical assessment. The
students will collect data and use reference standards for the different stages of age and
classification criteria.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Lee, R.D. and Nieman, D.C., Nutritional Assessment, New York: McGraw-Hill,
2007.
Jelliffe, O.D., The Assessment of Nutritional Status in the Community, Geneva:
WHO, 2007
Sauberlich HE, Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status, 2nd Ed.,
CRC Press, 1999.
127
4.
5.
Tee E. Siong et al., Nutrition Composition of Malaysian Food, 4th Ed., Kuala
Lumpur: Malaysian Food Composition Database Programme, 1997.
Bendich, A. and Deckelbaum, R.J. (ed.), Primary & Secondary Preventive
Nutrition, Totowa (N.J., USA) : Humana Press, 2001.
GTP201/2-Linguistics for Speech Pathology
This is an advance component of the linguistics course that focuses on various
assessments of speech and language from the linguist’s perspective with reference to the
main languages in Malaysia and dialectal variations of these languages. Students will be
exposed to qualitative and quantitative methods in phonology, morphology, syntax,
semantics, pragmatics and discourse. This course also emphasises on the application of
this knowledge in the management of speech pathology cases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Buckley, B., Children's Communication Skills: From Birth to Five Years, Oxford:
Routledge, 2003.
Croft, W., Cognitive Linguistics, London: Cambridge University Press, 2004.
Black, M. & Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinician: A Practical Introduction.
London: Hodder Arnold, 2003.
GTP202/3-Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders
This is a basic course of human communication and swallowing disorders. This course
focuses on the disorders of speech, language, voice, fluency, hearing and swallowing.
The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of
communication and swallowing disorders. Overview of the basic principles of common
management procedures for the individual with these disorders is also covered.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Shames, G. H., & Anderson, N. B., Human Communication Disorders: An
Introduction, 7th Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2006.
Hedge, M. N., Introduction to Communicative Disorders, 4th Ed., Austin: Pred.,
2010.
Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication Sciences and
Disorders:From Science to Clinical Practice, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, 2010.
128
GTP203/2-Speech Pathology Clinic I
In this course, students are expected to engage actively in clinical observation session.
The focus of observation is on the interviewing process and history taking skills, formal
and informal assessment procedures, and on the techniques and intervention strategies for
speech and language disorders. The students are also expected to prepare the materials for
therapy and to undergo placement at several specialist clinic.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist, London: Singular
Publication Groups, 1997.
Hegde, M., Pocket Guide to Treatment in Speech-Language Pathology, 3rd Ed.,
San Diego, CA: Singular/ Thomson Learning, 2007.
Kersner, M. & Wright, J. (Eds), Speech and Language Therapy: The Decisionmaking Process When Working With Children, 2nd Ed., London: David Fulton
Publishers, 2001.
GTP204/2-Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology
This course provides knowledge on important aspects of paediatrics that are relevant to
the field of audiology and speech pathology. It covers the normal aspects and conditions
associated with prenatal, perinatal and postnatal periods, etiologies of communication
disorders and their characteristics found in paediatric cases. Basic knowledge of the
management of normal or abnormal paediatric cases seen by the paediatrician will also be
covered in this course. This course also emphasizes on the application this knowledge in
the management of speech pathology cases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Allen, K. & Marotz, L., Developmental Profiles: Prebirth Through Eighth, 3rd
Ed.,. Canada: Delmar Publishers, 1999.
Behrman, R. E., Kliegman, R. M., & Jenson, H. B., Nelson Textbook of
Pediatrics, 18th Ed., Philadephia: Elsevier, 2007.
Schoenbrodt, L., Childhood Communication Disorders: Organic Bases, Clifton
Park: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004.
GTP205/2-Speech Acoustics and Phonetics
This course provides fundamental knowledge on the production and perception of speech
acoustics. It covers the basic knowledge on speech acoustics such as sound waves,
resonance, frequency, intensity, acoustic features of vowels and consonants. Relationship
between phonetic and acoustics in human communication will also be covered.
129
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Speaks, C. E., Introduction to Sound: Acoustics for the Hearing and Speech
Sciences, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1999.
Kent R. D. & Read, C., Acoustic: Analysis of Speech, 2nd Ed., Canada: Delmar
Learning, 2002.
Ball, M. J. & Rahilly, J., Phonetics: The Science of Speech, London: Arnold,
1999.
GTP206/1-Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology
This course focuses in depth on the practical aspects of phonetics based on the
International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). It emphasizes the transcription practices and
analysis of normal and disordered speech sounds. Transcription practices based on IPA of
dialectal variations in the Malay Language will also be covered.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Edward, H. T., Applied Phonetics: The Sounds of American English, 3rd Ed.,
London: Delmar Learning, 2002.
Martin, J., Ball, O. M., & Lowry, Methods in Clinical Phonetics, London: Whurr
Publishers Ltd., 2001.
Roach, P., English Phonetics and Phonology: A Practical Course, 3rd Ed.,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.
GTP207/2-Speech Pathology Clinic II
In this course, the students are required to conduct interviewing session under
supervision to obtain history of the patients. The students also have to work on
building rapport with patients, especially the paediatric cases. Depending on the
supervisor’s decision, the students may be asked to assist the clinician during these
sessions. The student also are required to discuss their therapy goals, therapy plan and
the issues related to the diagnosis and prognosis of cases with their supervisor at the
end of each clinical session.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist, London: Singular
Publication Groups, 1997.
Philips, B. J. & Ruscello, D. M., Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language
Pathology, 2nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann, 1988.
Shipley, K. G. & McAfee, J. G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A
Resource manual, 4th Ed., New York: Delmar Learning, 2008.
130
GTP208/3-Speech Disorders
This is a theoretical course on the study of speech disorders and fluency disorders. The
study of speech disorders focuses on the articulation disorders and phonological
disorders. Meanwhile, the study of fluency disorders emphasizes on stuttering. The topics
covered are definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of speech disorders
and fluency disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessments and
principles of interventions in managing individuals with speech disorders or fluency
disorders.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Zebrowski, P. M. & Kelly, E. M., Manual of Stuttering Intervention, San Diego:
Singular/Thomson Learning, 2002.
Bernthal, J. E. & Bankson, N. W., Articulation and Phonological Disorders, 6th
Ed., Boston: Pearson/Allyn and Bacon, 2008.
Bleile, K. M., Manual of Articulation and Phonological Disorders: Infancy
Through Adulthood, 2nd Ed., Clifton Park, NY: Thomson-Delmar Learning, 2004.
GTS201/3-Exercise Physiology
This course focuses on the effects of training and exercise on various systems such as the
cardiorespiratory, muscular, endocrine, metabolic systems as well as on the bioenergetics.
Discussions on the various methods of physiological assessments catering for the trained
and untrained individuals, the elderly and children will be included.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Astrand P.O. and Rodahl, K. Textbook of Work Physiology, Champaign,
IL:Human Kinetics, 2003.
McAdrdle, W.D, Katch, Fl, Katch, VL., Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition,
and Human Performance, 5th Ed., Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 2001.
Wilmore, JH and Costill, DL Physiology of Sport and Exercise, Champaign,
IL:Human Kinetics, 2004.
GTS202/2-First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
This course introduces the students to first-aid techniques and cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR) methods used in various situations with the emphasis on sports
related incidences.
List of text/reference books:
1.
Thygerson A., American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons First Aid, CPR and
AED, 4th Ed., Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2005.
131
2.
3.
National Safety Council, Standard First Aid, CPR and AED, New York: McGrawHill Higher Education, 2005.
National Safety Council, Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, New York: McGrawHill Higher Education, 2005.
GTS203/2-Kinanthropometry
The course introduces students to the measurements of individual movements in
connection with size, shape, composition and ratio. It will provide students with
knowledge on both the theorectical and practical methods in assessing professional
athletes from the structural and functional perspective with considerations to differences
in size and shape.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Gore CJ (editor) Australian Sports Commission, Physiological Tests for Elite
Athletes, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers, 2000.
Marfell-Jones, M. & Olds, T. (eds.), Kinanthropometry X, London: Routledge,
2007.
Eston R & Reilly T. (eds.), Kinanthropometry and Exercise Physiology
Laboratory Manual: Test, Procedures and Data, London : Routledge, 2009.
GTS204/2-Test and Measurements for Sports Science
This course introduces students to the terms, concepts and procedures related to the
measurements and assessments of exercise and sports. These include validity and
reliability of tests, their references, norms and criteria. Selection of methods, alteration
and building skill tests, physical fitness tests, effective serial tests, and the valuation of
the merit score test relative to the absolute standard will also be covered.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Baumgartner, T. A., Jackson, A. S., Mahar, M. T. & Rowe, D. A., Measurement
for Evaluation in Physical Education and Exercise Science, 8th Ed., New York:
McGraw-Hill, 2007.
Morrow, J.R., Jackson, A. W., Disch, J.G. & Mood, D.P., Measurement and
Evaluation in Human Performance 3rd Ed, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005.
Wood, T. M. & Zhu, W., Measurement Theory and Practice in Kinesiology,
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2006.
GTS205/3-Sports Psychology
This course exposes the students to the psychological skills and training strategies that
can be applied to improve sports performance. The course will emphasise on the
significance of emotional, cognitive and social processess in understanding sporting
behaviour.
132
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Cox, R., Sport Psychology: Concepts and Applications, 5th Ed., Columbus, OH:
McGraw Hill, 2002.
Gill, D., Psychological Dynamics of Sport, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics,
2000.
Weinberg, R. & Gould, D., Foundations of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 2nd
Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2000.
GTS206/3-Sports Training Methodology
The course covers topics such as sports competitions, sports qualification, motor
development training, planning and scheduling in sports. It also introduces the methods
utilised in perfecting a technique, body shape, tactical preparation and psychological
make-up.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Strength Training for Sport, Handbook of Sports Medicine and Science, An IOC
Medical Commission Publication, Blackwell Science, 2002.
Bompa T.O., Periodization: Theory and Methodology of Training, 4th Ed., York
University, 2000.
Bondarchuk, A Track and Field Training, Translated by James Riordan., Kiev:
Zdotovye, 1986.
GTS207/3- Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports
This course introduces basic badminton, soccer and volleyball skills and game play
including the knowledge and skills of these games with consideration of relevant
kinesiological, physiological, biomechanical and socio-psychological factors/principles.
This course also emphasises on skill acquisition, performance, and analysis of these
games
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Dearing, J., Volleyball Fundamentals, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2003.
Grice, T.A., Badminton - Steps to Success, 2nd ed., Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics, 2008.
Mielke, D., Soccer Fundamentals. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2003.
133
GTU201/2-Health and Society
This course introduces basic concepts of health and illness with emphasis the importance
of culture, religion, social class (poverty, gender and diseases prevention and treatment.
The discussion on the health system will be focused in the context of social wellbeing
and sustainable development in the society.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
McElroy, A., Townsend, P., Medical Anthropology in Ecological Perspective, 4th
Ed., Westview Press, 2003.
Graaff, J., What Is Sociology? Oxford University Press, 2002.
Baer, H.A., Susser, I., Singer, M., Medical Anthropology and the World System,
2nd Ed., Greenwood Publishing Group, Incorporated, 2003.
GTX210/3-Medical Radiation Physics II
This course introduces the students to basic fundamentals of electricity, magnetism and
modern physics and its role in the modern world and important connections with almost
all areas of technological developments.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Taylor, J., Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers, 2nd Ed., Pearson Prentice
Hal, 2004.
Beiser, A., Concepts of Modern Physics, 6th Ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2003.
Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, 8th Ed., Wiley,
2007.
GTX212/3-Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics
This course discusses ordinary differential equations (ODE) of first and second orders,
their solutions, meanings and methods of solutions that include Laplace transforms, series
solution. It also introduces Fourier series and method of separation of variable for the
partial differential equation (PDE). Simple applications relevant to medical imaging
science will be covered such as vibrating string, vibrating membrane.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Kreyszig, E., Advance Engineering Mathematics, 9th Ed., John Wiley and Sons,
2005.
Arfken, G., Mathematical Methods for Physicists, 5th Ed., Elsevier Science &
Technology Books, 2000.
Stroud, K. A., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Industrial Press, 2003.
134
GTX213/3-Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine
This course provides theoretical exposure to the students about the basic principles in
nuclear medicine. Students will acquire basic knowledge related to radioactivity,
radioactive decays, radionuclide and radiopharmaceutical production methods, types of
radiopharmaceuticals used in nuclear medicine, radiation detection and radiation
monitoring statistics and internal dose calculations in nuclear medicine imaging.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Saha, G.B., Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., SpringerVerlag, New York, 2006.
Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics, 6th Ed., Lippincott William &
Wilkins, 2004.
Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, 3rd
Ed., Elsevier, 2003.
GTX214/3-Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology
This course introduces the students to the principles of basic sciences in the area of
diagnostic radiology, imaging, focusing and conventional imaging. These include x-ray
production and equipment, introduction to imaging, radiography production and factors
that influence the quality of a radiograph.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hendee, WR & Ritenour ER, Medical Imaging Physics, 4th Ed., John Wiley &
Sons Inc., 2002.
Allisy-Roberts, Penelope, Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Elsevier,
2008.
Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. and Boone, J.M., The Essential
Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2002.
135
5.3. Core Courses
Level 300
136
GTA301/3-Basic Hearing Amplification Technology
This course discusses topics related to hearing amplification devices. These include
physical and electroacoustic features, types of hearing aids and earmoulds, evaluation and
prescription of hearing aids, acoustic and electroacoustic modification and counseling.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Valente, M., Hearing Aids: Standards, Options, and Limitations, 2nd Ed., New
York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002.
Valente, M., Strategies for Selecting and Verifying Hearing Aid Fittings, 2nd Ed.,
New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002.
Valente, M., Roeser, R. J. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Treatment, New York:
Thieme Medical Publishers, 2000.
GTA302/3-Audiology Clinic I
In this course, students will have clinical attachment at audiology clinic to take case
history, observe and perform basic audiological assessments. Students are expected to
involve actively in all aspects with close supervision.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Stach, B. A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., and Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis,
Treatment, Practice Management Volumes I-III, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme
Medical Publishers, 2008.
GTA303/3- Paediatric Audiology
This course discusses the audiological assessments in paediatric population. Students will
also learn appropriate test selection for children, necessary modification for special needs
children, integrating test results, and explaining results and make appropriate suggestions
to parents.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Madell, J. R., & Flexer, C., Pediatric Audiology, New York: Thieme Medical
Publishers, 2008.
Bellis, T., Assessment and Management of Central Auditory Processing Disorders
in the Educational Setting from Science to Practice, 2nd Ed., New York: Singular
Publishing Group, 2003.
137
3.
Northem, J. L., & Downs, M. P., Hearing in Children, 5th Ed., Maryland:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
GTA304/4-Audiology Clinic II
In this course, students will have clinical attachment to practice history taking,
audiological assessments (subjective and objective test), hearing aid prescription,
verification and validation, and ear-impression taking under supervision. Students will
actively involve in all clinical aspects but under lesser supervision.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic
Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, 1996.
Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic
Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, 1998.
GTA305/3-Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology
This course discusses assistive listening devices (ALDs) including vibrotactile aids, loop,
FM (frequency modulated), and infrared systems.. The selection criteria for cochlear
implant, midbrain implant and bone anchored hearing aids (BAHA) and other
implantable hearing aids will be discussed in this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dillon, H., Hearing Aids, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2000.
Valente, M., Hearing Aids: Standards, Options, and Limitations, 2nd Ed., New
York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002.
Valente, M., Strategies For Selecting and Verifying Hearing Aid Fittings, 2nd Ed.,
New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002.
Zeng, F. G. & Popper, A. N., Cochlear Implants: Auditory Prostheses and Electric
Hearing (Springer Handbook of Auditory Research), New York: Springer, 2006.
GTA306/3-Auditory Rehabilitation
This course discusses rehabilitation involved in hearing impaired patients at all stages of
life. It also covers the importance of team work (audiologist, speech-language
pathologist, teacher, social worker) and the roles of other professionals in aural
rehabilitation. The selection of communication mode (e.g. cued speech, signing etc)
based on residual hearing, speech and language development of hearing impaired will
also been discussed.
138
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hull, R.H.H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San
Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.
Tye-Murray, N., Foundations of Aural Rehabilitation: Children, Adults, and Their
Families, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.
Johnson, C. E., Guidebook for Support Programs in Aural Rehabilitation, San
Diego: Singular Pub. Group, 1999.
GTB307/3-Medical Parasitology
This course covers the definitions, classifications and nomenclatures of protozoa and
helminths that infect humans. In addition, focus will be on the theoretical and practical
aspects of routine and molecular diagnosis of various medically important parasites. The
morphology, life cycle, epidemiology, brief pathogenesis, prevention and control of
protozoal and helminthic infections will also be discussed. Identification keys and
principles of controlling the four medically important genera of Malaysian mosquitoes
will also be covered. The final topic will cover the structure, function and administration
of a typical parasitology laboratory.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bogitsh, B. J., Carter, C. E. & Oeltmann (2005). T. N. Human Parasitolog (3rd
Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press.
Halton, D.W., Behnke, J.M. & Marshall, I., (Eds.) (2001). Practical exercises in
Parasitology. Cambridge: University press.
Leventhal, R., & Cheadle, R.F.
(2002). Medical Parasitology: A Selfinstructional Text (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: F A. Davis Publishing Co.
Parija, S.C. (2006). Textbook of Medical Parasitology (3rd ed.). New Delhi: All
India Publishers & Distributors.
GTB310/3-Clinical Biochemistry
This course introduces the students to the theory and pathophysiological biochemistry of
the human body. They will also be exposed to the principles of biochemical tests in the
laboratory, and the interpretation of results from laboratory analyses performed on
samples. The students are also expected to acquire some skills in performing laboratory
diagnostic procedures in chemical pathology including specimen receiving and
processing, reagent preparation related to biochemical analyses performing diagnostic
tests such as liver function test, renal, heart, pancreas, gastrointestinal tract, measurement
of pH, acid-base haemostasis of the body, electrolytes, determination of enzyme
activities, blood glucose protein, albumin, urea, cholesterol and triglyceride levels, and
other major biochemical parameters in diagnostic biochemistry. The students will also be
exposed to the manual diagnostic procedures and in the application of laboratory
automation for clinical diagnosis, quality control program and laboratory administration.
139
Further, students will be exposed to actual working environment through short
attachments at the Chemical Pathology Laboratory, School of Medical Sciences.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Bishop, M.L., Duben-Engelkirk, J.L., & Fody, E.P. Clinical Biochemistry, 4th Ed.,
Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000.
Burtis, C.A., & Ashwood, E.R., Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry, 5th Ed.,
Philadelphia: Saunders, 2001.
GTB315/2-Medical Virology and Mycology
This course covers the details of general characteristics of medically important viruses,
molds and yeasts. It also explains about the role of these pathogens in the course of
diseases, epidemiology, reservoirs, transmission, pathogenesis of diseases and clinical
manifestations. The students will also be taught on appropriate clinical specimens
collection and transportation techniques, the principle and processing techniques of
laboratory detection, isolation and identification of these pathogens. Apart from that,
student will acquire knowledge concerning on advantages and disadvantages of available
laboratory techniques or tests (such as staining, culture, serological tests and molecular
methods) used for bacterial detection. Prevention, control methods and treatment of the
diseases caused by those pathogens are also discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Betty, A. F., Daniel, F. S. & Alice, S. W. (2007). Bailey & Scott’s Diagnostic
Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press.
Cheesbrough, M. (2006). District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part
2. (2nd Ed.) U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press.
Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M. (2007). Jawetz, Melnick &
Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) USA: Mc Graw Hill.
Gerald, L. M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D. (2010). Mandell, Douglas, and Bennett’s
Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.) London: Churchill
Livingstone.
Maria, D.D (1997). Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby.
GTB316/3-Transfusion Science and Blood Banking
This course covers theory and practical aspects of immunology and genetic of blood
group and related tests for blood and blood component transfusion to patients.
Complication of blood transfusion and application of blood and blood components in
medical field are also discussed. Students will be exposed to knowledge and practical
skills in pretransfusion testing, blood taking, preparation and processing of blood
components and storage to ensure good quality management of blood products.
140
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Harmening D.M. (2005). Modern Blood Banking and Transfusion Practice (5th
Ed.). NY: F.A. Davis Co.
Roback J.D. (ed.) (2008).Technical Manual, American Association of Blood
Banks, (16th Ed.). American Association of Blood Banks (AABB).
Rudmann, S.V. (2005). Textbook of Blood Banking and Transfusion Medicine,
(2nd Ed.). NY: Elsevier Science.
GTB317/3-Advanced Haematology
This course correlates the basic principles of hematology which comprise of structure and
function of blood cells and other normal blood components previously introduced in
Hematology 1 with blood pathophysiological condition that caused by factor deficiencies
which is needed for normal blood function and production or caused by genetic or
environmental factors. This course will be focusing on the disease that involved blood
and its related system which is frequently seen in clinical hematology practice for eg:
Nutritional anaemias, Hemolytic anaemia, leukemias and genetic hematological
malignancies, assessment of blood morphology from full blood picture and bone marrow
smear, bleeding disorder caused vascular problem, platelet and clotting factors,
thrombotic problem and antithrombotic treatment, automation in hematology and
laboratory management.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Harmening D.M. (2008). Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis
(5th Ed.) NY: F.A. Davis Co.
Hoffbrand V., Moss P., and Pettit J. (2006). Essential Haematology (5th Ed.)
London: Blackwell Publishing.
Lewis S.M., Bain B.J. and Bates I. (2007). Dacie and Lewis Practical
Haematology (10th Ed.). NY: Elsevier Science.
GTB318/3-Pharmacology II
This course discusses the principles of pharmacology including pharmacokinetics,
pharmacodynamics, quantitative and systemic pharmacology (autonomic, cardiovascular,
respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine, antimicrobials, central nervous system, anticoagulant and anti-inflammatory). The latest methodology in the development and
production of pharmaceutical drugs and alternative medicines will be introduced. This
course is expected to emphasize various aspects of applied pharmacology and efficacy
studies in relation to health sciences.
141
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Craig, C.R., and Stitze, l R.E. (eds) (2003). Modern Pharmacology With Clinical
Applications (6th Ed.). NY: Little Brown & Co.
Katzung, B.G. (2003). Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (9th Ed.). NY: McGrawHill Co.
Rang and Dale (2007). Pharmacology (6th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone.
Tripathi, K.D. (2008). Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (6th Ed.). India: Jaypee
brothers Medical publishers (P) Ltd.
GTD310/4-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I
This course provides clinical training to the students with the intention of enhancing their
dietetic skills while giving medical nutrition therapy to the patients in hospital wards.
This internship programme covers individual patient approach, bed side counseling,
nutrient intake analysis and therapeutic diet planning according to patients' dietary
requirements based on diagnosis and medical report. Activities such as assessment of
nutritional status and diet surveillance are also included. The students are required to give
diet education to patients and their families. The students will understand the role and
importance of dietitians in a healthcare team. Upon completion of this course the
students are expected to submit case reports and to give case presentation of their
respective case studies.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hendricks K.M, Duggan C., and Walker W.A., Manual of Paediatric Nutrition, 4th
Ed., BC Decker, 2005.
Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy,
12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.
Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study
Approach, 3rd Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
GTD311/3-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
This course explains the rationale of modifying normal diet to therapeutic diet in terms of
nutrient composition, texture and presentation. It enables students to understand the
importance of therapeutic diet in the prevention and treatment of various diseases. Topics
include dietary management of gastrointestinal diseases, cardiovascular diseases,
diabetes, inborn errors of metabolism, body weight control, eating disorders, failure to
thrive, food allergy, food intolerance and rehabilitation. The application of food exchange
lists and various dietary guidelines will also be discussed.
142
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic
Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003.
Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy,
12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD315/2-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II
This course is a continuation of Principles of Diet Therapy I. It covers the principles and
dietary management including the physiological and biochemical changes that occur
during renal diseases, hepatobiliary diseases, cancer, skeletal and muscle diseases, pre
and post operation conditions, trauma and burns. This course also deals with pediatric
nutrition, total enteral and parenteral nutritions. Each topic will discuss about the
theoretical and practical aspects of medical nutrition therapy that has to be given to the
patients which includes assessment, planning, implementation, evaluation and
documentation of the nutritional care processes.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic
Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003.
Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy,
12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD317/4-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I
This course is a continuation of the Dietetic Internship I which will focus on dietetic
services at special units in hospitals and clinics such as ICU, CCU, pediatric,
hypertension unit and diabetes mellitus clinic. Evaluation of nutritional status, specific
diet treatment and diet surveillance of patients before discharge will also be conducted.
Patient diet management in wards whether normal, therapeutic or effective enterelparenteral and the lag of diet regime planning including the evaluation of the
effectiveness diet regimes will also be discussed. Students will be introduced to
nutritional status evaluation and therapeutic care of HIV, kidney, neuro-musular and
skeletal systems diseases patients and those who suffer from cancer. Those enrolled in
this course will also learn about topics related to operations and burns patients. Ethics
and bed side counseling procedures during diet treatment session will be focussed in
order to enhance students’ communication skills. This will be undertaken with
counselors. Emphasis will be on communicative ability with the patient's family
especially on the diet of patients suffering from cancer and HIV.
143
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Werbach MR and Moss J, Textbook of Nutritional Medicine, Third Line Press,
2000.
Skipper A (ed.), Dietitian's Handbook of Enteral and Parenteral Nutrition, 2nd
Ed., Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011.
Nelms, M., Roth, S.L and Lacey, K Medical Nutrition Therapy: A Case Study
Approach, 3rd . Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
GTD318/4-Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I
This course exposes students to practicals involving the handling of cases in the
outpatient clinics. They are expected to be able to translate diet therapy theory into
practice ensuring that they will easily understand diseases requiring nutritional
intervention. They will also be taught on how to change patients' nutritional habit by
using counselling techniques and history of prevalence. It is expected that this internship
will effectively improve their skills required for nutritional counselling sessions.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Alpers DH, Stenson WF, Bier DM, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 5th Ed.,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.
Bauer K.D and Sokolik, C.A, Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development,
Wadsworth, 2002.
Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump, S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy,
12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD321/3-Therapeutic Diet Preparation
This course gives practical training in the methods of therapeutic diet preparation for
various disease conditions. Usage of foods for meal preparation and the minimisation of
food wastage will be discussed during diet preparation. Purchase of raw materials,
calculation of the nutrient contents in a prepared food item, preparation methods, food
serving and sensory evaluation will be emphasised. Lectures on therapeutic diet
preparation protocols will be given before the practical session. Assessment will be based
on the students’ ability in selecting/purchasing raw materials, nutrient calculations,
demonstration of food serving and sensory evaluation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003.
Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic
Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
Alpers DH, Stenson WF, Bier DM, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 5th Ed.,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.
144
GTF300/2-Biological Evidence
This course introduces the students to the multiple biological evidence types of both plant
and animal origin that are found at the crime scenes, the methods of observing, describing
and collecting them, their salient morphological features that enable identification and the
procedures used in the laboratory to investigate these evidence. The evidence types
focused will include, among others, pollen grains, diatoms, wood, hairs and natural
fibers, damages in cloth and necrophagous insects. Emerging areas in forensic biology
such as wildlife and marine forensics and bioterrorism are also included.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Alan Gunn (2006), Essentials of Forensic Biology, John Wiley & Sons, England.
Siegel J, Knupfer G and Saukko P (2000), Encyclopedia of Forensic Sciences,
Academic Press, London.
Saferstein, R. (ed) (2001), Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. I-III, Prentice-Hall,
New Jersey.
Byrd JH and Castner JL., (2001), Forensic Entomology: The Utility of Arthropods
in Legal Investigations, CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Ogle RR and Fox MJ., (1999), Atlas of Human Hair Microscopic Characteristics,
CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Robertson J and Grieve M, (1999), Forensic Examination of Fibres, Taylor &
Francis, London.
GTF301/3-Physical Evidence
This course describes the characterization of some kinds of physical evidence commonly
encountered in crime investigation: paint, glass, soil, fibres, and lamp filaments by using
physical and instrumental techniques. Theory and techniques of macrophotography and
photomicrography; the principles and experimental techniques on the restoration of
erased numbers on different metal surfaces and investigations related to computer crime
are also included. Uses of lasers and electron microscopy in the examinations of physical
evidence materials form part of the curriculum.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Andrew R.W. Jackson and Julie M. Jackson, Forensic Science, (2nd Ed.), Pearson,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science, (3rd Ed.), CRC Press, 2009.
Lamp Examination for ON or OFF in Traffic Collisions, North Western
University, IL 60 204 2003.
145
GTF305/4-Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs
This course introduces the students to the fundamental concept of toxicology, forensic
toxicology, poison, multiple poisoned material, chemistry and appearance of poisoned
material, signs and symptoms of poisoning, multiple procedures, techniques and
equipments employed to extract, identify and profile the poisoned material from
biological and autopsy specimens. Classification and identification of drugs that
commonly abused, modes of action in human body and techniques to identify and detect
them will also be emphasised.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cole, M. D., The Analysis of Controlled Substance, New Jersey: John Wiley &
Sons, 2003.
Flanagan, R. J., Taylor, A. A., Watson, I. D. & Whelpton, R., Fundamentals of
Analytical Toxicology, New Jersey: Wiley-Interscience, 2008.
Jickell, S., Negrusz, A., Moffat, A. C, Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke
Analytical Forensic Toxicology, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2008.
Karch, S. B., Postmorterm Toxicology of Abused Drugs, Steven B. Boca Raton:
CRC Press, 2008.
Moffat, A.C., Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke's Analysis of Drugs and
Poisons, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2011.
GTF306/3-Fire Investigation
This course introduces students to the concepts and basics of fire investigation and
methods to collect material evidences in structure fires and forest fires to find out the
origin and cause of fire to solve cases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
David, J. icove and John D. Dehaan, Forensic Fire Scene Reconstruction, Prentice
Hall, 2003.
John and D., Kirk’s Fire Investigation, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2002.
Redsicker, D.R., Practical Fire and Arson Investigation, CRC Press, Boca Raton,
1997.
GTF309/3-Forensic DNA Analysis
This course introduces students to the fundamental knowledge associated to forensic
DNA analysis, including the earlier developments to the most recent advances. Students
will also be exposed to problems and cases associated in each technology involving DNA
analysis and ways of troubleshooting to solve the problems. Students will be trained to
use apparatus and latest software in DNA analysis and interpret the results. At the end of
146
the course, student will also be exposed to real forensic cases involving DNA analysis to
improve their understanding of the importance of DNA technology in the field of
Forensic Sciences.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Norah Rudin and Keith Inman, An Introduction to Forensic DNA Analysis, 2nd
Ed., CRC Press, 2001.
John Butler and John M. Butler, Biology and Technology Behind STR Markers,
Academic Press, 2001.
Bruce Budowle, Jenifer Smith and Tamyarah Moretti, DNA Typing Protocols:
Molecular Biology and Forensic Analysis, Eaton Pub. Co., 2000.
GTF311/3-Forensic Anthropology
This course introduces the students to the fundamentals of forensic anthropology, the
types of biological and peripheral evidence useful in anthropological analysis, crime
scene and excavation techniques, handling the skeletal remains, types of anthropometric
and anthroposcopic identification using skeletal remains like assessment of race, sex, age
and individualization and the limitations there in. The techniques focused, among others,
include skull based personal identification using video superimposition method (handson) and applying specific radiological skeletal traits. Photo to photo comparison and
anthropological reconstruction of population biology are also included.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Komar DA, Buikstra JE. (2008), Forensic Anthropology, Contemporary Theory
and Practice, Oxford : Oxford University Press.
Pickering R, Bachman D. (2009), The Use of Forensic Anthropology (2nd Ed.),
Florida : Charles C. Thomas.
Krogman, WM, Iscan MY., (1986), The Human Skeleton in Forensic Medicine,
Charles C.Thomas, Illinois.
Iscan, MY and Helmer, RP. (eds) (1993), Forensic Analysis of The Skull-Cranio
Facial Analysis, Reconstruction, and Identification, Wiley Liss Inc., New York.
Byers SN, (2002), Introduction to Forensic Anthropology, Allyn & Bacon,
Boston, USA.
Schmitt A, Cunha E, Pinheiro J, (2006), Forensic Anthropology and Medicine :
Complementary Sciences from Recovery to Cause of Death, Humana Press,
Totowa, New Jersey.
Byers SN (2008), Forensic Anthropology Laboratory Manual, Pearson. Boston.
147
GTF312/3-Organic Chemistry III
This course provides knowledge about the structure, nomenclature, synthesis, and
reactions of amines, phenols and alcohols. This course also covers the study of
carbohydrates and nucleic acids. The course will emphasise on the understanding of
amino acids, peptides, proteins, lipids and synthetic polymers and their importance.
Main references supporting this course:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.G. Wade. Jr., Organic Chemsitry, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013.
T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 10th Ed., John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2011.
J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008.
J. E. McMurry,“Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008.
P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007.
GTF313/3-Food Chemistry
This course exposes students to the chemistry of food. Students are taught about
classification and structure of carbohydrates, proteins, oils and fats. Food flavour and
food additives are also introduces using various examples. Students are also exposed to
food forensics and the importance of quality control in food.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Belitz, H.-D., Grosch, W. and Schieberle, P. Food Chemistry,
Hornback, J. M. Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005.
Damodaran, S., Parkin, K. L. and Fennema, O. R. Fennema's Food Chemistry,
Akoh, C. C. and Min, D. B. Food Lipids: Chemistry, Nutrition, and
Biotechnology, CRC Press/Taylor & Francis Group, Boca Raton, 2008.
Frey, C. and Rouseff, R. Natural Flavors and Fragrances : Chemistry, Analysis,
and Production, Carl : American Chemical Society, Washington, DC, 2005.
Otles, S. Methods of Analysis of Food Components and Additives, CRC Press,
Boca Raton, 2005.
GTF314/2-Forensic Serology
This course introduces the concept of antigens and antibodies and various polymorphic
blood-proteins and enzymes present in the blood and body fluid. It also provides practical
knowledge to group the body fluids from crime scenes, to identify and individualise the
samples. This course also explains briefly HLA system and its application to identify
individuals.
148
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bidwell J.L., Navarrete C. and Bodmer W.F., Histocompatibility Testing, Imperial
College Press, 2000.
Saferstein R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II and III, Regents/Prentice HalL,
New Jersey, 1993.
Issitt P.D., Applied Blood Group Serology, 3rd Ed., Montgomery Scientific
Publication, 1985
GTJ309/2-Critical Care Nursing
This course provides students with theoretical knowledge on medical-surgical pertaining
to risk factors, etiology, patho-physiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic
investigations, and diagnostic investigation as well as medical/surgical treatment of
patients who are critically ill. The knowledge will be used to plan for nursing
management including health promotion strategies to patients at all ages with disturbance
to multi system. This course will also integrate all learned nursing skills particularly those
specific to the nursing management of patients with altered cardio-respiratory function
and other body systems. Learning of nursing skills will be provided via practical sessions
in the critical areas.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2008). Medical surgical nursing: Critical thinking in
client care (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
Berman, A., Synder, S.J., Kozier, B., & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing:
Concept, process and practice (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A. (2004) Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th ed.).
USA: Mosby.
GTJ310/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal)
This course exposes the students to the theoretical and professional aspects of medicalsurgical nursing practice related to endocrine and musculoskeletal system. It focuses on
the etiology, clinical manifestation, diagnostic investigations, medical and surgical
management and complications. Students will acquire experience in providing nursing
care and health promotion for patients with endocrine and musculoskeletal disorders in
hospital and community. The nursing practice approach used is from the wellness-illness
continuum and holistic context.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing. critical thinking in
client care, (4th. edition) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Timby, B.K and Smith N. (2010) Introductory Medical Surgical Nursing (10th
edition) Lippincott Williams and Wilkins Philadelphia
149
3.
Sublett ,C and Blair, M (2008) Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical management
for positive outcomes (8th edition) Saunders Elsevier, St. Louis
GTJ311/2- Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
This course is designed to introduce a basic concept of Psychiatric-Mental Health nursing
in the specific care of individuals and family experiencing a mental health problem and
psychiatric disorder. It will provide students a theory of mental health and mental illness;
and expose students to the biopsychosocial model of treatment in psychiatric setting. The
course is based on a holistic and humanistic framework, emphasizing on patient’s care
and family intervention in the hospital and community
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
O’Brien, P.G., Kennedy, W.Z., & Ballard, K. A. (2008). Psychiatric Mental
Health Nursing. An Introduction to Theory and Practice. Massachusetts: Jones and
Barlett.
Shives, L.R. & Isaacs, A. (2002). Basic concepts of psychiatric & mental health
nursing. 5th ed. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott.
Varcarolis, E.M., & Halter, M.J. (2010). Foundation of Psychiatric Mental Health
Nursing. A Clinical Approach. 6th Edition. St. Louis: Saunders Elsevier.
GTJ312/6-Research Project
This course aims to provide the student experience in performing a research project in
related field in nursing and other health sciences topics under the guidance of
supervisor(s) in Semester 1 and II (one academic year). The student is to report their
research project findings and submit their thesis/dissertation at the end of the final
semester II.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Creswell JW (2008).Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed
Methods Approach, 3rd. Edn., Thousand Oaks, California: Sage Publication.
Gerrish K & Lacey A (2010). The Research Process in Nursing, 6th edn., WileyBlackwell Publishing Ltd., UK.
Wood GL & HaberJ (2010). Nursing Research: Methods and Critical Appraisal
for Evidence-Based Practice, 7th edn., Mosby Elsevier, New York.
150
GTJ313/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and
Opthalmology)
This course provides students with theoretical knowledge on medical-surgical pertaining
to risk factors, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic
investigations, and diagnostic investigation as well as medical-surgical treatment of
patients with Neurology, Otorhinolarygology and Opthalmology problems in hospital and
community. The knowledge will be used to plan for nursing management including
health promotion strategies to patients at all ages with disturbance to the system either in
hospital or community. This course will also integrate all learned nursing skills
particularly those specific to the nursing management of patients with such health
problems. Learning of nursing skills will be provided via practical sessions in the nursing
skills laboratory and clinical areas that have patients with Neurology, Otorhinolarygology
and Opthalmology problems.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2008). Medical surgical nursing: Critical thinking in
client care (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
Berman, A., Synder, S.J., Kozier, B., & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing:
Concept, process and practice (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A. (2004) Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th ed.).
USA: Mosby.
GTJ314/2-Nursing Education
This course is structured to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of the
theories, principles and methods of teaching and learning process. Particular attention is
given to the preparation of students to plan and conduct teaching and learning to patients,
relatives and staff in the clinical areas. Evaluation of the course will be based on
continuous assessments from different types of approaches such as quiz, developing
lesson plan and conducting clinical health teaching for patients, relatives and staff in
clinical area and peer evaluation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
DeYoung, C, S. (2003). Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators. New Jersey:
Prentice Hall.G. L. Miessler
Lowenstein, A. L. & Bradshaw, M. J. (2004). Fuszard’s Innovative Teaching
Strategies in Nursing. 3rd ed. Sudbury: Jones & Bartlett Publisher.
Jarvis, P. (2002). The Theory and Practice of Teaching. UK: Kogan Page.
151
GTJ315/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Haematology
and Oncology)
This course provides students with theoretical knowledge on medical-surgical pertaining
to risk factors, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic
investigations as well as medical/surgical treatment of patients with dermatology,
immunology, hematology and oncology problems in hospital and community. The
knowledge will be used to plan for nursing management including health promotion
strategies to patients at all ages with disturbance to the system either in hospital or
community. This course will also integrate all learned nursing skills particularly those
specific to the nursing management of patients with such health problems. Learning of
nursing skills will be provided via practical sessions in the nursing lab and clinical areas
that have patients with dermatology, immunology, hematology and oncology problems.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2008). Medical surgical nursing: Critical thinking in
client care (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
Berman, A., Synder, S.J., Kozier, B., & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing:
Concept, process and practice (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Gulanick, M., & Myers, J.L. (2007). Nursing care plans: Nursing diagnosis and
intervention (6th ed.). USA: Mosby Elsevier.
GTJ316/2-Gerontological Nursing
This course exposes the students to the care of geriatric patients. The contents of this
course include the aspect of medical, surgical, diagnostic investigations, complications
and holistic nursing management. Congruent with the knowledge and skills, students are
expected to acquire the ability to deliver holistic nursing care to geriatric patients in an
institution or community setting.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Miller, C.A. (2009) Nursing for Wellness in Older Adults (5th edition) Lippincott
Williams and Wilkins, Philaldelphia
Ebersole, P, Hess, P. Touhy, T.D. Jett, K. and Luggen, A.S. (2008) Towards
Healthy Ageing: Human Needs and Nursing Response (7th edition) Mosby
Elsevier, St. Louis.
Meiner, S.E. and Lueckenotte A.G. (2006) Gerontologic Nursing (3rd edition)
Mosby Inc. St. Louis
152
GTJ317/2-Principles of Health Management
This course is structured to expose students with the basic knowledge of the principles
and theories of health management. Issues such as management concepts and evolutions,
organizations process, basic functions of a manager, financial management, leadership,
change, motivation, groupwork, team building, decision making, conflict resolution, job
satisfaction and organization development will be discussed in this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Kelly-Heidenthal, P. (2003). Nursing leadership and management. Canada:
Delmar Learning.
Marquis, B. L. & Huston, C.J. (2006). Leadership roles and management
functions in nursing theory and application (5th ed.). Lippincott William &
Wilkins: USA
Liebler, J. G. & McConnel, R. (2004). Management principles for health care
professionals (4th ed.). Jones & Butler Publishers, Inc.
GTJ318/2-Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing
This course exposes the students to the care of neonatal and pediatric patients. The
contents of this course compile the aspect of medical, surgical, diagnostic test,
complications and holistic nursing management. Congruent with this knowledge and
skills, students are expected to acquire the ability to deliver holistic nursing care to
neonates and children in a tertiary or community hospital.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hockenberry, M. J. (2005). Wong’s Essential of Pediatric Nursing. 7th ed. St.
Louis: Elservier Saunders.
Murray, S. S. & Mckinney, E. S. (2006). Foundation of Maternal – Newborn
Nursing. (4th ed.) Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders Co.
Muscari,M. E. (2005). Pediatric Nursing. 4th ed. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott.
GTK301/4-Environmental And Occupational Toxicology
This course introduces the students to the principle of polluted substances released to
environment and their toxicology effect to the living things. Students will be introduced
to toxicology definition, types of toxicology test and interpretation of toxicology data.
This course also discusses basic immunology concept, types of tissue and lymphoid cell;
types, and molecule functions; antigen concept, immunogenic, antigenicity and
immunogenecity and immunisation and immunopathology concept. Application of
antigen-antibody reaction in diagnosis will be introduced.
153
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stanley E.M., Toxicological Chemistry And Biochemistry, Lewis Publication,
2003.
Clements W.H., Community Ecotoxicology, John Wiley & Son, 2002.
Paul I., Toxicity And Risk: Context, Principles And Practice. Routledge, London,
2001.
Hayes A.W., Principles And Methods Of Toxicology, 4th Edition. Taylor &
Francis, 2001.
GTK302/3-Environmental And Occupational Health From Engineering Perspective
This course introduces the students to the theory and application of knowledge
engineering, especially civil and mechanical engineering in implementing engineering
controls to reduce pollutant levels in the workplace environment. Pollution prevention
measures in buildings through selection of construction materials will be introduced.
Aspects of civil engineering to reduce sick building problems and accidents will also be
discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Code of Practice, Indoor Air Quality, DOSH, Malaysia, 2010.
Davis M. L. & Masten S. J., Principles Of Environmental Engineering And
Science, McGraw-Hill, 2004.
De Nevers N., Air Pollution Control Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
Uniform Building By-Laws, MDC Publishers, 2000.
Mohd Zaid Y., Teknologi Industri: Kawalan Mutu Dan Peralatan, Dewan Bahasa
& Pustaka, 1996.
Noor Hassim I., Kesihatan Persekitaran, Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka, 1993.
Code of Practice, Design And Construction, British Standards Institution, 1997.
GTK303/3-Domestic, Laboratory And Industrial Waste Management
This course exposes the students to the knowledge on waste classification and
characteristics of distinction. It also introduces legal requirements in relation to the
disposal of solid waste and radioactive waste scheduled. Analytical techniques and
methods of waste handling are also discussed. The method of labeling, packaging,
storage, transport and waste disposal as well as the safety aspects of waste handling waste
are also emphasized.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Isa Baud, Johan Post & Christine Furedy, Solid Waste Management And Recycling
: Actors, Partnerships & Policies In Hyderabad, India & Nairobi, Kenya. Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2004.
Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974. International Law Books Services. 2007.
154
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hester R.E & Harisson R.M., Environmental And Health Impact Of Solid Waste
Management Activities, Cambridge: Royal Socitey of Chemistry, 2002.
Blackman W. C., Basic Hazardous Waste Management, 3rd Edition. CRC Press,
2001.
Cheremisioff N. P., Handbook Of Solid Waste Management And Waste
Minimization Technology, 2002.
Grover V. I., Solid Waste Management, Rotterdam, 2000.
GTK304/3- Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants
This course focuses on the importance and measurement of levels of contaminants in the
environment. Students are taught in greater depth of sampling methods, storage and use
of samples as AAS analytical instrument, GCMS and HPLC to measure various types of
contaminants in the field of health and hygiene. Students are also taught the knowledge to
formulate the plan of monitoring concentrations of contaminants in the environment and
the workplace. The use of new technologies for environmental monitoring, such as
Geographical Information System (GIS) and Radio Frequency Environmental Tracking
System will also be described.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Friedrich R. & Reis S., Emission Of Air Pollutants: Measurement, Calculation
And Uncertainties, 1st Ed. Springer, UK, 2004.
Vallero D., Environmental Contaminant: Assessment And Control, AP, London,
2004.
Ware G. W., Reviews of Environmental Contamination And Toxicology, Springer,
2001.
Fifield F.W. & Haines P.J., Environmental Analytical Chemistry, Blackwell
Science, UK, 2000.
Vincent J.H., Particle Size: Selective Sampling For Particulate Air Contaminants,
Academic Press, London, 1998.
Bacci E., Ecotoxicology of Organic Contaminant, CRC, London, 1993.
GTK305/3-Environmental And Occupational Health Related Diseases
This course discusses various types of diseases caused by environmental pollution and
workplace. Students will learn the concept of disease, symptoms and medical measures
needed to identify the disease. Health monitoring, medical surveillance and preventive
measures to be taken will be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Yassi A., Tord Kjellström, Theo de Kok and Tee Guidotti. Basic Environmental
Health WHO, UNEP Oxford University Press, 2001.
Reese C. D., Occupational, Health And Safety Management: A Practical
Approach, Lewis Publishers, 2003.
155
3.
4.
Koran H., Environmental And Occupational Health, 2nd Ed. CRC Press, 2004.
La Dou J., Current Occupational And Environmental Medicine, Lange Medical
Books. 3rd Ed., 2003.
GTK306/3-Environmental And Occupational Emergency
This course discusses the major accidents and disasters in Malaysia and Southeast Asia
that have impact on the environment and the life of workers. Students are also introduced
to the concept of disaster prevention and the establishment of an Emergency Response
Plan (ERP) and Emergency Response Team (ERT). In addition, handling of emergency
aid equipment, knowledge of first aid and fire fighting techniques will be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Parcell P., Disaster Prep 101: The Ultimate Guided Emergency Readiness, Info
Quest, 2004.
Greece S. A., International Resources Guide To Hazardous Chemicals:
Manufacturers, Agencies, Organizations And Sources Of Information, William
Andrew Publishing, 2003.
Leigh J. P., Markowitz S., Fahe M. & Landrigen P., Costs Of Occupational
Injuries And Illnesses, 4th Ed. University of Michigan Press, 2003.
Erickson P. A., Emergency Response Planning For Corporate And Municipal
Managers, Academic Press, 1999.
GTK307/3-Occupational Rehabilitation
This course introduces students to the theory and application in the rehabilitation process
that assists injured workers to return to duty. Emphasis is given to the role of
occupational safety and health officers to monitor the rehabilitation of workers on site
working.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dollard M. F., Winefield A. H. & Winefield H. R., Occupational Stress In The
Service Professions, Taylor & Francis Inc., 2003.
Menckel E. & Westerholm P., Evaluation In Occupational Health Practice,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.
Ann Allart W., An Occupational Perspective Of Health, Thorofare, NJ: SLACK,
Inc., 1998.
Brenda S., Managing Disability At Work: Improving Practice In Organisations, J.
Kingsley, 1991.
156
GTN301/3-Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum
This course exposes students to communities such as the squatter population, handicap
homes, old age homes, pregnant mothers, health care clinics and centers for a period of
four weeks to promote health activity and to educate the community on incorrect
nutritional habits. This course also enables the students to face real life situation as
dietitians in the community. The students will be involved in educational activity either
in the form of talks or demonstrations in order to increase the awareness of selected
populations towards acquiring optimal nutrition. Students will also gather knowledge
about the role of a selected health care agency in a community setup.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Homan, M.S., Promoting Community Change- Making it Happen in the Real
World, Belmont Thompson Higher Education, 2008.
Nutrition Society, Gibney M.J., (Editors), Public Health Nutrition, Blackwell
Publishers, 2003.
Heber D, Nutrition for Primary Care, Saunders W B Co, 2000.
Morgan JB, Dickerson JW (Eds.), Nutrition in Early Life John Wiley & Sons,
Incorporated, 2003.
GTN309/3-Nutrition and Diseases
This course covers selected clinical situations requiring individual nutrition regimes.
Discussions of diseases related to the gastrointestinal, cardiovascular, urinary, endocrine
and nervous systems will be undertaken. In addition, aspects of diversity of treatment,
effect of drugs, radiation and operation-related condition such as trauma, burn, cancer,
pregnancy, insufficient protein nutrient, retardation of growth, pre and post surgical and
diarrhea will be covered. Metabolic changes related to diseases, drug and food
interactions, patient health condition and preventive aspects will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Ganong WF., Review of Medical Physiology, 21st Ed., Appleton & Lange,
2003.
P. Kumar, Clark, Clinical Medicine, 5th Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, 2005.
Vinay Kumar, Nelso Fausto, Abdul Abbas, Robbins & Cotnan Pathologic Basis of
Disease, 7th Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, 2004.
157
GTN310/2-Food and Nutrition Toxicology
Food toxicology covers food safety during handling, preparation, processing, storage and
food services and lectures on diseases normally causes by water and food contaminants.
The main causes of food poisoning including microorganisms, toxic wastes, insects and
heavy metals are discussed. Preventive procedures and the issue of misleading
consumption of food fortification agents and food additives will be discussed. The role of
government agencies or specific bodies such as HACCP and GMP requirements of
factories and other food industries in ensuring safety of food will also be covered.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Helferich W, Winter CK, Food Toxicology, CRC Press, 2000.
Ray B, Fundamental Food Microbiology, 3rd Ed., CRC Press, 2003.
Stanley, T. T. Omaye, Omaye T. Omaye, Food and Nutritional Toxicology,
Marcel Dekker, 2004.
GTN311/3-Food Service Management
This cource discusses the important aspects of catering, planning and food service
management, menu planning, selection of laboratory equipments and food service
system. Students are exposed to methods, principles and preparation techniques of
nutritious and tasty food in huge quantities. Food safety and sanitation will also be
discussed. Dynamic flows of food from the purchasing stage up to the serving of clients
within time constraints are discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Knight JBL & Korschevar LH, Quantity of Food Production, Planning and
Management, New York : Van Nstrand Reinhold, 1999.
Byers BA, Shanklin CW, Hoover LC, Hoover LA, Food Service Manual for
Health Care Institutions, 2nd Ed., American Hospital Pub. Inc., 1997.
Spears MC & Marquardt NW, Food Service Organization: A Managerial and
Systems Approach, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.
GTN312/3-Food Microbiology
This course will introduce students to the role of microorganism in food. Chronicle
research in food microbiology, characteristics and behavior of microorganisms, water
bone disease, microbial related food poisoning and toxicity will be discussed. Students
will be exposed to several aspects of food production by using the means of
microorganism and food biotechnology. Statistics related to food quality control will also
introduced.
158
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Jay, JM, Modern Food Mikrobiology, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,
2001.
Ray, B., Fundamental Food Mikrobiology, USA: CRC Press, 2003.
Waittes, MJ and Mogan, NL, Industrial Microbiology, New York: Blackwell
Science Inc., 2001.
Marth, EH and Steele Sr, JL, Applied Dairy Microbiology, NewYork: Marcell
Dekker Inc., 2001.
Harrigan, W, Laboratory Methods in Food Microbiology, New York: Academic
Press, 1998.
Garbutt, JH, Essential of Food Microbiology, New York : Edward Arnold, 1997.
GTN314/2-Nutrition Anthropology
This course focuses on the food heritage and definition of food diversity in different
cultures including classification of food, belief, taboo, food symbolism, origin and food
pattern evaluation including food availability pattern and food preparation. It also covers
the factors that influence food choice and trends in food intake. Students will be taught on
dietary habits of various ethics or community and its implication towards nutritional and
health status.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bryant C.A., Dewalt K.M., Courtney A. and Schwantz J., The Cultural Feast-An
Introduction to Food and Society, Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, 2003.
Kitler, Goyan P., Food and Culture, Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, 2000.
McMillan DE (editor), Anthropology & Food Policy: Human Dimensions of Food
Policy in Africa & Latin America, Univ. of Georgia, 1991.
Sinclair HM & Howat GR, World Nutrition and Nutrition Education, Paris,
Oxford Univ. Press, 1980.
Rita R.C., The Economic & Politics of Health, Chapel Hill, 2001.
Gordon J, Direnzo, Human Social Behavior: Concepts and Principles of
Sociology, Holt Rinehart & Winston, 1990.
GTP301/2-Psycholinguistics
This is an advanced course in linguistics that discusses the psychological and
neurobiological processes in the acquisition, understanding and the use of language. The
topics covered include language processing and production, first and second language
acquisition and bilingualism. This course also emphasizes on the application of
psycholinguistics knowledge to the field of speech pathology.
159
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Altmann, G. T. M., Psycholinguistics Critical Concepts in Psychology, London:
Routledge, 2002.
Field, J., Psycholinguistics A Resource Book for Students, London: Routledge,
2003.
Steinberg, D. D., Hiroshi, N. & Aline, D. P., Psycholinguistics Language, Mind
And World, Essex: Longman, 2001.
GTP302/2-Language Disorders
This is a theoretical course on language disorders among children which focuses on the
developmental language disorders such as receptive language disorders and expressive
language disorders. It covers definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of
language disorders. In addition, this course also discusses the methods of assessment and
principles of interventions in managing individuals with language disorders.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Rhea, P., Language Disorders from Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment
and Intervention, 3rd Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2001.
Nelson, N. W., Childhood Language Disorders in Context: Infancy Through
Adolescence, 2nd Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1998.
Vinson, B. P., Language Disorders Across the Lifespan: An Introduction 2nd Ed.,
San Diego: Singular Pub. Group, 2008.
GTP303/2- Neuropsychology
This is a theoretical course which exposes students to the fundamental aspects of
neuropsychology in the fields of speech pathology. The topics covered included major
brain structures, systems and their associated functions. It focuses, in general, on the
brain-behaviours and brain-cognition relationships and their disorders. This course also
emphasises on the application of this knowledge to the management of speech pathology
cases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Stirling, J., Introducing Neuropsychology, New York: Taylor& Francis, Inc.,
2002.
Rains, G. D., Principles of Human Neuropsychology, Montreal: McGraw-Hill,
2002.
Balconi, M (ed), Neuropsychology of communication, New York: Springer, 2010
160
GTP304/3-Speech Pathology Clinic III
This courses required the students to conduct interviewing sessions under supervision
and perform related formal/ informal assessment of patients. They are also expected to
practice building rapport with patient, especially in paediatric cases. Depending on the
supervisor’s judgment, the students may be asked to assist the therapist and/or to
perform the therapy. The students are also required to plan therapy goals, weekly
therapy plan and formulate the prognosis prior to discussion with supervisors.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Smit, A.B., Articulation and Phonology Resource, New York: Thomson Delmar
Learning, 2003.
Gordon-Brannan, M., Clinical Management of Articulatory and Phonologic
Disorders, 3rd Ed., New York: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2007.
Gregory, H.H., Campbell, J. H., Gregory, C.B. & Hill, D.G., Stuttering Therapy:
Rationale and Procedures, Boston: Allyn & Bacon Inc., 2003.
GTP305/2-Counseling for Special Population
This is a theoretical course that exposes fundamental aspects of counselling in the fields
of audiology and speech pathology. It focuses on the application of counselling
methodologies in the management of individuals with communication disorders. The
topics covered include theories, procedures, related issues in counselling and their
applications in the fields of audiology and speech pathology.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Luterman, D.M., Counseling persons With Communication Disorders and Their
Families, 5th Ed., Austin, TX: Pro-Ed., 2008.
Flasher, L. V, & Fogel, P. T, Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist
and Audiologist, Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.
Nelson-Jones, R., Introduction to Counseling Skills, 3rd Ed., London: Sage
Publication Ltd., 2000.
GTP306/3-Voice and Resonance Disorders
This is a theoretical course on disorders of voice and resonance. The study of voice
disorders focuses on several types of voice disorders such as organic and neurological
voice disorders, and alaryngeal speech. The study of resonance disorders emphasises on
hypernasality and hyponasality are introduced. The topics covered include definitions,
etiologies and characteristics of each type of voice disorders and resonance disorders.
This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in
managing individuals with voice disorders and resonance disorders.
161
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Stemple, J. C., Glaze, L. E., & Klaben, B. G., Clinical Voice Pathology: Theory
and Management, 3rd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2000.
Kent, R. D., & Ball, M. J., Voice Quality Measurement, San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, 2001.
Boone, D. R., McFarlane, S. C. & Von Berg, S. L., The Voice and Voice Therapy,
8th Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.
GTP307/3- Acquired Communication Disorders
This is a theoretical course on acquired communication disorders that focuses on acquired
language disorders such as aphasia, dementia, right hemisphere syndrome and traumatic
brain injury and motor speech disorders such as apraxia and dysarthria. The topics
covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of acquired
communication disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and
principles of interventions in managing individuals with acquired communication
disorders.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Freed, D. B., Motor Speech Disorders Diagnosis and Treatment, San Diego:
Singular Publishing Group, 2000.
Brookshire, R. H., Introduction to Neurogenic Communication Disorders, 7th Ed.,
St. Louis: Mosby, 2003
Hedge, M.N., A Coursebook On Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language
Disorders, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2007.
GTP308/4-Speech Pathology Clinic IV
In this course, the student are required to manage patients with speech disorders and
hearing impairment under supervision Students will have to perform interviewing session
related asessment and interpretion of data collected. They also have to plan for the long
and short term goals, weekly therapy plan and conduct therapy session on their own.
Each decision made by students will be analysed critically during discussion with the
supervisor. The student will be trained to make the diagnosis and prognosis for each case
that they handle. Therefore, students must show adequate knowledge and critical thought
during the discussion session in order to make proper diagnosis and prognosis.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Meyer, S. M., Survival Guide for the Beginning Speech-Language Clinician, 2nd
Ed., London: Pro-Ed Inc., 2004.
Rhea, P., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment
and Intervention, 3rd Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2001.
162
3.
Hull, R. H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San
Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001.
GTP309/3-Hearing Impairment
This is a theoretical course on hearing impairment and aural rehabilitation. The study of
aural rehabilitation focuses mainly on paediatrics aural habilitation with an additional
exposure on adults’ aural rehabilitation. The topics covered include hearing impairment
and its effects on communication, audiological management and educational issues. This
course emphasises on the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in
managing individuals with hearing impairment.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hull, R. H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San
Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001.
Johnson, C. E. & Danhauer, J. C., Guidebook for Support Programs in Aural
Rehabilitation, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999.
Northern, J. C. & Davis, M. P., Hearing in Children, 5th Ed., Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
GTP310/2-Speech Pathology Clinical Placement
In this course, the students are required to help in handling various cases of paediatric and
adult cases of speech and language disorders, hearing impairment, acquired neurogenic
disorders, and voice and resonance disorders under selected supervisor from outside of
the university. Depending on the supervisor’s judgment, the student may be asked to
assist the clinician during the session. The students will be required to conduct the
interviewing session and perform related formal/ informal assessment of the patient and
also to plan for the goals and therapies. Ethics and related professional issues will also be
highlighted.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Goldstein, B., Cultural and Linguistic Diversity Resource Guide for SpeechLanguage Pathologists, New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2000.
Hedge, M. N., Treatment Protocols for Language Disorders in Children, Plural
Publishing, Incorporated, 2005.
Hedge,M. N., Clinical Methods and Practicum in Speech-Language Pathology, 5th
Ed., New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2009.
163
GTS301/3-Sports Nutrition
This course exposes students to the methods of identifying the nutritional requirements of
the sports person in various sporting disciplines. Nutrional requirements of various sports
events and additional ergogenic aids to enhance sports performance will also be
discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
McArdle, W.D., Katch, F.I., Katch, V.L., Sports and Exercise Nutrition, 3rd Ed.,
Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Wildman R.E.C. and Miller B.S., Sports and Fitness Nutrition, Belmont, CA:
Thomson/Wadsworth, 2004.
Eberle S.G., Endurance Sports Nutrition, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics, 2007.
GTS302/2-Motor Learning
This course introduces the students to learning theories and perception, and how these
impact on motor learning, including the acquisition of motor skills, retention and
forgetting of information.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Magill, R. A., Motor Learning. Concepts and Applications, Columbus, OH:
McGraw-Hill, 2004.
Schmidt, R. and Lee, T. Motor Control and Learning: A Behavioral Emphasis,
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005.
Schmidt, R. and Wrisberg, C., Motor Learning and Performance, Champaign, IL:
Human Kinetics, 2004.
GTS303/3-Sports Injuries and Rehabilitation
This course introduces the students to the concepts of trauma and injuries in sports,
epidemiology of sport injuries and mechanism of injuries due to sport activities. Different
types of sport injuries on specific body region will be discussed. Students will learn about
the principles of rehabilitation process including the use of equipments for the treatment
and therapies of particular sport injuries. Students will also be exposed on the post injury
management related to rehabilitation program and learn how to implement the basic
techniques for injury prevention in sports.
164
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Robert S. Gotlin, (Ed.). Sports Injuries Guidebook. Champaign: Human Kinetics,
2008.
Freddie H. Fu, Stone & David A. Stone (eds). Sports Injuries: Mechanisms,
prevention and treatment, 2nd Ed.. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
2001.
Selvanetti, A., Giombini, A., Puddu, G. (eds). Rehabilitation of Sports Injuries.
Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. New York. 2001
GTS304/3-Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology
This course introduces the students to the anatomy of the skeletal-muscle and neuromuscular structure, helps to understand the functions and limitations of the systems,
comprehend the types and causes of movement in sports and to analyse body motion. The
course will focus on the development techniques of human motion analysis from the
aspect of structure and function as well as the applied mechanical principles involved in
human movement. Examples from joint movements and application of sports skills will
be used for the analyses.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hamilton N., Welmar W. and Luttgens K., Kinesiology: Scientific basis for human
motion, 11th Ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2008
Bartlett R., Introduction to Sports Biomechanics: Analysing human movement
patterns, 2nd Ed., London: Taylor & Francis, 2007.
Hall S.J., Basic Biomechanics, 5th Ed., Boston, Mass.: McGraw-Hill, 2007.
GTS305/2-Applied Sports Physiology
The course emphasises on physiological changes to the body based on influence from
environment, training method, time and age level. The environmental aspects related to
sport performance including problems during exercise in hot and damp environment will
be discussed. Issues related to altitude training, circadian rhythm and jet lag phenomena
will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Reilly T. and Waterhouse J., Sport, Exercise and Environmental Physiology,
Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, 2005.
Tipton C.M. (Eds) Sawka M.N., Tate C.A. and Terjung R.L. (Eds), ACSM's
Advanced Exercise Physiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
2006.
Powers S.K. and Howley E.T., Exercise Physiology Theory and Application to
Fitness and Performance, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2001.
165
GTS306/3-Coaching Science and Performance Analysis
This course introduces the students to the information of sport sciences (anatomy,
physiology, psychology, biomechanics, and skill acquisition) which are important for
coaches. It also emphasises on the management, planning and interpersonal skills
required by the modern coach. The course also covers advanced coaching means and
methods, theoretical and practical aspects of planning, periodisation, forecasting and
target setting in order to analyse sport performance.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Martens R., Successful Coaching, 3rd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2004.
Pyke F.S., Australia Sports Commission, Better Coaching: Advance Coach’s
Manual, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001.
MacMorris T. and Hale T. Coaching Science: Theory Into Practice. John Wiley &
Sons, 2006.
Hughes M., Notational Analysis of Sport: Systems for Better Coaching and
Performance in Sport, London: Routledge, 2004.
GTS307/3- Physical Activity, Growth and Development
This course introduces the students to issues related to physical growth and development
with regards to physical activity. Discussion on the maturation process, morphological
and functional changes in relation to exercise and training will be conducted.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Thies K.M. and Travers J.F., Growth and Development through the Lifespan, 2nd
Ed., Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2009.
Malina, R. M., Bar-Or, O., Bouchard, C., Growth, Maturation and Physical
Activity, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001.
Jurimae, T. and Hills, A. P., Body Composition Assessment in Children and
Adolescents, Karger, 2001.
GTU302/3-Biostatistics
This course introduces the students to the basics of biostatistics in relation to qualitative
data analysis and quantitative analysis in medicine and health such as normal distribution,
one-sample and two-sample case study, correlations, linear regression, one-way
ANOVA, analysis of categorical data and analysis of numerical data.
166
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Daly, J., Gliksman, J. and Kellehear A. and Gliksman, M. (1997) Public Health
Researcher: A Methodological Guide. UK: Oxford University Press.
Daniel, W.W. (1998). Biostatistics: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health
Sciences, 7th Ed., NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998.
Norman, G.R and Streiner, D.L, Norman, G.R. (2000). Biostatistics - The Bare
Essentials, 2nd Ed., Ontario: B.C. Decker Inc.
GTU303/2-Research Methodology
This course introduces students to various important concepts and aspects in research
methodology. It encompasses the characteristics, types and approaches in research
usually employed by researchers. Students will also be exposed to the integration of
Health Science research mechanism with the Social Science counterpart as a
comprehensive research. The process of scientific calculation of sample size, preparation
and critical evaluation of research proposal, data analysis and research report writing will
be given greater emphasis.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R. (1999). Handbook for
Research Methods in Health Science., Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman.
Montgomery, D. (2000). Design and Analysis of Experiments (5th Ed.). NY: John
Wiley and Sons.
Zieger, M. (1999). Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.).
NY: McGraw-Hill Professionals.
GTU303/2-Research Methodology
This course introduces students to various important concepts and aspects in research
methodology. It encompasses the characteristics, types and approaches in research
usually employed by researchers. Students will also be exposed to the integration of
Health Science research mechanism with the Social Science counterpart as a
comprehensive research. The process of scientific calculation of sample size, preparation
and critical evaluation of research proposal, data analysis and research report writing will
be given greater emphasis.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R., Handbook for
Research Methods in Health Sciences, Addison Wesley, Longman Australia,
1999.
Zieger, M., Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers, 2nd Ed., McGrawHill Professionals, 1999.
167
3.
Montgomery, D.C Design and Analysis of Experiments, 5th Ed., John Wiley and
Sons, 2000.
GTX302/2-Radiation Protection and Safety I
This course aims to expose the students theoretically regarding biological effects of
ionizing radiation as well as basic principles on radiation protection. Students also will be
taught through lectures and demonstration regarding radiation detection and measurement
using available radiation detectors. This course also discuss the regulatory acts regarding
the use of radiation and radiation safety in Malaysia especially the Atomic Energy
Licensing Act (1984). This course also gives input to the students regarding Radiation
Protection Programme as recommended by Atomic Energy Licensing Board (AELB).
Students will be taught theoretically and through demonstrations regarding safety
procedure and emergency involving radiation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Ismail, B. and Mohd. Yusof, M.A., Managing Radiation Safety: Guide for
Radiation Protection Officers, 1st Ed., McGraw Hill, 2007.
Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H. and Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller’s Textbook of
Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2002.
Martin, A. and Harbison, S.A., An Introduction to Radiation Protection, 5th Ed., A
Hodder Arnold Publication, 2006.
GTX307/3-Radiation Protection and Safety II
This course is the continuity of Radiation Protection and Safety I course. This course
concerns on giving input through lectures and practical regarding the application of basic
principles in radiation protection towards medical fields. Students will be exposed on
radiation protection and safety aspects including administration, work procedures and
construction of three main departments in hospital: Diagnostic radiology, radiotherapy
and nuclear medicine. Students will be exposed practically on workplace and personnel
monitoring according to Atomic Energy Licensing Board (AELB) and Ministry of Health
(MOH). Students also will be taught theoretically and practically regarding working
procedures and safety aspects in research using radiation as well as radiation waste
management.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
McGinley P.H., Shielding Techniques for Radiation Oncology Facilities, 2nd Ed.,
Medical Physics Publishing, 2002.
Statkiewicz sherer, M.A., Visconti, P.J. and Ritenour, E.R., Radiation Protection
in Medical Radiography, 5th Ed., Mosby, 2006.
Lombardi, M.H., Radiation Protection in Nuclear Medicine, 2nd Ed., CRC, 2006.
168
GTX314/2-Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry
This course focuses on radiation dosimetry. The theoretical aspects of radiation dosimetry
for both photon and electron will be discussed. Topics on dosimetry of ionization
chamber, thermoluminescent detector, film, gel and solid state detector also will be
introduced.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hendee W.R. and Ibbott G.S., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., John Wiley and
Sons Inc., 2003.
Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation
Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.
Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2003.
GTX316/3-Diagnostic Radiology Imaging
This course focuses on the methods of imaging other than conventional ways including
mammography, fluoroscopy, digital radiology, digital subtraction angiography (DSA),
CT scan and MRI. It also includes quality assurance programmes, regulations on the use
of radiation equipment and practical radiation protection.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Allisy-Roberts, Penelope, Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Elsevier,
2008.
Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of
Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A
Science, 4th Ed., Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.
GTX317/3-Nuclear Medicine Imaging
This course focuses on in-vivo radiation detection and the major components of imaging
equipment including gamma camera and PET scanner. Image formation in nuclear
medicine imaging with the performance parameters for both gamma camera and PET
scanner and quality assurance will be discussed. Students will be taught the imaging
techniques using gamma camera and PET scanner.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics, 6th Ed., Lippincott William &
Wilkins, 2004.
Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of
Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
169
3.
Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, 3rd
Ed., Elsevier, 2003.
GTX320/3-Principles of Radiotherapy
This course introduces students the basic principles of photon beam and electron beam
therapies including basic physics and dosimetry of radiotherapy. Students will be taught
the monitor unit calculation techniques for clinical applications. Students will also be
exposed to the proper technique on calibration of photon beam and electron beam that
generated by linear accelerator.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2003.
Hendee, W.R., Ibbott, G.S. and Hendee, E.G., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed.,
Wiley-Liss, 2004.
Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation
Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.
GTX321/4-Imaging Techniques I
This course gives the opportunity to students to carry out clinical training in the hospital
related to diagnostic radiology. Students will learn various imaging procedures using xray machines. Students need to perform patient preparation and management during
imaging procedures, include practising good communication skills. Students will be
trained to practise the ethical and responsibillities of work in the imaging and diagnostic
department
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive
Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006.
Bontrager, K.L. and Lampignano, J.P., Textbook of Radiographic Positioning and
Related Anatomy, 7th Ed., Elsevier Mosby, 2010.
Sutherland, R. and Thomson C., Pocketbook of Radiographic Positioning, 3rd Ed.,
Churchill Livingston, 2007.
170
5.4. Core Courses
Level 400
171
GTA401/6-Research Project
This course requires the students to conduct and complete a research project in audiology
over two semesters. The aim of this research project is to expose the students to research
methodology and research problem solving methods. The results of the research are
presented in the last semester of the program.
List of text/reference books:
References suitable for the research title.
GTA402/3-Noise and Hearing
This course discusses noise and its effects on health and hearing, types of noise, noise
levels measurement, other measurement devices, and Malaysia’s Noise Control Act.
Hearing conservation programme, hearing protection devices, noise-induced hearing loss
and record keeping for noise exposed population will be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Hinchcliffe, R., & Luxon, L. M., Noise and Hearing, London: Whurr, 2001.
Luxon, L., & Prasher, D., Noise and its Effects, London: Whurr, 2007.
Lipscomb, D. M., Hearing Conservation in Industry, Schools and the Military, 1st
Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1995.
GTA403/5-Audiology Clinic III
In this course, students will be supervised for their clinical sessions either in or off
campus during Year 3 long semester break and the first semester of Year 4. They are
expected to improve their clinical skills such as client history, taking a conduct
audiological assessment (subjective and objective tests), prescribe, evaluate and assess
hearing aids, take ear-impression, write refer and reply letters to other professionals
whenever necessary. Students will be trained to plan appropriate hearing tests or
management prior to every clinical session, to explain results and counsel clients at the
end of each clinical session. Student will actively involve and act competently in all
aspects while under supervision and lesser assistant from supervisor.
172
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic
Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, Inc. Hall, 1996. J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference,
Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego:
Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1998.
GTA404/2- Ethics and Law for Health Professionals
The aim of this course is to expose students to current issues in audiology field. Students
are required to present or to conduct forum on selected audiological topics. This course
will also expose the students to the professional code of ethics in Audiology and Speech
based on the American Speech and Hearing Association (ASHA). Local issues are also
discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Irwin, D. L., Pannbacker; M., Powell, T. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for
Speech-Language Pathologists and Audiologists, An Illustrative Caseboo, San
Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2007.
Lubinski, R. & Frattali, C., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology
and Audiology, San Diego : Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.
GTA405/5- Audiology Clinic IV
In this course, students will be supervised for their clinical sessions. The students are
expected to improve their clinical skills such as client’s history taking, to conduct
audiological assessment (subjective and objective tesst), to prescribe, evaluate and
validate hearing aids, to take ear-impression, to write referral letters, and audiological
reports to other professionals whenever necessary and competently while under
supervision. Students will be trained to plan appropriate hearing tests or management
prior to every clinical session and to explain results and counsel clients at the end of each
clinical session. Student clinicians are expected to be involved competently in every
aspect under supervision and with least assistance from the supervisor.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic
Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, Inc., 1996.
173
3.
Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic
Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, Inc., 1998.
GTB404/3-Toxicology
This course covers the introduction of toxicology, quantitative aspects and kinetics
including the effects of dose, effect and tissue responses to toxic agents, the excretion of
toxic substances, toxic reaction compounds, toxic substances such as solvent, food
additives, herbicides and pesticides, detergents. Toxicity testing, in vitro and in vivo test,
toxicokinetic, toxicity to target organs, particularly the human, carcinogen, mutagen
teratogen, the mechanism of toxicity, laboratory tests, an antidote, and treatment are also
being discussed. Students are exposed to knowledge regarding common toxins,
genetoxicity and current issues with regards to harmful chemicals. In addition, students
will be trained in the principles and practical techniques used in laboratory tests, such as
acute and chronic toxicity, carcinogenecity, the detection of trace elements, the isolation
and testing of compounds and the use of tools to study such as spectroscopy and
chromatography.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dart, R.C. (2003). Medical Toxicology, (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins.
Hodgson. E. (2004). A Texbook of Modern Toxicology, (3rd. Ed.). NY: John Wiley
and Sons.
Klaasen, C.D. et al. (2003). Casarett & Doull’s Essential of Toxicology (1st Ed.).
USA: McGraw Hill Companies Inc.
Klaasen, C.D. et al. (2008). Casarett & Doull’s Toxicology the basic science of
Poison, (7th Ed.). USA: McGraw Hill Companies Inc.
GTB407/4-Industrial Training
This is a core course in which student is given the choice to choose between gaining
experiences in a research laboratory or in a healthcare-based laboratory. In research
laboratory, student will be exposed to relevant practical skills in research. Student will be
guided and supervised by the laboratory researcher in project to be determined by the
supervisor. Student who chooses to perform his/her industrial training in
clinical/industrial laboratory will get to experience the running, analysis and evaluation of
various clinical or industrial tests. Student will also be exposed to various administrative
or management skills in the laboratory.
List of text/reference books:
Relevant text books and peer-reviewed journals related to the field of interest.
174
GTB408/9-Biomedical Practicum
This course covers the clinical laboratory services training catering for patients in
HUSM. The students will have opportunity to acquire practical knowledge and skills
through exposure in a real diagnostic laboratory working environment such as handling,
performing, analyzing and interpreting the tests or test results according to individual
patient’s condition or suspected disease. They will be able to apply previous laboratory or
clinical theoretical knowledge in the form of practical skills. The scope of the training
will also focus on the aspect of identifying the sources of problems in laboratory services
and handling them, acquiring skills in performing analysis of clinical specimens,
involving in implementation of quality control program, troubleshooting of equipments
and laboratory management. This course is to build and increase the skills and knowledge
of the students with regards to effective and qualitative laboratory management.
List of text/reference books:
Any text books relevant to the field of clinical/industrial attachment chosen by the
students including those journals in their respective fields of speciality.
GTB409/4-Research Project
The students are required to carry out a research project in related fields in order to
broaden their knowledge and skills in critical analysis and to acquire skills in scientific
aspects for the testing of hypotheses in health science topics.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R.(1999). Handbook for
Research Methods in Health Sciences. Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman.
Montgomery, D.C (2000).Design and Analysis of Experiments, 5th Ed. NY: John
Wiley and Sons.
Zieger, M. (1999). Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers 2nd Ed., NY:
McGraw-Hill Professionals
Any test books/journals relevant to the fields or topics of research chosen by the
students.
GTB410/2-Laboratory Management
Quality assurance has become an essential part of hospital services. It is described as
systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that a product or service will
satisfy given needs. The course introduces students to the concept of total quality
management (TQM) in clinical diagnostic laboratory. TQM in clinical diagnostic
laboratory emphasized the deployment of quality assurance principles and practice
through the development and implementation of quality assurance plans and phases.
175
Students will also learn the quality systems, ISO 9001, MS ISO 15189 and MS ISO/IEC
17025, in relation to the management of clinical diagnostic laboratory. Teaching and
learning methods will be in form of lectures, seminars and practical attachment in various
clinical diagnostic laboratories. Coursework assessment includes the evaluation of written
assignment, written test and seminar presentations.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Carson, P. A. & Dent. N.J. (2007). Good clinical, laboratory and manufacturing
practices: techniques for the QA professional. Cambridge: RSC Publication.
Cooper G. & Gillions T. (2007). Producing Reliable Test Results in the Medical
Laboratory. Irvin, CA: Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc
Department of Standards Malaysia. (2005). MS ISO/IEC 17025:2005. General
requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories.
Cyberjaya: Department of Standards Malaysia.
Department of Standards Malaysia. (2008). MS ISO 15189:2007. Medical
laboratories – Particular requirements for quality and competence. Cyberjaya:
Department of Standards Malaysia.
International Standards Organization. (2008). ISO 9001:2008. Quality
management systems – Requirement (4th Ed.). ISO.
Singer D. C., Stefan R. & and Staden J (2005). Laboratory Auditing for Quality
and regulatory Compliance. NY: Taylor & Francis Group.
GTD406/3-Outpatient Dietetic Practicum II
This course is a continuation of Outpatient Dietetic Internship I which aims to develop
students' self confidence in planning the diet and to handle diet counselling session under
supervision. Students will be attached to specialist clinics including the pediatric, renal
and surgical clinics.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic
Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
Bauer K.D and Sokolik, C.A, Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development,
Wadsworth, 2002.
Mahan K and Escott-Stump, S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th.
Ed., Saunders Co., 2007
176
GTD407/3-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II
This course is a continuation of Dietetic Practicum in the Ward I which aims to enhance
students’ dietetic skills in giving medical nutrition therapy to patients in hospital wards.
Students will be attached to selected wards such as pediatric, general, surgical and
medical wards under the supervision of respective dietitians. Students are required to give
case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite of
completion of this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Mahan, K and escott-Stump, S Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th
Ed., Saunders Co., 2007
Nelms, M., Roth, S.L and Lacey K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study
Approach, 3rd Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
Nix, S. William’s Basic Nutrition and Diet Theraphy. Mosby Elsevier, Canada,
2009.
GTD408/3-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II
This course is a continuation of Dietetic Internship Special Unit I which aims to expand
students' knowledge in giving appropriate medical nutrition therapy in specific fields
such as pediatric, surgery, trauma, medical, renal, oncology, nutritional support and
critical care. Intensive training will be provided by the respective dietitians. Students are
required to give case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a
prerequisite to the completion of this course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Werbach MR, Jeffrey Moss J, Textbook of Nutritional Medicine, Third Line Press,
2000.
Mahan, K and Escott-Stump, S. Krause’s Food, and Nutrition Therapy, 2008.
Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study
Approach, 3rd Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
GTF400/2-Forensic Medicine
This course introducesthe students to various kinds of death and its signs, fundamental
knowledge on the various chemical transformations taking place after death, which form
the basis for the estimation of time of death, on postmortem study, pattern and types of
injuries. It include theoretical and practical aspects of the victims dying of unknown
causes, killing, suicide, blunt/sharp force injuries, firearm & explosive injuries, asphyxia,
drowning, burns and electricals shocks. Students will witness autopsy demonstrations and
are taught the management of a mortuary, embalming and how to prepare a report of
procedure and the causes of death for certain cases.
177
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Jurgen Ludwiig, Handbook of Autopsy Practice, 3rd Ed., Human Press, 2002.
Maio, V.J.M, Dominic Dimaio and Dominic J. Dimaio, Forensic Pathology, 2nd
Ed., CRC Press, 2001.
Robinson, P.S., Principles of Forensic Medicine, Oxford Press, Hong Kong, 1996.
Jason Payne-James, Anthony Busuttil and William Smock, Forensic Medicine:
Clinical and Pathological Aspects, Greenwich Medical Media, 2003.
Saukko, Pekka, Knight’s Forensic Pathology, Arnold, 2004.
GTF402/4-Ballistics and Chemistry of Explosives
This course is a combination of ballistic and explosives. This course introduces concepts
of ballistics and knowledge for ballistic and explosive investigations. It also covers the
concepts of explosives and various types of firearms dan explosives commonly used by
terrorist and criminals. This course is conducted at Chemistry Department by the experts
in ballistics and explosives.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Vincent J. M. Di Maio, Gunshot Wounds: Practical Aspects of Fire Arms,
Ballistics, and Forensic Techniques, 2 nd Ed., CRC Press, 2002.
Jonas A.Zukas, William, P.Walters, Explosive Effects and Applications, Springer,
2002.
Mike Pickett, Explosives Identification Guide, Delmer Publishers, 1998.
Donald E. Carlucci and Sidney S. Jacobson, Ballistics - Theory and Design of
Guns and Ammunition, CRC Press, 2007.
Tom Warlow, Firearms, the Law, and Forensic Ballistics, 2nd Ed., CRC Press,
2005.
GTF406/6- Research Projects
The course offers opportunities for students of forensic science hands-on, career-related
experience complementing their academic education. The students will engage in
supervised research under the guidance of a faculty member. They are encouraged to
select research topics in criminalistics, biological and chemical sciences, criminal
profiling and forensic psychology. The course requires substantial independent work by
students. The completion of the course will present the students the ability to better
understand research methodologies. The course will also provide a strong science
foundation and emphasize the scientific method and problem solving skills that will keep
them in good stead, when they are employed in forensic laboratories.
178
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Guide to the preparation of dissertation for undergraduate research project, School
of Health Sciences, USM, 2004.
Journals and other references based on areas of research.
GTF407/8-Forensic Practicum
This course provides hands on training on crime scene management and forensic
examination by way of mock crime scenes and moot court. The students will attend
practical training in fingerprints, ballistics, and clandestine laboratory besides various
chemical and instrumental methods of analysis. The students will be taken to real crime
scenes and will be taught the various procedures in the search and collection of evidence
materials. This course provides fundamental knowledge on the Malaysian Legal System
and the police administration in processing of evidence materials. This course is
conducted at Royal Malaysia Police College in Cheras and Forensic Laboratory. This
course also provides detailed knowledge on the preparation of reports and presentation of
evidence before courts of law.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Jami J. St. Clair, Crime Laboratory Management, Academic Press, 2003.
Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science: An Introduction to Scientific
and Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2005.
Donnell R. Christian, Forensic Investigation of Clandestine Laboratories, CRC
Press, 2004.
Henry C. Lee and R. E. Gaensslen, Advances in Fingerprint Technology, CRC
Press, 2001.
John Horswell, Practice of Crime Scene Investigation, Taylor & Francis, 2004.
Max H. Houck, Mute Witnesses: Trace Evidence Analysis, Academic Press, 2001.
Stuart H. James, Paul Erwin Kish, T. Paulette Sutton, Principles of Bloodstain
Analysis : Theory and Practice, CRC Press, 2005.
Barry A.J. Fisher, Techniques of Crime Scene Investigation, 7th Ed. CRC Press,
2004.
Hal Sherman and Nicholas Petraco, Illustrated Guide to Crime Scene
Investigation, CRC Press 2005.
GTF408/2-Forensic Documents Examination
This course introduces the students to various techniques to examine sample of
questioned documents. The content of the course includes the principle techniques for the
examination of questioned documents, as well as the formal report writing. Students will
be trained to use the latest instruments related to the examination of questioned
documents to equip them with appropriate knowledge and skills to be used in the
understanding of related concepts and techniques. Practical training will include;
179
typewriting, handwriting, signature, examination of indentation marks, ink and paper
analysis, identification of printing process, and identification of formal document
authenticity. This course is conducted at Chemistry Department by experts in Questioned
Documents.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ellen, D. The Scientific Examination of Documents-Methods and Techniques, 2nd
Ed., Taylor and Francis, 1997.
Roy, A. H. and Headrick, A. M. Handwriting Identification, Facts and
Fundamentals, CRC Press LLC, 1999.
Koppenhaven, K.M. Forensic Document Examination: Principles and Practices,
Springer-Verlag, New York, 2007
Kelly, J.S. and Lindblom, B.J. Scientific Examination of Questioned Documents,
Taylor & Francis, 2006.
Hober, H.I, and Headrick A.M. Handwriting Identification, Facts and
Fundamentals, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
GTJ405/5-Medical Nursing Practicum
This course provides opportunities to students to deliver nursing management to patient
needed medical interventions. Students need to integrate knowledge and skill to provide
holistic nursing care based on nursing process. Students will practice related nursing skill
and to perform wad /unit management and give nursing education to patient and family.
Emphasis will be given to the students in order to practice professionalism during
clinical posting in the hospital and community setting.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing. critical thinking in
client care, (4th. Ed.). Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B, & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice. (8th Ed.). Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Smeltzer, S. & Bare. (2004). Brunner and Sunddarth textbook of medical-surgical
nursing, (10th. Ed.). J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia.
GTJ406/4-Surgical Nursing Practicum
This course provides opportunities to students to delivering nursing management to
patient needed surgical interventions. Students need to integrate knowledge and skill to
provide holistic nursing care based on nursing process. Students will practice related
nursing skill and to perform wad /unit management and give nursing education to patients
and family. Emphasise will be given to the students in order to practice professionalism
during clinical posting in the hospital and community setting.
180
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing. Critical thinking in
client care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B, & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice. (8th Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Gulanick, M., & Myers, J.L. (2007). Nursing care plans: Nursing diagnosis and
intervention (6th Ed.). Mosby Elsevier, USA
GTJ407/4-Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum
This course provides opportunities to student to deliver nursing management to patients
that needed critical care and management of patients at community setting. Students need
to integrate knowledge and skill to provide holistic nursing care based on nursing
process. Students will practice related nursing skill and to perform wad /unit management
and give nursing education to patients and family. Emphasis will be given to the student
in order to practice professionalism during clinical posting in the hospital and community
setting.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Allender, J.A., Rector, C., & Warner, K.D. (2010). Community health nursing:
Promoting & protecting the public health (7th ed.). China: Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins.
Sole, M. L., Klein, D. G., & Moseley, M. J. (2009). Introduction to Critical Care
Nursing (5th ed.). Utah: Saunders.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. M. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing: Critical thinking in
client care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
GTJ408/4-Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum
The structured nursing practicum is designed to give the student exposure and clinical
experience in the field of maternal, child and women health. This is an application course
of maternal, child and gynecological nursing and primary care. Students will integrate
this knowledge in providing holistic nursing care using the nursing process and practice
the related nursing skills safely and efficiently. Opportunity will be given to students in
performing client and family health teaching. Emphasis will be given on professional
practice and attitudes during clinical practicum in the hospital and community.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Towle M.A. (2009). Maternal-Newborn Nursing Care. Pearson Education, Inc.,
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
Beckham C, Ling FW, Barzanksy BM, Herbert WN, Laube DW & Smith RP
(2009). Obstetrics and Gynecology, 6 ed., Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins
Publishers
181
3.
Lowdermilk P (2006). Maternity Nursing, Mosby Inc., Missouri, Unites States of
America
GTK401/8-Environmental And Occupational Health Practicum
Through USM-industry collaboration, the students will be placed at selected government
or private organisations for a semester. Students will be exposed to the actual situation of
environmental and occupational safety and health problems, which exists in the world of
work. Students have the opportunity to practice the knowledge that they have learned and
improve their skills as well as to prepare themselves to face the real situation in the
workplace.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS). 2009.
Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan
Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Akta Pengurusan Sisa Pepejal Dan Pembersihan Awam 2007 (Akta 672). PNMB,
2007.
Akta Petroleum (Langkah-Langkah Keselamatan) 1984 (Akta 302). PNMB, 2005.
GTK402/8-Research Project
Students will conduct a research project in the field of Environmental and Occupational
Health. This aims to increase knowledge and research skills and to share the research
results through scientific writing and presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wayne W. Daniel. Biostatistics, Student Solutions Manual: A Foundation For
Analysis In The Health Sciences (Wiley Series In Probability And Statistics). John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.
L. Gordis. Epidemiology. W.B. Saunders Company. 2009.
W. B. Weimer. Notes On The Methodology Of Scientific Research. John Wiley &
Sons., 1979.
Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan
Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
182
GTK403/4-Environmental And Occupational Law
This course focuses on existing law and enforcement activities in Malaysia in relation to
environmental protection, occupational safety and health. Problems encountered in law
enforcement will also be discussed. Students will be exposed to the detail of legal
requirements and documentation with their implications. The course content is aligned to
the content of Module II of Occupational Health and Safety Officer’s Course, required by
the Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Ministry of Human Resources,
Malaysia.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan
Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
Lazarus R. J. The Making of Environmental Law. University of Chicago Press,
2004.
Abraham R. H. et al. Environmental Law and Policy : Nature, Law and Society.
Aspen Publishers, 2004.
JKKP GP (BM) 04/2003. Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan dan
Kesihatan, Modul l - lV. Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara,
Malaysia, 2003.
GTK404/3-Environmental Management
This course introduce students to the ISO 14001 environmental management system.
Students are exposed to the detail of the need for such standards and are trained to
provide documentation and to conduct internal audits. Environmental Impact
Assessment, Social Impact Assessment, an integrated modeling and management of the
environment will also be described.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Miller G.T., Environmental Science, Working With The Earth, Thompson
Learning Science, 2009.
Radojevic M. & Bashkin V., Practical Environmental Analysis, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2006.
Cheremisinoff P.N. & Cheremisinoff N.P., Professional Environmental Auditor’s
Handbook, William Andrew, 1993.
Schoffman A. & Tordini A.M., ISO 14001 : A Practical Approach. An American
Chemical Society Publication, 2003.
Friedman F.B., Practical Guide to Environmental Management, 9th Edition.
Environmental Law Institute, 2003.
183
GTK405/8- Management of Occupational Safety and Health
This course introduces the students to the system of occupational safety and health
management practices in Malaysia such as OSHAS 18001, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722.
It is expected to cultivate a caring attitude and self-regulate to employees and employers
in creating a work environment that is safe and healthy. This course will also include
documentation, training, performance assessment and audit methodologies. The course
content is aligned to Module I, Occupational Safety and Health Officer required by the
Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Ministry of Human Resources, Malaysia.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
JKKP GP (BM) 04/2003. Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan Dan
Kesihatan, Modul l - lV. Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara,
Malaysia, 2003.
Ismail Bahari. Pengaturan Sendiri Dalam Pengurusan Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan
Pekerjaan. McGraw Hill Education, 2002.
ILO-OSH. Guidelines On Occupational Safety And Health Management Systems,
2001.
GTN401/3-Food Service and Industry Practicum
This course emphasizes on food service handling (in hospitals, institutions, industry and
restaurants) and the relationship between quantitative food manufacturing with different
menus, equipments, service staff, time of serving, kitchen sanitation, food preparation
and quality assurance. The main focus is on the practical sessions at hospitals,
institutions, industries and major restaurants. Lectures and briefing sessions will be given
on the first week or before the commencement of internship. The students will undergo
internship service for a period of 4 weeks in recognised premises. During internship
attachments, the students are required to observe the utilisation of equipments, services
and food management under supervision.
List of text/reference books:
1
2
3
Knight JBL & Korschevar LH., Quantity of Food Production, Planning and
Management, 3rd Ed., New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1999.
Byers BA, Shanklin CW, Hoover LC, Hoover LA, Food Service Manual for
Health Care Institutions, 2nd Ed., American Hospital Pub. Inc., 1997.
Spears MC & Marquardt NW., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and
Systems Approach, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.
184
GTN403/6-Research Project in Nutrition
This course requires the students to execute a research in related field to increase
knowledge and experience in critical analysis. The students are guided to obtain skills in
scientific aspects to test certain hypothesis especially those related to health sciences
field. Students are expected to produce a dissertations at the end of the course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Eunsook T., Introduction to Nutrition and Health Research, Boston: Kluver
Academic Publication, 2001
Heppner P.P, Writing and Publishing Your Thesis, Dissertation, and Research: a
Guide for Students in the Helping Professions, Belmont: Thomson Brooks/Cole,
2004
GTN405/3-Current Issues in Nutrition
This course provides an opportunity to students to discuss contemporary issues related to
Malaysian nutrition intake. Controversial issues such as ‘new form of conquering’ by the
introduction of fast food, introduction of processed foods from other countries/continents
and its impact on Malaysian food intake quality will be discussed. Other topics include
therapeutic and nutraceutical food consumption, fad diet, association of food with cancer
disease and obesity will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wardlaw, GM and Wardlaw G, Contemporary Nutrition: Issues and Insight with
Foodworks, New York: McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Maths, 2000.
Nestle, M, Food Politics: How the Food Industry Influences Nutrition and
Health, California: University of California Press, 2003.
Brownell, KD and Horgen, KB, Food Fight: The Inside Story of Food Industry,
America’s Obesity Crisis, and What We Can Do About It, New York: McGraw
Hill, 2003.
Schlosser, E, Fast Food Nation: The Dark Side of the All-American Meal, New
York: Harper Collins, 2002.
De Graff J, Wann, D, Naylor, TH, Horsey, D, and Simon, S, Affluenza: The All
Consumming Epidemic, New York: Berrett-Koehler Publisher, 2002.
185
GTN407/3-Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar
This course requires students to perform a library search and to read additional materials
in the field of dietetics and nutrition. They are also required to do a literature review to
explore the nutrition discipline. Students are guided with research process in terms of
statement of the problem, literature review, experimental design, hypothesis, analysis,
interpretation and presentation of data, writing, discussing, concluding and giving of
proper recommendation in the writing of dissertations and scientific articles.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Wardlaw GMM, Contemporary Nutrition, Issues and Insights, 5th Ed., Boston :
McGrawHill, 2002.
Nassabaum M, Adolescent Nutrition and eating Disorders, Elsevier Science,
1998.
Jaffe, MS, Hobbs J, Holthausen B, Geriatric Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 3rd Ed.,
Delmar Learning, 1998.
GTP401/2-Augmentative and Alternative Communication
This course provides knowledge on the augmentative and alternative communication
(ACC) as a communication method for those who cannot communicate verbally. The
topics are types, methods and features of ACC. In addition, assessment and intervention
principles of ACC will also be discussed.
List of text/reference book:
1.
2.
3.
Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication:
Management of Severe Communication Disorders in Children and Adults,
Baltimore: Brookes Publishers, 1998.
Tetzchner, S. V. & Martinsen, H., Introduction to Augmentative and Alternative
Communication, London: Whurr Publishers, 2000.
Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication:
Supporting Children and Adults With Complex Communication Needs. Baltimore:
Paul H. Brooked Pub, 2006.
GTP402/6- Research Project
This is a one-term course that requires students to complete a research project under
supervision. Research topics may be in the field of speech pathology or other related
fields such as linguistics, psychology, special education or audiology. At the end of the
term, students are required to present their final outcomes and produce a complete thesis
to be assessed.
186
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Silverman, F. H., Research Design and Evaluation in Speech-Language Pathology
and Audiology, 4th Ed., Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1998.
Kuzma, J. W. & Bohnenblust, S. E., Basic Statistics for the Health Sciences, 5th
Ed., Mountain View: Mayfield Pub., 2005.
Ruscello, D. M., Tests and Measurements in Speech-Language Pathology, Boston:
Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.
GTP403/6-Speech Pathology Clinic V
This course requires the students to manage referred patients and conduct cases on their
own under supervision. They have to perform all the assessment nessessary to evaluate
the patient’s condition and ability, analyse and interprete the data collected and then plan
for goals and weekly therapy. Student are also required to give counselling to the patient,
where needed. At this stage, students will be exposed to the speech diagnostic tools and
will be allowed to use it on their own. The students must show an adequate knowledge
and critical thought during discussion session in order to make proper diagnosis and
prognosis.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Boone, M. & Von Berg, The Voice and Voice Therapy, Boston: Allyn & Bacon,
2005.
McHenry, W. & McHenry, J., What Therapists Say and Why They Say It: Effective
Therapeutic Responses and Techniques, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2007.
Hedge, M. N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language
Disorder. New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.
GTP404/2–Swallowing Problems
This is a theoretical course which focuses on swallowing disorders and feeding
difficulties. The topics include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of swallowing
problems. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of
intervention in managing individuals with swallowing problems.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Carrau, R. L., & Murry, T. Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders.
San Diego. Singular Publishing Group, 2006
Aevedson, J. C., & Brodsky, L. Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding. San Diego.:
Singular Publishing Group, 2002
Logemann, J. (1998). Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders 2nd Ed.,
Texas: Pro-ed, 1998
187
GTP406/6- Speech Pathology Clinic VI
This course requires the student to manage referred patient and conduct the case on their
own, especially for acquired neurogenic and dysphagia cases while under supervision.
Students will have to perform the interviewing session, related asessment and interpretion
of data collected. They also have to plan for the long and short term goals, weekly
therapy, plan and conduct the therapy session on their own. The students are also required
to give counselling to the patient, where needed. The student must be able to make proper
diagnosis and prognosis.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Corbin-Lewis, K., Liss, J. M. & Sciortino, K., Clinical Anatomy and Physiology of
the Swallow Mechanism, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2005.
Leonard, R. & Kendall, K., Dysphagia Assessment and Treatment Planning: A
Team Approach, 2nd Ed., New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2007.
Irwin D.L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, P. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for SpeechLanguage Pathologist and Audiologist. An Illustrative Casebook, New York:
Thomson Delmar learning, 2007.
GTP407/2-Learning Disabilities
This course focuses on the learning disabilities and education for children with
communication disorders. The topics include theories and processes of learning,
etiologies and characteristics of learning disabilities. this course also emphasises on the
educational issues that are related to children with communication disorders and learning
disabilities.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Harwell, J.M., jackson R. W., The Complete Learning Disabilities Handbook:
Ready-To-Use Strategies and Activities for Teaching Students with Learning
Disabilities (Jossey-Bass teacher). California: Jossey-Bass Publisher, 2008.
Lerner, J. W. Learning Disabilities Theories, Diagnosis, and Teaching Strategies.
10th Ed.,, Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2005
Fletcher, M., Lyon, G. R., Fuchs, L. S. & Barnes, M.A., Learning Disabilities:
From Identification to Intervention. New York: The Guilford Press, 2006
GTS401/3-Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription
Thi course introduces the students to the basic principles of physical fitness as well as to
the adoption of a regular program of prescribed physical exercise, the health-related
components of fitness and exercise prescription for endurance, strength, and flexibility.
Students will be able to determine fitness and stress status and to implement suitable
exercise programmes.
188
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Franklin, B.A. (Ed.), ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription, 7th
Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006.
Golding, L. A., YMCA Fitness Testing and Assessment Manual, 4th Ed., Human
Kinetics Publishers, Inc., 2000.
Nieman, D.C., Exercise Testing and Prescription: A Health-Related Approach, 6th
Ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2007
GTS402/6-Research Project
This course exposes students to the research process that requires skill in planning,
handling and analysis of data. The students are required to submit their dissertation in the
given format.
List of text/reference books:
Journals and other references based on areas of research.
GTS403/4-Industrial Training
The course enables the students to gain experience in actual working environment in the
exercise and sports industry. During attachment, the students will be involved in day-today activities of exercise, sports and therapeutic methods in a relevant organisation.
List of text/reference books:
Journal and other references based on areas of research being choosen.
GTS404/2-Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices
This course discusses the selected contemporary issues in sports science from local and
worldwide perspectives. Students are expected to draw on the knowledge and practical
skills to debate on important issues within sports science.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Cheung, S.S. (2010), Advances Environmental Exercise Physiology, Human
Kinetics, Champaign, IL.
M. Collins (Ed.) (2009), Genetics and Sport, Karger, Basel, Switzerland.
Samuel R. Bakere, (2008), Hot Topics in Sports and Atheletics, Nova Science
Publishers Inc. New York.
189
GTS405/3-Sports Management
This course explores the basics of sports organisation, hierarchy of sports organisation
and their role in the development of sports. Basic management of physical education and
sports plus the detailed explaination of management and running of various physical
education and sports programs will be covered.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bucher C.A. Krotee M.L., Management of Physical Education and Sports, 12th
Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2002.
Appenzeller H., Risk Management in Sport: Issues and Strategies, Durham, N.C.:
Carolina Academic Press 1998.
Horine L., Administration of Physical Education and Sport Programs, 4th Ed.,
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999.
GTS406/3-Adapted Physical Activity
The course aims to provide knowledge and understanding to the students on the recent
concepts, trends and information regarding adapted physical activity and sports. The
students will also learn the different types of disability that affect physical and motor
performance as well as the physical adaptation adopted by the special groups. This course
is developed to raise awareness and understanding for adapted physical activity and
sports that will further benefit the special community.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Claudine, S. Adapted physical activity, recreation, and sport: Crossdisciplinary
and lifespan, 6th Ed., Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
DePauw, K.P. & Gavron, S.J., Disability Sport, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics, 2005.
Lewis V., Development and Disability, 2nd Ed., Oxford: Blackwell Publishing,
2003.
GTS407/3-Therapeutic Exercises
The course covers the study of the causes, prevalence and incidence of diseases in the
human population and the effects of physical activity on them. Students will be exposed
to how exercise is used in the prevention and treatment of chronic diseases.
190
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Saltin B. (ed), Exercise and Circulation in Health and Disease, Champaign,
Illinois: Human Kinetics, 2000.
American College of Sports Medicine, ACSM's Exercise Management for
Person's with Chronic Diseases and Disabilities, 2nd Ed., Champaign: Human
Kinetics, 2003.
Ehrman J.K., Gordon P.M., Visich P.S. and Keteyian S.J., Clinical Exercise
Physiology, Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003.
GTX402/2-Brachytherapy
This course discusses physics and dosimetry aspects of brachytherapy. It covers sources
commonly used in brachytherapy and types of brachytherapy.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hendee, W.R., Ibbott, G.S. and Hendee, E.G., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed.,
Wiley-Liss, 2005.
Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H., Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller's Textbook of
Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003.
Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2003.
GTX405/2-Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I
This course provides students with theoretical and practical knowledge in the QA of
equipments for diagnostic imaging like general radiography, fluoroscopy radiography
and mammography imaging. Students will carry out QA tests based on recent standards
and protocols to ensure that proper functioning of diagnostic equipment for patient
service. Students are trained to practise the ethical and responsibillities of work in the
imaging and diagnostic department.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Stevens, A.T., Quality Management for Radiographic Imaging: A Guide for
Technologists, 1st Ed., Mc Graw-Hill, 2001.
Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of
Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A
Science, 4th Ed., Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.
191
GTX406/6–Research Project
This course gives the students the opportunities to perform research projects by selecting
a particular topic either radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy or radiation protection
as the initial exposure to life long learning in research. At the same time, students can
write their research findings scientifically as disertation that to be submitted at the end of
the second semester in Year 4. This course trains the students to complete projects and
dissertation submission.
List of text/reference books:
Journals and other references based on areas of research being chosen.
GTX407/3–Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II
This course consists of two parts, quality assurance in radiotherapy and nuclear medicine.
For radiotherapy, students will be trained to perform calibration of linear accelerator
according to IAEA TRS 398:2000 protocols for photon and electron beam as well as
other quality assurance tests such as gantry and isocenter test, and beam alignment test.
Students also will be trained to perform calibration of Ir-192 source for brachytherapy.
For nuclear medicine, students will be trained to perform routine quality assurance test
for gamma camera such as uniformity test, spatial resolution test and center of rotation
test for SPECT imaging. Students are also trained to perform calibration of
radiopharmaceuticals such as chi-square test for radionuclide.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd
Ed., Springer, 2005.
Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H., Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller's Textbook of
Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2002.
Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2003.
GTX408/3–Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy
This course introduces the students to the methods for dose calculation manually for
radiotherapy and procedures, and techniques for treatment planning including simulation.
Students will be taught to use computer for generating treatment plans for patient cases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation
Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.
Jayaramans, S and Lanzl, L.H., Clinical Radiotherapy Physics, 2nd Ed., SpringerVerlag, 2004.
192
3.
Khan, F.M., Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology, 2nd Ed., Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2006.
GTX410/4–Imaging Techniques II
In this course, students will be attached to the department of radiology and nuclear
medicine under supervision of clinical instructors. Students will be trained on medical
imaging especially special techniques in medical imaging including CT scan, DSA and
MRI. Students also will be trained in nuclear medicine imaging including preparation of
radiopharmaceuticals, imaging techniques and quality assurance in nuclear medicine.
Students need to perform patient management and preparation for imaging techniques,
inlude practising good communication skills. Students will be trained to practise the
ethical and responsibillities of work in the imaging and diagnostic department
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive
Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006.
Bontrager, K.L. and Lampignano, J.P., Radiographic Positioning and Related
Anatomy, Elsevier Mosby, 2005.
Ballinger, P.W. and Frank, E.D., Merrill’s Atlas of Radiographic Positions and
Radiological Procedures, 10th Ed., Elsevier Mosby, 1999.
GTX411/4–Radiotherapy Techniques
In this course, students will be attached to radiotherapy unit under minimum supervision.
Students are trained to handle processes in radiotherapy such as treatment planning, dose
calculations, simulation, patient positioning, and handling of therapy modalities. Students
will also be trained special techniques in radiotherapy such as SRT radiotherapy and
brachytherapy. Students will be trained to work in a team at radiotherapy unit and display
good leadership, responsibilties and ethical values throughtout their training.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation
Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.
Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., William and Wilkins,
2003.
Bomford, C.K. and Sheriff, S.B., Walter and Miller’s Textbook of Radiotherapy,
6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003.
193
GTX412/3-Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques
In this course, students will be attached to nuclear medicine unit. Students are trained to
handle nuclear medicine imaging procedures such as 2-dimensional imaging and SPECT
(single photon emission computed tomography). Students will be trained to work in a
team at nuclear medicine unit and display good leadership, responsibilties and ethical
values throughtout their training.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Shackett, P., Nuclear Medicine Technology: Procedures and Quick Reference, 2nd
Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2009, Baltimore.
Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd
Ed., Springer, 2005, London.
Christian, P.E., Nuclear Medicine and PET: Technology and Techniques,
Waterstram-Rich, K.M., 6th Ed., Mosby, 2007, St Louis.
GTX413/3–Professional Training
This course provides opportunities to students to learn the applications of radiation in a
working environment clearly included diagnostic and therapeutic procedures, research
and application of radiation protection. Students will be able to observe the installation
and commissioning of radiation equipments in hospitals or medical centers by suppliers.
Students will be trained to present case study verbally and to manage case taking and
report writing systematically.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hendee W.R. and Ibbott G.S., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., John Wiley and
Sons Inc., 2003.
Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of
Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.
Washington C.M. and Leaver D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy,
2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.
194
6.0 Elective Courses
195
GEG103/3-Fitness and Health
This course provides knowledge on theory, principle and method in fitness activities for
health and fitness. Students will learn various methods in evaluating individual’s fitness
level related to their health. Other components such as nutrition, body composition and
mental health are also emphasised.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shakey, B.O., Brian, J. Fitness and Health, 5th Ed. Champaign: Human Kinetics,
2002.
Edward T.H., Franks, B.D. Health and Fitness Instructor’s Handbook, 4th Ed,
Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003.
Jackson, A.W. Physical Activity for Health and Fitness. Champaign: Human
Kinetics, 2004.
ACMS’s Health Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual, 3rd Ed.,
Philadelphia: Walters Kluwer Health/Lippincot Willims & Wilkings Health, 2010.
GEG109/2-History of Health Sciences
This course exposes the history and development of science and medicine. It covers
historical aspects of Greek philosophy, modern medicine and history of medicine from
the earlier years to the present. Aspects of social sciences, religion, philosophy of
physical sciences, behavioral sciences, biological sciences and medicine outside of
Europe including the impact of Islam in the field of medicine and health will also be
explored.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Spector, R.E., Cultural Diversity In Health And Illness, New Jersey : Prentice
Hall, 2010.
Weiss, G.L. & Lonnquist, L.E., The Sociology Of Health, Healing And Illness,
New Jersey : Prentice Hall, 2009.
Osman Bakar, Tawhid And Science, Shah Alam : Arah Publication, 2008.
GEG114/2-Oral Health
This course provides an introduction to anatomy and physiology of teeth and related
structures. Further discussion will cover the etiology, pathogenesis and pathology of the
teeth and gum disease and prevention methods at the individual and community levels.
196
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bhaskar, S.N., Orban’s Oral Histology and Embryology, 12th Ed., Mosby 1990.
Daniel, SJ. Mosby’s Dental Hygiene. St. Louis: Mosby, 2004.
Scully, C. ABC of Oral Health. London: BMJ Books, 2002.
Wilkins, EM. Clinical Practice of the Dental Hygienist. 9th Ed., Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.
GTK103/3-Biodiversity
The course introduces the students to major phyllums of organisms in earth. Emphasis is
given to differentiate the organisms based on their distinct characteristics. The
importance of interspecific interactions and its surroundings will be briefed. At end of
this course, students will be able to identify various organisms living in their
neighbourhood and be more conscious on activities that destroys earth biodiversity.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Levin S. A., Encyclopedia Of Biodiversity, (E-Book), 2007.
Mader S. S., Inquiry Into Life, 10th edition. McGraw-Hill, 2003.
Shiva V., Tomorrow's Biodiversity, London: Thames and Hudson, 2000.
Andesirk T & Andesirk G., Biology: Life On Earth, Prentice-Hall, 1999.
GEG201/2-Women’s Health
This course introduces the students to the new definition and paradigm of women’s
health. Students wil be exposed to a more holistic approach to women’s health not
limited to maternal and child are. Several factors that influence the status of women’s
health such as economic, politics, religion and social cultural practices will be examined.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Women's Health and Social Change, Ellen Anandale, London: Routledge, 2009.
Women's Health Encyclopedia: An Integrated Approach to Wellness for Every
Season of A Women's Life New York: The Reader's Digest Association, 2010.
Botanical Medicine for Women's Health Aviva Romm ; Forewords by Mary L.
Hardy, Simon Mills St. Louis, Mo.: Churchill Livingstone/Elsevier, 2010.
Women's Health in Physical Therapy Editor : Jean M. Irion, Glenn L. Irion
Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2010.
Diversity and Women's Health, Sue V. Rosser. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 2009.
197
GEG203/2-Health Economics
The course covers both the microeconomic and utilization of healthcare services as well
as its association with issues within the health organization and its deliverable to the
community. Economic evaluation as a basis of healthcare policy making will be
discussed focusing on both; individual and community and supply and demand in health
care services.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clewar, A & Perkins, D. Economics for Health Care Management. New York:
Prentice Hall, 1998.
Drummond, M.F. Method for the Economy Evaluation of Health Care
Programmes. 2nd. Ed, Oxford: Oxford Medical Publication, 1997.
Getzen, T.E. Health Economics: Fundamentals and Flow of Funds. New York:
Prentice Hall, 1996.
Mooney, G. Economics, Medicine and Health Care, 2nd. Ed., London: Harvester
Wheatsheaf Publications, 1995
GEG204/3-Gender Perspectives In Health
This course introduces students to a framework of analysis to understand the reason for
gender to be an important determinant factor in health. Students will examine the
interaction between gender and other factors in determining health standard, risks and
illness among men and women. The course will also discuss the importance of gender
perspective in forming health policy as well as in the development of health education.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gillian Bendelow, ed., Gender Health and Healing: The Public and Private
Divide, London, Roulledge 2002.
Amy J Schultz, Leith Mullings (eds), Gender, Race, Class and Health;
Intersectional Approaches, San Francisco, Josey Bass, 2006.
Chloe, E.Bird, Patricia P. Rieker(eds), Gender and Health: the Effects of
Constrained Choices and Social Policies, Cambridge, Cambridge University
press, 2008.
Women Health Organization Western Pacific Region; Integrating Poverty and
Gender Into Health Programmes, A source Book for Healthcare Professionals,
Manila Philippines, 2008.
198
GTS207/2 – Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports
This course introduces the students to basic skills and game play for some sports
including badminton, soccer , volleyball and archery, by relating with the principles in
kinesiology, physiology, biomechanic and socio-psychology. This course will also
emphasize on skills acquisition, performance, competition and analysis of the games.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Haywood K.M and Lewis C.F. Archery: Steps to success Champaign IL: Human
Kinetic, 2006.
Lennox, James, W. Soccer Skills and Drills Champaign IL: Human Kinetics,
2006.
Pearson D. Squash: The Skills of The Game Marlborough: Crowood Press, 2001.
Zartman, S. Youth Volleyball : The Guide for Coaches, Parents, and Athletes
Betterway Books, 2006.
GEG208/2-Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations
The course covers both the theory and practice as regard to estimate and controlling of
human resource within health organization. It covers the basic principles of managing,
planning, problem solving, staffing and achievement evaluation within the said
organization.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Burrows, M. Management for Doctors. London: Butterworth Heineman
Publications, 1994
Longest, B.B. Health Professionals in Management. New York: Appleton and
Lange Publications, 1993.
Rakiah, J.S. Managing Health Services Organization. New York: Health
Professional Publishers, 1992.
Pena, J.J. & Valerie, A. Hospital Management: Winning Strategies for The 80s.
Maryland: Aspen Publication, 1985.
GEG213/3-Stress Management
This course exposes students to a holistic approach for stress management. It treats both
cognitive (coping) skills and relaxation techniques with the intention of preventing and/or
alleviating the physical symptoms of stress.
199
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blonna, R. Coping With Stress in a Changing World, 4th Ed., N.Y.: McGraw-Hill,
2007.
Greenburg, J.S. Comprehensive Stress Management 9th Ed. N.Y.: McGraw-Hill,
2005.
Olpin, M. & Hesson, M. Stress Management for Life: A Research-Based
Experiential Approach. Minnesota: Brooks Cole Pub., 2007.
Palmer, S. & Puri, A. Coping with Stress at University: A Survival
Guide. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Pub. Inc., 2006.
Linden, W. Stress Management: From Basic Science to Better Practice. Newbury
Park, CA: Sage Pub. Inc., 2005.
Lovallo, W.R. Stress & Health: Biological and Psychological Interactions 2nd Ed.,
Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage Pub., 2005.
GEG214/2-Personality and Health
This course enables the students to describe how the study of psychological principles
applies to personality, the Assessment, Measurement, and Research Design used in
personality psychology, the six domains of knowledge, the core theorists involved in the
exploration of personality and the development of personality and its interaction to one’s
health in order to understand themselves and others.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Cloniger, S., Theories of Personality: Understanding Persons, 5th Ed., New
Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2007.
Larsen, R.J., & Burn, D.M., Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge
about Human Nature, 4th Ed., New York, NY: McGraw-Hill, 2010.
Mischel, W., Shoda, Y., & Smith, R. E.. Introduction to Personality: Toward an
Integration, 7th Ed., New Jersey: Wiley & Sons, 2004.
GEG302/3-Violence and Society
This course introduces the students to the concept and theory of violence in a society.
An interactive discussion on the interpersonal violence such as violence in family,
towards children and elderly will be included. Students will also be exposed to theory and
intervention to overcome violence.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Holmes, S.T. & Holmes R.M, Violence A Contemporary Reader, Pearson, New
Jersey, 2004.
Burns, Ronald, Culture and Determinants of Crimes, Environment Behaviour,
Vo.32, Issue 3, p347, 2000.
200
3.
4.
Van Crevel Martin, A Women’s Place: Refelction of the Origin of Violence, Social
Research, vol 67, issue 3, p285, 2000.
Itzin, Catherine (ed), Home truths About Child Sexual Abuse, Routledge, London,
2000.
GEG303/2-Tissue Banking
This course introduces the students to the principles of tissue banking. Specific topics to
be discussed include the history, terminology, basic anatomy and immunological
identification of organ and tissue transplants, legal and ethical organ and tissue act,
Quality Assurance, the principles of sterilization, radiation sterilization and validation,
bioburden determination, the importance of organ and tissue donation in health care,
infectious disease through transplantation and clinical application of tissue.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.O. Phillips, R. Von Versen, D.M Strong, Advances in Tissue Banking Vol. 5,
Nather, S'pore, 2001.
Julia M Polak, Larry L Hench, P Kemp, Future Strategies for Tissue and Organ
Replacement, Imperial College Press, 2002.
Aziz Nather, Norimah Yusof, Nazly Hilmy, Radiation in Tissue Banking - Basic
Science and Clinical Applications of Irradiated Tissue Allografts, World Scientific
Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd., 2007.
Aziz Nather, Norimah Yusof, Nazly Hilmy, Allograft Procurement, Processing &
Transplantation - A Comprehensive Guide for Tissue Banks, World Scientific
Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd., 2010.
GEG304/2-Communication and Self Development
This course introduces the students to various topics on basic knowledge of
communication skills in order to develop their self image and generate self development.
The course will also emphasise on public speaking, handling of interview, presentation of
working paper as well as developing self confidence and assertiveness.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Paul Nelson, Scott Titsworth, Judy Pearson, iSpeak: Public Speaking for
Contemporary Life, International Edition, Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2010.
Charles J. Stewards, William B. Cash. Jr, Interviewing: Principles and Practices,
12th Ed., Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2008.
Charles S. Carver, Michael F. Scheier, Perspectives on Personality, 6th Ed.
Pearson Education, Inc., 2008.
DeVito, Joseph A., 10th Ed., The Interpersonal Communication Book: Pearson
Education Inc., 2004.
201
GEG305/2 Forensic Science
The course introduces the students to the fundamental concept of Forensic Sciences. It
provides information on crime scene, collection and preservation of evidence and various
types of impression evidence such as finger prints, foot prints, tool marks, and tyre prints
used in identification of individuals and objects. A brief account on trace evidence
materials like dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included. Introductory topics on
DNA evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned documents also form
part of the syllabus. The students are also taught photographic techniques and digital
cameras in criminal investigation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
M. M. Houck and J. A. Siegel, Fundamentals of Forensic Sciences, Elsevier
Academic Press, 2006.
R. Saferstein, Criminalistics: An introduction to Forensic Sciences, 8th Ed.,
Prentice-Hall,2004.
S. H. James and J. J. Nordby, Forensic Sciences: An Introduction to Scientific
and Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2003.
P. R. De Forest, R. E. Gaensslen and H. C. Lee, Forensic Sciences An
Introduction to Criminalistics. NY: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1983.
GEG308/2-Tropical Natural Resource Management
The course focuses on basic component of environmental sources with emphasis on
environmental problems such as pollution and extinction of the natural resources. It
covers the on concepts necessary to formulate and achieve specific management goals
and objectives; comprehensive natural resource planning processes; and social and
institutional dimensions of management. This course will highlight the integration of
development, health and environmental issues.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bruce Mitchell, Managing Our Natural Resources, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education,
2001.
Daniel D. Chiras, John P. Reganold & Oliver S Owen, Natural Resource
Conservation: Management for Sustainable Future, 9th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2004.
Peter F. Ffolliot, Luis A. Bojorquez-Topia, Mariano Hernendez Natural
Resources Management: A Primer, Blackwell Publisher, 2003.
Tim, W. Clark. Andrew R. Willard, Christina, M. Cromleys, Foundations of
Natural Resources Policy and Management, Yale University, 2000.
202
GEG309/2-Principles of Forensic Dentistry
This course details the application of dental science knowledge for forensic work such as
human identification and bitemark investigation. It covers the theory and some practices
in forensic dental work such as bitemark analyses and identification process using dental
records. Students will also be introduced to disaster victim identification and record
management.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Nanci A., Ten Cate's Oral Histology, USA: Mosby, 2003.
Scott GR, Turner II CG, The Anthropology of Modern Human Health. Cambridge:
Cambdridge University Press, 1997.
Fuller JL, Denehy GE, Concise Dental Anatomy and Morphology. St Louis:
Mosby Yearbock, 1984.
GEG311/2 Botany And Health
This course introduces the students to the associations between plants and health. The
topics will discuss history of plant usage in health, plant morphology and taxonomy,
basic plant biochemistry, plant secondary metabolites, plant biotechnology, conservation
and preservation of plant resources, ethnobotany and how a health botanical product is
derived. Skills of information gathering will be absorbed through essay writing and
seminar presented by inviting lecturer from related agencies/bodies. Management of
botany and health project will trigger communication skills and team work among the
students.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lewis, W, Walter, H and Memory, R. F.Elvin-Lewis. Medical Botany: Plants
Affecting Human Health. 2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons. Inc., Hoboken, NJ., 2003.
Sneader, W. Drug Discovery: A History. John Wiley & Sons. England, 2005.
Chooi, O. H. Tumbuhan Liar: Khasiat Ubatan dan Kegunaan Lain. Utusan
Publication & Distributors Sdn. Bhd., 2004.
Hasmah Abdullah. Kepelbagaian Spesies Tumbuhan dan Pemeliharaannya di
Malaysia. Dlm.Haliza A. R. Dan Rohasliney Hashim. Pnyt). Pemeliharaan dan
pemuliharaan alam sekitar di Malaysia. Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia. Pulau
Pinang. Pp 68-113, 2010.
203
LAA100/2–Arabic Language I
This course introduces Arabic letters to the students, pronounce and write it correctly.
The students practice to communicate about themselves, family and friends by using the
language properly and using the vocabulary accurately with the application in basic
grammar in communication. The students also learn to make simple sentences by using
the elementary in vocabulary in a good manner and in a positive way which is included in
the course.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
Kershul, K.K, Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004.
Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A.. Al-Arabiah Baina
Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004.
Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah,
Kaherah, 2001.
Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu , Seri Kota Publications, 2001.
Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha
(1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia.
LAJ100/2–Japanese Language I
This course enambles students to apply the basic grammar in writing and speaking,
recognize the hiragana’s letter, pronounce it nicely and write it correctly, interact in daily
conversation based on certain situation and discuss about 3 elements on culture, lifestyle
and matter which are related with Japan.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening
Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004.
Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004.
Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now You’re Talking. Japan:3A Corporation,
2003.
LAA200/2–Arabic Language II
This course is a continuation of Arabic Language I. The brief description about the basic
script of Arabic are given as a revision. In this course, students were taught the
appropriate skill of communication. The students will learn the nouns, verbs, and
conjuctions in Arabic as well additional vocabulary.
204
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
Kershul, K.K.. Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004.
Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A., Al-Arabiah Baina
Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004.
Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar, Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah,
Kaherah, 2001.
Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu, Seri Kota Publications, 2001.
Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha
(1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia
LAJ200/2–Japanese Language II
This is a continuation of Japanes Language I. In this course, the students will apply the
verbs broadly especially in using the conjunction, use more in basic sentence for speaking
exercise, read and write in katakana’s letter and apply the basic sentences in daily
conversation.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening
Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004
Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004.
Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now You’re Talking. Japan : 3A Corporation
2003.
205
7.0
FACILITIES
The buildings of School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres,
tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia
equipments.
IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the Multi-Media Laboratories of the
School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11.30 pm.
All laboratory requirements are provided, complete with instruments and equipments
within a new modern building.
Library, hostels and the sports complex with their respective ancillary facilities are
provided for students at the USM Health Campus.
206
8.0
GENERAL INFORMATION
8.1
CAREER GUIDANCE
8.1.1
Biomedicine
Career prospects for the Biomedicine programme include:
1.
Science or research officers at research institutes, institutions
of higher learning, hospitals, public and private medical
laboratories.
2.
Production and administrative officers in related industries
including Quality Control officers, sales personnel and
advisors in the pharmaceutical, food and beverage industries,
suppliers of medical products and instrumentations and as
environmental officers.
3.
Tutors/Lecturers at institutions of higher learning at both
private and public sectors. Graduates can also register as
graduate students or join the academic staff training
programmes at any of the institutions of higher learning.
The examples given above are not restrictive and graduates can also
involve themselves in many areas of scientific or commercial ventures
that is available now or in development particularly in the
biotechnology field.
8.1.2
Dietetics
Career opportunities for graduates of the Dietetic programme are ample
in Malaysia and as well as in other countries. These include:
1.
Dietetians, food services officers, dietetic counsellors in
Government and Private hospitals, and Institutions of Higher
Learning.
2.
Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning
and research.
3.
Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of
higher learning.
207
4.
Diet consultants and nutritionist in the public and private
sectors.
8.1.3
Nursing
Career opportunities in nursing are wide in Malaysia and overseas;
these include:
1.
Clinical nurses and nurse administrators at the government
and private hospitals including community health centres.
2.
Clinical nurses, nurse administrators or counselors at special
institutions or organizations such as Hospice, Nursing Homes,
Rehabilitation Centres and various manufacturing industries.
3.
Officers or administrators in research institutions, hospital,
pharmaceutical, diagnostic laboratories and other health
related industries of both public and private sectors.
4.
Nurse educators at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of
higher learning.
8.1.4
Forensic Science
Career prospects for the Forensic Science graduates include:
1.
Officers at the forensic services of the Royal Malaysian
Police, Department of Chemistry, Fire and Rescue
Department, government hospitals and forensic private
agencies.
2.
Science or research officers at research institutes or
institutions of higher learning, private and public hospitals and
diagnostic laboratories.
3.
Production, administrative or sales personnels of industries
such as pharmaceuticals, food and beverages, reagent
suppliers and biomedical instrument suppliers as well as
environmental officers.
4.
Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of
higher learning.
208
It must be emphasised that the examples of jobs given are not limited to
those mentioned. The curricula which are offered by the School are
flexible enough to provide graduates with skills and abilities which will
enable them to prospects jobs in a wider domain including Private
Investigation, Insurance Investigation and other forensic related areas.
Opportunities are wide for high achieving students to pursue postgraduate courses and become teaching staffs of the future at institutions
of higher learning.
8.1.5
Medical Radiation
Career prospects for graduates of the Medical Radiation programme are
wide in Malaysia and overseas. These include:
1.
Radiation protection officers at government and private
hospitals, research institutions and public and private health
organisations.
2.
Personnel involved in commercial activities within the
production industries related to the field and also in the health
care industries.
3.
Science or research officers at institutions of higher education.
4.
Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
education. Graduates can also register as graduate students
and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions
of higher education.
8.1.6
Audiology
The graduates from the Audiology programme may provide services or
work at various settings:
1.
As audiologists at medical settings (e.g. government and
public hospitals, rehabilitation centres); educational settings
(e.g. special education schools, early intervention centers); or
private practice offices.
2.
As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private
institutes of higher learning.
3.
As researchers at the institutes of higher learning, research
laboratories or centres.
209
8.1.7
Speech Pathology
Qualified professionals in Speech Pathology are known as Pegawai
Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertututran) in the government sector or Speech
Pathologist in the private sector.
1.
-
2.
-
Job opportunities in this profession are immense, including in
the:
Health sectors (government hospital, private hospital or
private practice)
Education sectors (special school or normal school)
Non-government sectors (intervention center or rehabilitation
center)
Community and welfare sectors (community based
rehabilitation center)
-
Additionally, they also can
become academic staffs at the university as clinical
supervisors or lecturers (after completing postgraduate
degrees at masters/doctor of philosophy levels)
conduct research and development as researchers
manage related institutions as the managing officers.
8.1.8
Exercise and Sports Science
The graduates from the Exercise and Sports Science programme may
provide services or work at various settings:
1.
As science/research/sports officers in medical institutions (e.g.
government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centers, Youth
and Sports Departments); educational settings (e.g. special
education schools, sport schools, early intervention centers,
universities); sports institutions and associations (National
Sports Institute, BAM, FAM) or private practising
organisations.
2.
As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private
institutes of higher learning.
3.
As coaches, sports science consultants, sports administrators
and managers, sports physiotherapists, health coordinators,
health club managers in both government and private sectors.
210
8.1.9
Nutrition
Career opportunities for graduate of the Nutrition programme are wide
in Malaysia and overseas. These include:
1.
Nutritionists in the public and private sectors.
2.
Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning
and research.
3.
Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution.
8.1.10
Environmental and Occupational Health
Career opportunities for graduates of the Environmental and
Occupational Health programme are wide (public and private sectors,
industries and NGO’s) in Malaysia and overseas. These include:
8.2
1.
Occupational Safety and Health Officer, environmental health
officers and safety supervisors.
2.
EMS engineers, EHS executives, health promotion officers
and operation officers.
3.
Training officers and marketing executives
4.
Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning
and research.
5.
Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution.
PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST
The School is continually soliciting funds for the setting up of gold medal
awards to be awarded to the best final year students in all programmes as well as
funds for other prizes and awards.
Students obtaining a CGP of 3.67 and above in any semester will receive a
Deans' List Certificate.
211
8.3
SOCIETY
Students of the School of Health Sciences automatically become the members of
the Health Science Society of the University.
8.4
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMMES
The School of Health Sciences offers Masters (M.Sc.) and Doctrate (Ph.D.)
courses via research mode in many disciplines such as Biomedicine (e.g.
Diagnostics, neurocognitive science, natural health products, vacinnology,
cancer biology, immune regulations, gene regulations and protein-protein
interaction), Forensic Science (e.g. DNA fingerprinting, Forensic Chemistry,
Environmental Forensics and Forensic Toxicology), Dietetics and Nutrition (e.g.
community nutrition, clinical nutrition and human nutrition) and many others.
Candidates shall have graduated with a Bachelors degree from recognised
universities and obtained a CGPA of at least 2.75 for the Masters programme
and 3.67 or graduate with a Masters for the Ph.D. programme. However
students with a CGPA of less than 2.75 may be considered if they possess
appropriate and relevant working experience or experience in research.
Interested candidates can contact the Deputy Dean (Research) Post Graduate
Studies or the USM Post Graduate Institute for further information.
8.5
OVERSEAS TRAINING SCHEME
Universiti Sains Malaysia offers limited and highly competitive overseas
training schemes to students of levels 100 and 200 who are interested to pursue
courses of one semester duration at any foreign university. This scheme is
devised with the purpose of exposing students to experience studying at the
international level with the possibility of credit transfers. Further details of this
scheme can be obtained from the office of International Relations, Division of
Academic and International Affairs, USM.
212
9.0 DIPLOMA OF
NURSING
213
ACADEMIC STAFF OF DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME
LECTURERS/TUTORS
NO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME
NAME
POSITION
TELEPHONE
EMAIL
Ms. Noor Aini Hussain Programme
7531
[email protected]
Chairman/
Lecturer
Ms. Anisah Mat Desa
Tutor
7744
[email protected]
Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir
Tutor
7733
[email protected]
Ms. Fazdillah Husin
Tutor
7743
[email protected]
Ms. Hasni Embong
Tutor
7741
[email protected]
Ms. Low Kim Lian
Tutor
7747
[email protected]
Ms. Mas Nor Saloni
Tutor
7732
[email protected]
Ibrahim
Ms. Noor Jasmani
Tutor
7746
[email protected]
Hassan
Ms. Nor Rahan
Tutor
7780
[email protected]
Mohamad
Ms. Norizam
Tutor
7734
[email protected]
Muhammad Yusof
(Study Leave)
Ms. Norliza Hussin
Tutor
7745
[email protected]
Ms. Nurhayati
Tutor
7742
[email protected]
Mohamad Nor
Ms.Tuan Ruasmani
Tutor
7750
[email protected]
Tuan Daud
Ms. Zaihan Abd.
Tutor
7749
[email protected]
Rahman
Ms. Zuraida Yusoff
Tutor
7748
[email protected]
Ms. Chu Be Lai
Clinical
6672
[email protected]
Instructor
Ms. Halizan Yusoff
Clinical
6672
[email protected]
Instructor
(Study Leave)
Ms. Masturah Hamzah Clinical
6672
[email protected]
Instructor
Ms. Norizan Che
Clinical
6672
[email protected]
Mohd Yusoff
Instructor
(Study Leave)
Ms. Zaharah
Clinical
6672
[email protected]
Muhamad
Instructor
214
INTRODUCTION
The Diploma in Nursing Programme is one of the programmes offered by the School of
Health Sciences since the 2007/2008 session in response to the rapid development in
medical technology and increasing number of government and private hospitals, where
the demand for nurses has escalated to a critical level. The shortage of nurses has affected
the quality of health services.
The structuring of the Diploma in Nursing Programme is based on the criteria set by the
Malaysian Nursing Board that a nursing programme must have sufficient nursing skill
training components to enable the students to register with the Malaysian Nursing Board.
It also fits the aim of the university to produce nursing graduates who possess excellent
academic knowledge as well as competent clinical skills in order to achieve the nation’s
aspiration in producing a healthy society.
This programme covers six (6) semesters of three (3) years. The programme encompasses
the following aspects:(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Biological Science
Behavioural Science
Nursing Science
Technical Skills
Co-Curriculum
These aspects are incorporated in the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic
knowledge in nursing practice as well as scientific knowledge with the hope to produce
nurses who are competent, of calibre, innovative, proactive, critical in thinking and
independent. This will assist in enhancing professionalism and the image of nursing for
the benefit of clients, society and the country.
AIM OF THE PROGRAMME
To produce trained nurses who are caring, practice safe nursing, competent and able to
analyse critically in problem solving at any health institution.
OBJECTIVES OF THE PROGRAMME
•
To fulfill demand of nurses needed by hospitals and clinics in the future.
•
To produce trained nurses who are able to deliver efficient services to individual
and community.
•
To provide basic nursing education which enable students to proceed to degree
level.
215
LEARNING OUTCOME
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply nursing theory and practice comprehensively in nursing care.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills in analysis and problem solving related to nursing
diagnosis.
PO3: Apply critical thinking skills in assessment of patient for effective nursing care
and interventions.
PO4: Apply communication skills in the assessment and problem solving in nursing
care and practices.
PO5: Organize and execute nursing tasks as a team of healthcare professionals in
caring for patients.
PO6: Display ethics and professional values in nursing practice.
PO7: Apply nursing knowledge and manipulate resources for effective nursing care and
interventions.
PO8: Explore and identify opportunities of enterpreneurship to enhance social functions
and responsibilities.
PO9: Exhibit values of leadership as a group in nursing practice.
216
COURSE DURATION
Three (3) years for full time course include both theory and practical.
ENTRY QUALIFICATION
SPM QUALIFIED
UNIVERSITY GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Pass SPM / equivalent examination
Pass with credit in Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia for SPM / equivalent examination
SPECIAL PROGRAMME REQUIREMENT
Pass SPM / equivalent with at least grade C6 / 6C / C in these five (5) subjects:
1. Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia
2. Rampaian Sains / Biology
3. Mathematic
4. Bahasa Inggeris
5. One (1) other subject
And pass in interview
ENTRY APPLICATION
Online application at https://pohon.usm.my/jururawat. Processing fee of RM60.00 is to
be paid cash at CIMB counter or through E-Payment / credit card / cash transfer (FPX).
Complete application form is to be printed and sent with copies of academic certificate to
the address below:
SEKSYEN PENGAMBILAN PELAJAR
BAHAGIAN PENGURUSAN AKADEMIK
PEJABAT PENDAFTAR, ARAS 2, CANSELORI
UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA
11800 USM, PULAU PINANG
217
ACADEMIC SYSTEM
DEFINITION
Unit
All courses will be assigned a value called UNIT. The unit is given value based on the
scope of the curriculum, and the demand made of student in the courses; in general the
unit is defined as follows:
Type of Course
Theory Courses
Practical or Laboratory Courses
Language Skill Courses
Industrial or Teacher Training
Courses
Definition
One unit is equivalent to one hour of contact time
per week for the semester of between 13 - 14 weeks.
One unit is equivalent to one and a half hours of
contact time per semester of between 13 – 14 weeks.
One unit is equivalent to one and a half hours of
contact time per semester of between 13 – 14 weeks.
One unit is equivalent to two weeks of training.
Type of Contact
Students or group of students will usually come in contact with lecturers via lectures,
tutorials, seminars and laboratory or field study sessions.
Cumulative Credit Unit
A unit that has been registered and passed called a Credit Unit.
REGISTRATION OF COURSES
(a)
Online Course Registration Activities
The online registration system requires that students register for courses every
semester. Registration will be carried out on Friday or Saturday prior to the
commencement of each semester. This is to ensure that teaching sessions can
start on the first day of the semester.
Time of registration is finalised by each School. Students must check on dates
of registration activities on the respective School's notice board.
Prior to registration, students are requested to obtain the following items from
their respective Schools:(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Course Registration Form
Statement of Cumulative Grade (CANGRED)
Time Table of Academic Sessions
218
(iv) List of Courses
Students are reminded that registration of courses is official and final. Due care
should therefore be exercised in filling in details to avoid unnecessary
complications. Extra care should be given to the following:
(b)
Course Code
Value of Course Unit
Type of Course Code
Time Table for Academic Sessions
Prerequisite Requirements of Courses
Requirements of the School
The minimum or maximum units which students are allowed to register.
Academic Advisor
(i)
Students must plan their entire course schedule to ensure that their choice
of courses for any semester can be undertaken without undue problems.
(ii) Prior to registration of courses, students are advised to meet with their
academic advisors regarding choice of course for each semester.
(iii) Students must obtain the signatures of their Academic Advisors for all
courses to be registered.
(c)
Time Table and Course Lists
Time table for the academic sessions and list of courses on offer for each
semester can be obtained via the Schools web page at http://www.ppsk.usm.my.
The time table is subject to change by lecturers concerned.
Student must refer to this list when choosing and obtaining information about a
particular course. Students are not allowed to register for courses if there are
clashes in the time table.
(d)
Registration of Language and Co-curricular Courses
(i)
All affairs related to the registration, dropping and addition of language
courses will be handled by The School of Language, Literacies &
Translation. Co-curricular courses will be handled by the Student Affairs &
Development Division of the University.
(ii) Early registration of the Malay and English language courses will be at the
School of Language, Literacies & Translation while Co-curricular (sports
& cultural) courses will be done at the Student Affairs & Development
Division.
219
(iii)
Online registration activities will only start after the process of choosing
the courses and the course codes have been entered into the computer
systems.
(iv)
Dropping of courses, if deemed necessary, must be done within the first
week of the academic session. A fee of RM50.00 will be imposed if this
is done after the first week.
Regisration of Courses for Students designated as active
Students must register the total number of units offered in every semester.
Registration of Courses for Students on "Provisional" Status
Registrable units for students on probationary status are limited to the following:
(e)
Academic Status
Maximum Unit
Active
21
Provisional I (P1)
12 unit
Provisional II (P2)
10 unit
Status of Students and Level of Study
Students are designated as equivalent to first, second or third year according to
the total credit points accumulated as follows:-
Course of Study
Year Equivalent Based on
Cumulative Credit Acquired
(Total Credit Unit
Required for Graduation)
First
Second
Third
98
0 – 37
38 – 66
67 – 98
220
(f)
Course Confirmation Slip
The confirmation slip given after registration of a course must be checked
thoroughly to ensure that there are no errors. Any errors regarding courses must
be corrected immediately at the respective school during the registration period.
(g)
Updating of Academic Records
The latest academic records and information will be printed in the document
designated as 'CANGRED' and in the course registration forms. Students are
advised to check the information and details therein and make corrections, if
necessary. Corrections can be made using appropriate forms obtainable from
the respective schools/centre or the Records and Data Processing Unit, Aras 5,
Chancellory Building.
Students are responsible for updating their addresses in the event that they have
changed their terms address, emergency address and/or permanent address.
(h)
Courses During the Long Semester Break (KSCP)
These courses are only offered during the long break. They are offered only to
students who obtained grade ‘C-’, ‘D+’, ‘D’, ‘D-’, ‘F’ and ‘DK’ in a course or
courses that they have taken. Students given grade ‘X’ and ‘F*’ are not allowed
to take the KSCP course examination.
The objectives of the KSCP:
To allow students who face time constraints in order to graduate.
i) To help students who require only a few more units to graduate.
ii) To help students on provisional status to redeem themselves.
iii) The assist students who are required to repeat prerequisite courses which
will not be offered in the following semester.
Formal lectures are not usually carried out. Teachings of courses are often
done through tutorials. Long break courses are usually carried out over 4-3
weeks of tutorials and 1 week of examination during the long vacation
break. The dates of these courses can be obtained from the Academic
Calendar.
221
COURSE CODE
Every course possesses a unique course code that consists of three (3) letters and three (3)
numbers. The definition of the code is as follows:DGN nnn
Serial Number
Serial Number
Level:
1 = Level 100 course
2 = Level 200 course
3 = Level 300 course
Field of specialisation:
N = Nursing
G = School of Health Sciences
D = Diploma
222
EXAMINATION
Examination is conducted at the end of each semester. Student must sit for the
examination of all courses that they have registered during the course registration period.
All students must first settle all fees due and have fulfilled teaching requirements such as
attending lecture/tutorial/practicals and have fulfilled other conditions deemed necessary
for that particular course before they are allowed to take the examination. The complete
assessment of each course is based on the grades obtained for the continuous assessment
(course work) and the final examination. The weightage given for these two components
may differ from course to course. The course work can include various aspects such as
students' participation in tutorials, tests, essay writing, project work and other
assignments.
(a)
Type of Examination
(i)
Cognitive Component
•
•
•
•
•
(ii)
Psychomotor Component
•
•
(iii)
Objective Test (multiple choice)
Essay
Short Essay
Seminar Paper
Case Study
OSCE and Practicum
Clinical Skill Log Book
Affective Component
Will be assessed with (i) and (ii) through progress report from Clinical
Instructor. The aim is to evaluate students’ initiative and interpersonal
relationship in practicum. This assessment is critical in molding the
professional attitude of a student.
223
(b)
Duration of Examination
Evaluated Course
(c)
Examination Duration
2 units
1 hour for coursework of more 40%
2 units
2 hours for coursework of 40% and below
3 units or more
2 hours for coursework of more than 40%
3 units or more
3 hours for coursework of 40% and below
Barring of Students from Sitting for Examination
Students who do not satisfy the requirements of a course may be barred from
sitting for the Final Examination of that particular course. These requirements
may include attendance of lectures or tutorials and completion of all course
work assignments. They can also be barred from sitting for the examination if
the fees due are not paid up.
Courses whereby students have been barred from are conferred grade ‘X’.
(d)
Average Grade Point System
The following scale is used to grade student's performance:-
Alphabetic
Grade
A
A-
B+
B
B-
C+
C
C-
D+
D
D-
F
Grade
Points
4.00
3.67
3.33
3.00
2.67
2.33
2.00
1.67
1.33
1.00
0.67
0
Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would be
given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP
or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and above for a particular
course will not be allowed to repeat the course whether during KSCP or normal
semester.
The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point Average
(GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular semester.
GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of students in any
semester.
CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from
one semester to another during the years of study.
224
The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:
Grade Point Average
= ∑ U iM i
∑ Ui
where
Ui = Course units for course i
Mi = Grade point for course i
Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Semester I:
Course
Unit
Grade Point
(GP)
Grade (G )
Total
GP
ABC XX1
4
3.00
B
12.00
ABC XX2
4
2.33
C+
9.32
BCDXX3
3
1.67
C-
5.01
CDEXX4
4
2.00
C
8.00
EFGXX5
3
1.33
D+
3.99
EFGXX6
2
2.67
B-
5.34
20
43.66
GPA = 43.66 = 2.18
20
Semester II:
Course
Unit
Grade Point
(GP)
Grade (G )
Total GP
ABC XX7
3
1.00
D
3.00
ABB XX8
4
2.33
C+
9.32
BBC XX9
4
2.00
C
8.00
BCB X10
4
2.67
B-
10.68
XYZ XX1
3
3.33
B+
9.99
18
40.99
GPA = 40.99 = 2.28
18
CGPA = Total Accumulated GP
Total Accumulated Unit
= 43.66 + 40.99
20 + 18
225
= 84.65 = 2.23
38
As shown in the above example the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point
ccumulated for all courses taken, divided by the total units that has been
registered.
ACADEMIC STATUS
Active Status - Students obtaining GPA 2.00 and above in the examination of a semester
will be categorised as ACTIVE and will be allowed to continue their studies in the next
semester.
Provisional Status - A Provisional status is given to students obtaining GPA of 1.99 or
less. A student designated as provisional for 3 semesters consecutively (P1, P2, FO) will
not be allowed to continue in the academic programme of this University. However, if
the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student maybe given a P2 status and will be allowed to
continue with his/her studies.
Without prejudice to these requirements and other standing rules of examination, it
should be noted that the University Examination Council has the absolute power to
terminate any students from continuing their studies if their performance and grade is
deemed unsatisfactory based on the minimum total credit units that must be accumulated
by the student. Example:-
Number of Semesters
Total Accumulated Minimum
Credit Units
Pure
Applied
Professional
nd
15
15
16
th
End of 4 semester
35
35
38
th
End of 6 semester
55
55
60
th
75
75
80
End of 2 semester
End of 8 semester
The Examination Council of the University can also terminate students based on other
specific reasons (Did not register courses, Did not obtain Examination Cards, Did
not attend Examination without valid reasons), including medical reasons which can
result in these students being no longer suitable to continue with their studies at this
University.
226
Examination Results
a)
Provisional (pass/fail) results via the Teleakademik system (9600-83-7899) are
usually announced after the Schools' board of examination meeting which is
usually one month after the examination.
b)
Full results (grade) via the Teleakademik system (9600-83-7899) will be
announced after the University Examination board meeting and is usually 2
weeks after the privisional results have been announced.
c)
Official results (Semgrade) will be given to students during the 2nd week of the
following semester.
NURSING SKILL PRACTICE
a)
Every student is compulsory to undergo practice and practicum in the nursing
skills laboratory and clinical area stated for each semester. Students have to
wear uniform during their practicum. Students have to refer to Clinical Skill
Log Book for regulation in the Nursing Skill Laboratory and clinical area.
b)
Students are to practice in Nursing Skill Laboratory with tutor or on their own as
scheduled.
c)
Nursing skills practice will be observed using Clinical Skill Log Book.
PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST
Students obtaining a GPA of 3.67 and above in any semester may receive the Dean’s List
Certificate.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
Students must fulfill all requirements in order to graduate (provided the minimum
residence has been fulfilled):
(a)
Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e total credits and
the required number of credits for each component in the programme [Core,
Elective, University and Optional (if appropriate) courses].
(b)
Obtain a grade point of 2.00 and above for total Core courses.
(c)
Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme.
(d)
Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point of 2.00 for the language courses
(Bahasa Malaysia and English), Core Entrepreneurship, Ethnics Relation,
Thinking Technique and TITAS courses.
227
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
The Programme was designed by taking the following into account:
(i)
The Malaysian Nursing Board has maintained that any nursing educational
programme must have sufficient nursing skills training component for the
purpose of registration with the Board.
To meet these requirements the Diploma in Nursing Programme is structured as
follows:
Student must complete 98 credit units in 3 years (semester 1-6) which include
core courses (83 units) and university courses (15 units) plus other requirements
of the School.
Programme Structure Synopsis for Diploma in Nursing Programme
Unit Requirements for Graduation
PROGRAMME
Diploma in Nursing
CORE
UNIVERSITY
TOTAL
83
15
98
228
LIST OF CORE COURSES
No.
Course Code
Course Title
Unit
Level 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DGN 101
Professional Nursing I
DGN 102
Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living)
DGN 103
Professional Nursing II
DGN 104
Health Communication
DGN 105
Sociology in Nursing
DGN 106
Biology for Nursing
DGN 107
Nursing Practicum 1
DGN 108
Health Assessment
DGN 109
Therapeutic Intervention
DGN 110
Medical - Surgical Nursing I
DGN 111
Human Biology I
DGN 112
Nursing Practicum II
Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 100 = 30
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
3
3
2
2
3
Level 200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DGN 201
Human Biology II
DGN 202
Medical - Surgical Nursing II
DGN 203
Nursing Practicum III
DGN 204
Medical - Surgical Nursing III
DGN 205
Psychology for Nursing
DGN 206
Mental Health for Nursing
DGN 207
Nursing Practicum IV
Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 200 = 21
4
3
3
3
3
2
3
Level 300
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DGN 301
Professional Nursing III
DGN 302
Obstetric Nursing
DGN 303
Gynecology Nursing
DGN 304
Medical - Surgical Nursing IV
DGN 305
Nursing Practicum V
DGN 306
Nursing Practicum VI
DGN 307
Neonate and Pediatric Nursing
DGN 308
Community Nursing
DGN 309
Nursing Practicum VII
Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 300 = 32
Total Unit of Core Courses
229
4
3
2
3
2
5
3
3
7
83
LIST OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
No.
Course Code
Course Title
Unit
Level 100
1
LKM 400
Malay Language lV
2
2
Wxx xxx
Co-Curriculum
1
3
LDN 101
English Language for Nursing 1
2
4
WUS 101
Core Entrepreneurship
2
Total Unit of University Courses for Level 100 = 7
Level 200
5
HTU 223
TITAS
2
6
SHE 101
Ethnics Relation
2
7
LDN 201
English Language for Nursing ll
2
8
HTV 201
Thinking Techniques
2
Total Unit of University Courses for Level 200 = 8
Level 300
-
-
-
-
Total Unit of University Courses for Level 300 = 0
Total Unit of University Courses
230
15
Registration Guidelines for Diploma in Nursing Programme
Level 100
Code
Core Course
DGN 101 Professional Nursing I
DGN 102 Nursing Skills (Activities of
Daily Living)
DGN 103 Professional Nursing II
DGN 104 Health Communication
DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing
DGN 106 Biology for Nursing
DGN 107 Nursing Practicum 1
DGN 108
DGN 109
DGN 110
DGN 111
DGN 112
Unit
Code
University
Course
Semester 1
2 LKM 400 Malay Language lV
3 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum
2
2
3
2
3
17
Semester II
Health Assessment
3 LDN 101
Therapeutic Intervention
3
Medical - Surgical Nursing I
2 WUS 101
Human Biology I
2
Nursing Practicum II
3
13
Unit
2
1
3
English Languange
for Nursing l
Core
Entrepreneurship
Total
Unit
20
2
2
4
17
Level 200
Code
Core Course
Unit
University
Course
Semester 1
4 HTU 223 TITAS
3 SHE 101 Ethnics Relation
3 LDN 201 English Language
for Nursing ll
10
Semester II
Medical -Surgical Nursing III
3 HTV 201 Thinking
Psychology for Nursing
3
Techniques
Mental Health for Nursing
2
Nursing Practicum IV
3
11
DGN 201 Human Biology II
DGN 202 Medical - Surgical Nursing II
DGN 203 Nursing Practicum III
DGN 204
DGN 205
DGN 206
DGN 207
Code
231
Unit
Total
Unit
2
2
2
6
16
2
2
13
Level 300
Code
Core Course
Unit
Code
University
Course
Semester 1
4
3
2
3
2
5
19
Semester II
DGN 307 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing
3
DGN 308 Community Nursing
3
DGN 309 Nursing Practicum Vll
7
13
Total Unit of Core Courses
Total Unit of University
83
Courses
DGN 301
DGN 302
DGN 303
DGN 304
DGN 305
DGN 306
Unit
Total
Unit
Professional Nursing lll
Obstetric Nursing
Gynecology Nursing
Medical - Surgical Nursing lV
Nursing Practicum V
Nursing Practicum Vl
Core Courses
University Courses
TOTAL
= 83
= 15
= 98
232
19
13
15
98
SEMESTER STRUCTURE
DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME
Year 1 Semester ll
Year 1 Semester l
WEEK
ACTIVITY
WEEK
1
24
2
25
3
26
4
5
27
LECTURE
29
7
30
8
31
9
32
MID SEMESTER BREAK
33
11
34
12
35
13
14
36
PRACTICUM
37
15
38
16
39
17
18
19
STUDY WEEK
40
41
FINAL EXAM
42
20
21
22
LECTURE
28
6
10
ACTIVITY
MID SEMESTER BREAK
LECTURE
PRACTICUM
STUDY WEEK
FINAL EXAM
43
44
SEMESTER BREAK
45
23
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
233
LONG SEMESTER BREAK
Year 2 Semester l
WEEK
Year 2 Semester ll
ACTIVITY
WEEK
1
24
2
25
3
26
4
27
5
LECTURE
29
7
30
8
31
9
32
MID SEMESTER BREAK
33
11
34
12
35
13
14
36
PRACTICUM
37
15
38
16
39
17
18
19
STUDY WEEK
40
41
FINAL EXAM
42
20
21
22
LECTURE
28
6
10
ACTIVITY
MID SEMESTER BREAK
LECTURE
PRACTICUM
STUDY WEEK
FINAL EXAM
43
44
SEMESTER BREAK
45
23
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
234
LONG SEMESTER BREAK
Year 3 Semester l
WEEK
Year 3 Semester ll
ACTIVITY
WEEK
1
24
2
25
3
4
26
LECTURE
28
6
29
7
30
31
PRACTICUM
9
10
MID SEMESTER BREAK
12
35
13
36
38
39
17
40
18
STUDY WEEK / FINAL
EXAM
20
21
41
STUDY WEEK
42
FINAL EXAM
43
44
PRACTICUM
22
23
PRACTICUM
37
PRACTICUM
16
19
MID SEMESTER BREAK
33
34
15
PRACTICUM
32
11
14
LECTURE
27
5
8
ACTIVITY
PRACTICUM
45
SEMESTER BREAK
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
235
LONG SEMESTER BREAK
COURSES SYNOPSIS
236
Core Courses
Level 100
237
DGN101/2-Professional Nursing I
This course introduces the students to the history and the development of nursing
profession in Malaysia and at the international level, health care system in Malaysia and
alternative insurance delivery systems. Basic nursing concept and focus including the role
of nurse and nursing practice will also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Alligood, M. R. & Torney, A. M., Nursing Theory: Utilization & Application,
3rd Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2005.
Herdman, T. H., Eds, NANDA International Nursing Diagnoses: Definitions &
Classification 2009 – 2011, Wiley-Blackwell: Oxfrod, 2009.
Wilkinson, J. M. & Van Leuven, K., Fundamentals of Nursing: Theory,
Concepts & Applications, F.A. Davis Company: Philadelphia, 2007.
DGN102/3-Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living)
This course introduces the students to basic nursing skills related to human basic need
based on the Virginia Henderson theory. Students will practice the skills taught in the
nursing skill laboratory and implement the skills in clinical area.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Altman, G. B. Fundamental and Advanced Nursing Skills, 3rd Ed., Delmar
Cengage Learning: New York, 2010.
DeLaune, S. C. & Ladner, P. K. Fundamentals of Nursing Standards and
Practice, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning: United States, 2006.
Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Eds, Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills, 7th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
DGN103/2-Professional Nursing II
This course aims to provide an understanding for ethics and laws in nursing practice. The
main focus is knowledge on principles of ethics and legal issues related to nursing
practice.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Bosek, M. S. D. & Savage, T. A., The Ethical Component of Nursing Education:
Integrating Ethics Into Clinical Experience, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins:
Philadelphia, 2007.
Holmes, H. N., Evidence-based Nursing Guide to: Legal and Professional
Issues, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2009.
Westrick, A. J. & Dempski, K., Essentials of Nursing Law and Ethics, Jones &
Bartlett Publishers: Sudbury, 2009.
238
DGN104/2-Health Communication
This course introduces the students to basic communication from effective
communication perspective. The main focus is on communication technique in nursing
practice.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Burnard, P. & Gill, P., Culture, Communication and Nursing,
Pearson/Education: Harlow, 2008.
Crawford, P., Brown, B. & Bonham, P., Communication in Clinical Setting,
Nelson Thornes: Cheltenham, 2006.
Singh, S., Communication for Nurses, Anmol Publications: New Delhi, 2006.
DGN105/3-Sociology in Nursing
This course introduces the students to roles of sociology in health care and its effect on
behaviour and response to health alteration and diseases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Giddens, A. Sociology, 6th Ed., Polity Press: Cambridge, 2009.
Giger, J. N. & Davidhizar, R. E., Eds, Transcultural Nursing: Assessment and
Intervention, 5th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2008.
Weiss, G. L. The Sociology Of Health, Healing and Illness, Pearson Prentice
Hall: New Jersey, 2009.
DGN106/2-Biology for Nursing
This course introduces the students to the importance of basic biochemistry,
microbiology, parasitology and their effect on human health.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Campbell, M. K. & Farrell, S. O., Biochemistry, 5th Ed., Thomson Brook: USA,
2006.
Elaine, M. N., Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson:
San Francisco, 2006.
Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B., Introduction to the Human Body: The Essentials
of Anatomy and Physiology, 7th Ed., John Wiley & Sons: New York, 2007.
DGN107/3-Nursing Practicum I
This practicum is the application of basic nursing sciences’ theory related to nursing
process, activities of daily living, biology for nursing, sociology, communication
technique and ethic and law in nursing practice.
239
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Lewis, S. L. et al. Medical-Surgical Nursing: Assessment and Management of
Clinical Problems, 7th Ed., Mosby: New York, 2007.
Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, 7th Ed., Mosby Elsevier:
St. Louis, 2009.
Rusnah, A. R. & Saliza M. L., Prosedur Kejururawatan, Prentice Hall:
Malaysia, 2006.
DGN108/3-Health Assessment
This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skills of health assessment
such as health history taking and health examination technique in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
4.
Elkin, M. K., Perry, A. G. & Potter, P. A., Nursing Interventions & Clinical
Skills, 4th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2007.
Estes. M. E. Z. Health Assessment & Physical Examination, 4th Ed., Delmar:
New York, 2010.
Wilson, S. F. & Giddens, J. F., Health Assessment for Nursing Practice, 4th Ed.,
Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2009.
DGN109/3-Therapeutic Intervention
This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of therapeutic
intervention such as aseptic concept and technique, wound management,
pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, and importance of therapeutic diet, pain
management, counseling technique and introduction to alternative technique in nursing
practice.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
DeLaune, S. C. & Ladner, P. K. Fundamentals of Nursing: Standards &
Practice, 5th Ed., Delmar Thomson Learning: USA, 2009.
Perry, A. G. & Potter, P. A. Clinical Nursing Skill & Techniques, 7th Ed.,
Mosby: USA, 2009.
Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Eds, Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills, 7th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
240
DGN110/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing I
This course introduces the students to the basic concepts of knowledge and skills of
nursing management related to component, method and importance of medical-surgical
nursing.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006.
Linton, A. D., Introduction to Medical Surgical Nursing, 4th Ed., Elsevier
Saunders: St. Louis, 2007.
Timby, B. K. & Smith, N. E., Introductory Medical-Surgical Nursing, 9th Ed.,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2007.
DGN111/2-Human Biology I
This course explains the importance of structure and physiology of respiratory,
cardiovascular, hematology, lymphatic and immunity systems in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Clancy, J. & McVicar, A. J., Physiology and Anatomy for Nurses and
Healthcare Practitioners: A Homeostatic Approach, 3rd Ed., Hodder Arnold:
London, 2009.
Haton, et.al. Human Biology and Health, Prentice Hall: Englewood Cliffs, 2009.
Saladin, K. S., Anatomy and Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5th
Ed., McGraw-Hill: New York, 2010.
DGN112/3-Nursing Practicum II
This practicum includes the concepts of skills, medical and surgical nursing theory
focusing on health assessment and therapeutic intervention.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Castillo, S. L. M., Strategies, Techniques and Approaches to Thinking: Critical
Thinking Cases in Nursing, 4th Ed., Saunders: Edinburgh, 2010.
Harkreader, H. C., Hogan, M. A. & Thobaden, M., Fundamentals of Nursing:
Caring and Clinical Judgement, 3rd Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2007.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
241
Core Courses
Level 200
242
DGN201/4-Human Biology II
This course introduces the students to the structure and physiology of gastrointestinal,
urinary, endocrine, nervous, special senses, integumentary and musculosceletal system in
nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Martini, F., Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson
Benjamin Cummings: San Francisco, 2009.
Saladin, K. S. Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 4th Ed.,
McGraw-Hill: New York, 2007.
Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B. H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology, 12th
Ed., John Wiley: New Jersey, 2009.
DGN202/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing II
This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for
patient with impaired hematology, respiratory, and cardiovascular system such as
pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigation and
medical treatment.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Black, J. M. & Hawks, J. H., Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical Management
for Positive Outcome, 8th Ed., Saunders: Philadelphia, 2009.
Burke, K. M., LeMone, P. & Moha-Brown, E. L., Medical-Surgical Nursing
Care, 2nd Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2007.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
DGN203/3-Nursing Practicum III
This practicum courses includes the concepts of skills, medical and surgical nursing
theory focusing on problems of cardiovascular, respiratory and hematology system.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Ankner, G. M. Medical-Surgical Nursing, Thomson Delmar Learning: New
York, 2008.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client
Care, 4th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006.
243
DGN204/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing III
This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skill of nursing care for
patient with impaired gastrointestinal, urinary, endocrine, immunology and oncology
system such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic
investigation and medical treatment.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Ignatavicius, D. D. & Workman M. L., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: Philadelphia, 2006.
Sholtis, B. L., Smith, S. D. & Connell, S. S., Brunner & Suddath’s
Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins:
Philadelphia, 2008.
Smeltzer, S. C. et al, Eds, Brunner & Suddath’s Textbook of Medical-Surgical
Nursing, 11th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008.
DGN205/3-Psychology for Nursing
This course introduces the students to the roles of psychology in health care and its effect
on behaviour and response to health alteration and diseases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Andrews, M. & Boyle, J., Eds, Transcultural Concepts in Nursing Care, 5th Ed.,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008.
Gleithman, H., Fridlund. A. & Reisberg, D. Basic Psychology, 5th Ed., WB
Saunders: USA, 2006.
Low, W. Y. Psikologi Untuk Jururawat, 3rd Ed., Longman: Selangor, 2008.
DGN206/2-Mental Health for Nursing
This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for
patient with mental health problems and diseases.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Ankner, G. M., Clinical Decision Making: Case Studies in Medical-Surgical
Pharmacologic and Psychiatric Nursing, Delmar Cengage Learning: New York,
2009.
Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L. H. & Bostrom, C. E. Psychiatric Nursing, 9th Ed.,
Mosby: St. Louis, 2007.
Varcolis, E. M. & Jordan, M., Eds, Foundations of Psychiatric Mental Health
Nursing: A Clinical Approach, 6th Ed., Saunders/Elsevier: St. Louis, 2010.
244
DGN207/3-Nursing Practicum IV
This course is the application of medical and surgical nursing skills according to
gastrointestinal, endocrine, urology, immunology, oncology, mental health and
psychiatric problems.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Anne, P. & Patricia, P. Clinical Nursing Skills and Techniques, Mosby: New
York, 2009.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K. Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
Lewis, S. L. et al., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Assessment and Management of
Clinical Problems, 7th Ed., Mosby: New York, 2007.
245
Core Courses
Level 300
246
DGN301/4-Professional Nursing lll
This course introduces the students to the knowledge and skills to students on
management and leadership, method of teaching and learning, the importance of research
and health informatic in nursing practices.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
DeYoung, S., Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators, Prentice-Hall: New
Jersey, 2007.
Finkelman, A. W., Leadership and Management in Nursing, Pearson: New
Jersey, 2008.
Hannah, K. J., Ball, M. J. & Edwards, M. J. A., Introduction to Nursing
Informatics, 3rd Ed., Springer: New York, 2006.
LoBiondo-Wood, G. & Haber, J., Nursing Research: Methods and Critical
Appraisal for Evidence-based Practice, 6th Ed., Mosby: Missouri, 2006.
DGN302/3-Obstetric Nursing
This course introduces the students to various topics on basic knowledge of obstetric
nursing.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Areson, J. Drake, P. Quick Look Nursing: Maternal and Newborn Health, Jones
and Barlet: U.S.A., 2007.
Davidson, M., London, M. L. & Ladewig, P. Maternal–Newborn Nursing &
Women’s Health Across the Lifespan, 8th Ed., Julie Levin Lexander: New Jersey,
2008.
Klossner, N. J., Introductory Maternity Nursing, Lippincott William & Wilkins:
Philadelphia, 2006.
DGN303/2-Gynecology Nursing
This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for
patient with gynecological problems such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation,
complications, diagnostic investigations and medical treatments.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
Fortner, K. B., Szymenski, L., Fox, H. E. & Wallach, E. E. John Hopkins
Manual of Gynaecology and Obstetrics, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams Wilkins:
Philadelphia, 2007.
Katz, V. L., Lentz, G., Lobo, R. A. & Gershenson, D. Comprehensive
Gynaecology, 5th Ed., Mosby: U.S.A., 2007.
247
3.
Sokol, A. I. & Sokol, E. R., General Gynaecology: The Requisites in Obstetric
and Gynaecology, Mosby: New York, 2007.
DGN304/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing lV
This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for
patient with impaired neurology, integumentary, special sences and musculoskeletal
system such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic
investigations and medical treatments.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client
Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
Smeltzer, S. C. et al., Eds, Brunner & Suddath’s Text Book of Medical-Surgical
Nursing, 11th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008.
Vijayalaksmi, V. G., Medical-Surgical Nursing, Jaypee Brothers: New Delhi,
2007.
DGN305/2-Practicum Nursing V
This course is the application of nursing theory and skill related to nursing management
in family health, medical, surgical, obstetric, gynaecology, orthopaedic, ophtalmology,
psychiatry, oncology, ear, nose and throat including community services in nursing
practices.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Coltrell, R. R., Girran, J. T. & McKeezie, J. F., Principles and Foundations of
Health Promotion and Education, 3rd Ed., Pearson Benjamin: USA, 2006.
Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th
Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008.
Sweet, H. M. & Dougall, R., Community Nursing and Primary Healthcare in
Twentieth-century Britain, Routledge: New York, 2008.
DGN306/5-Practicum Nursing VI
This practicum course is the application of nursing theory and skill related to medicalsurgical nursing, obstetric, gynaecology, orthopaedic, neurology, ophtalmology, ear, nose
and throat problems in nursing practices.
List of text/reference books:
1.
Bull, P. D., Lecture Notes: Disease of The Ear, Nose and Throat, Blackwell:
Maiden, 2007.
248
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client
Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
Galloway, N. R., Amoaku, W. M. K., Galloway, P. H. & Browing, A. C.,
Common Eye Diseases and Their Management, 3rd Ed., Springer: London, 2006.
Pope, N. A., Musculoskeletal Disorders in the Workplace: Principles and
Practice, 2nd Ed., Mosby Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2007.
Pourmand, R., Practicing Neurology: What you need to know, what you need to
do, Humana Press: USA, 2008.
Sokol, A. I. & Sokol, E. R., General Gynaecology: The Requisites in Obstetric
and Gynaecology, Mosby: New York, 2007.
DGN307/3-Neonate and Pediatric Nursing
This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for
neonate and pediatric patient with medical and surgical problems.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Ball, J. W. & Bindler, R. C., Pediatric Nursing: Caring for Children, Pearson
Prentice Hall: USA, 2008.
Bowden, V. R. & Greenberg, C. S., Pediatric Nursing Procedure, 2nd Ed.,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: USA, 2008.
Leifer, G., Introduction to Maternity and Pediatric Nursing, 5th Ed., Elsevier: St
Louis, 2007.
DGN308/3-Community Nursing
This course introduces the students to the concept of community and public health
nursing. The nursing knowledge and skills from nursing and public health sciences will
be used by the students to apply during community practicum.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Gauwitz, D. F., Community Health Nursing, Thomson Delmar Learning: New
York, 2007.
Hunt, R. Introduction to Community-Based Nursing, Wolters Kluwer/Lippincott
William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2009.
Stanhope, M. & Lancaster, J. Foundations of Nursing in the Community:
Community-Oriented Practice, 2nd Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2008.
249
DGN309/7-Nursing Practicum VlI
This practicum is the application of nursing theory and skills related to medical-surgical
nursing, operation theatre, community, neonatal, pediatric, oncology, haematology and
critical in nursing practices.
List of text/reference books:
1.
2.
3.
Coltrell, R. R., Girran, J. T. & McKeezie, J. F., Principles and Foundations of
Health Promotion and Education, 3rd Ed., Pearson Benjamin: USA, 2006.
LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.
Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th
Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008.
250
FACILITIES AVAILABLE AT THE SCHOOL
Hospital Universiti Sains Malaysia (HUSM)
HUSM has 747 beds from 33 wards of various disciplines including medical, surgical,
orthopedic, critical, obstetric and gynecology, psychiatric, cardiology, cardiothorasic,
oncology and pediatric.
Services available include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Medical Specialist Clinic
Surgery Clinic
Obstetric And Gynecology Clinic
Orthopedic Clinic
Psychiatric Clinic
Ophthalmology Clinic
Otorhinolaryngology Clinic
Oncology Clinic
Outpatient Clinic (Klinik Rawatan Keluarga)
Staff Clinic
Klinik Sejahtera (for USM students)
Dental Clinic
Radiology Services
Diagnostic Laboratory Services
Clinical Laboratory Services
Blood Bank Services
Pharmacy Services
Library
Facilities include:
•
Open rack books, reference books, magazine including permanent subscription,
serial monography, special collection, fiction collection and gift books
•
Media materials
The School of Health Sciences' building
The buildings of the School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres,
tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia
equipments.
251
IT facilities and MultiMedia
IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the MultiMedia Laboratories of the
School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11:30 pm.
SOCIETY
School of Health Sciences students automatically become the members of the Health
Science Society of the University.
252
10.0
INDEXS
AUDIOLOGY
GTA101/2 -
Anatomy and Physiology of
Hearing and Speech (94)
GTA306/3
-
Auditory Rehabilitation
(138-139)
GTA102/3 -
Physics for Audiologist (94)
GTA401/6
-
Research Project (172)
GTA103/2 -
Anatomy and Physiology for
Hearing and Speech (Ear &
Throat) (94-95)
GTA402/3
-
Noise and Hearing (172)
GTA403/5
-
Audiology Clinic III
(172-173)
GTA201/2 -
Audiology Instrumentation
(108)
GTA404/2
-
Ethics and Law for Health
Professionals (173)
GTA202/3 -
Introduction to Psychoacoustic
and Audiology Techniques
(108)
GTA405/5
-
Audiology Clinic IV
(173-174)
GTA203/3 -
Advanced Audiology
Technique (108-109)
GTA204/2 -
Basic Clinical Management
and Hearing Screening (109)
GTA205/2 -
Neurology for Hearing and
Speech (109)
GTA206/2 -
Otology (110)
GTA207/2 -
Electrophysiology Test for
Auditory System (110)
GTA301/3 -
Basic Hearing Amplification
Technology (137)
GTA302/3 -
Audiology Clinic I (137)
GTA303/3 -
Paediatric Audiology
(137-138)
GTA304/4 -
Audiology Clinic II (138)
GTA305/3 -
Advanced Hearing
Amplification Technology
(138)
253
BIOMEDICINE
GTB105/3
-
Human Biochemistry (95)
GTB409/4
-
Research Project (175)
GTB106/3
-
Laboratory Science (95-96)
GTB410/3
-
Laboratory Management
(175-176)
GTB107/3
-
Epidemiology (96)
GTB204/3
-
Molecular Biology
Techniques (110-111)
GTU101/3 -
Structure and Function of
Humans I (103)
GTB212/3
-
Basic Microbiology (111)
GTU103/3
-
Fundamentals of Health
Informatics (104)
GTB217/2
-
Immunology I (112)
GTU104/3
-
GTB218/3
-
Immunology II (112-113)
Structure and Function of
Humans II (104)
GTB219/3
-
Pharmacology I (113)
GTU105/3 -
Psychology and Behavioural
Science (105)
GTB220/3
-
Medical Bacteriology
(113-114)
GTU106/3 -
Biochemistry and Basic
Genetics (105)
GTB221/3
-
Basic Haematology (114)
GTU302/3 -
Biostatistics (166-167)
GTB222/4
-
Pathology (114-115)
GTU303/2 -
GTB224/2
-
Laboratory Animal Sciences
(115)
Research Methodology
(167-168)
GTB307/3
-
Medical Parasitology (139)
GTB310/3
-
Clinical Biochemistry
(139-140)
GTB315/2
-
Medical Virology and
Micology (140)
GTB316/3
-
Transfusion Science and
Blood Banking (140-141)
GTB317/3
-
Advanced Haematology
(141)
GTB318/3
-
Pharmacology II (141-142)
GTB404/3
-
Toxicology (174)
GTB407/4
-
Industrial Training (174)
GTB408/9
-
Biomedical Practicum (175)
254
DIETETICS
GTD211/2
-
Dietetics Skills and Communication
(115-116)
GTD310/4
-
Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I (142)
GTD311/3
-
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I (142-143)
GTD315/2
-
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II (143)
GTD317/4
-
Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I (143-144)
GTD318/4
-
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I (144)
GTD321/3
-
Therapeutic Diet Preparation (144)
GTD406/3
-
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II (176)
GTD407/3
-
Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II (177)
GTD408/3
-
Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II (177)
255
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
GTK101/3
GTK102/3
-
-
Introduction to
Environmental and
Occupational Health
(99-100)
Environmental and
Occupational Health :
Ecological Perspectives
(100)
GTK103/3
-
Biodiversity (100 & 197)
GTK201/3
-
Occupational Health (123)
GTK202/3
-
Pollution and Health
(123 - 124)
GTK203/3
-
Occupational Health (124)
GTK301/4 -
Environmental and
Occupational Toxicology
(153-154)
GTK302/3 -
Environmental and
Occupational Health from
Engineering Perspectives
(154)
GTK303/3 -
Domestic, Laboratory and
Industrial Waste
Management (154-155)
GTK304/3
Measurement and Monitoring
of Contaminants (155)
-
GTK305/3 -
Environmental and
Occupational Health Related
Diseases (155-156)
GTK306/3 -
Environmental and
Occupational Emergency
(156)
256
GTK307/3
- Occupational Rehabilitation
(156)
GTK401/8
- Environmental and
Occupational Health
Practicum (182)
GTK402/8
- Research Project (182)
GTK403/4
- Environmental and
Occupational Laws (183)
GTK44/3
- Environmental Management
(183)
GTK405/3
- Management of Occupational
Safety and Health (184)
EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE
GTS101/2
-
Introduction to Exercise and
Sports Science (102-103)
GTS307/3 - Physical Activity, Growth and
Development (166)
GTS102/3
-
Sociology and Philosophy of
Sports (103)
GTS401/3 - Fitness Testing and Exercise
Prescription (188-189)
GTS201/3
-
Exercise Physiology (131)
GTS402/6 - Research Project (189)
GTS202/2
-
First Aid and
Cardiopulmonary
Resuscitation (CPR)
(131-132)
GTS403/4 - Industrial Training (189)
GTS404/2 - Contemporary Issues in Sports
Science Practices (189)
GTS203/2
-
Kinanthropometry (132)
GTS405/3 - Sports Management (190)
GTS204/2
-
Tests and Measurements for
Sports Science (132)
GTS406/3 - Adapted Physical Activity
(190)
GTS205/3
-
Sports Psychology (132-133)
GTS407/3 - Therapeutic Exercises
(190-191)
GTS206/3
-
Sports Training Methodology
(133)
GTS207/3
-
Principles and Training in
Individual and Team Sports
(133 & 199)
GTS301/3
-
Sports Nutrition (164)
GTS302/2
-
Motor Learning (164)
GTS303/3
-
Sports Injuries and
Rehabilition (164-165)
GTS304/3
-
Sports Biomechanics and
Kinesiology (165)
GTS305/2
-
Applied Sports Physiology
(165)
GTS306/3
-
Coaching Science and
Performance Analysis
(166)
257
MEDICAL RADIATION
GTX101/3 - Introduction to Medical
Radiation (105-106)
GTX406/6
-
Research Project (192)
GTX102/3 - Mathematics of Radiation
Science (106)
GTX407/3
-
Quality Assurance in
Medical Radiation II (192)
GTX103/3 - Medical Radiation Physics I
(106)
GTX408/3
-
Dose Calculations and
Treatment Planning in
Radiotherapy (192)
GTX210/3 - Medical Radiation Physics II
(134)
GTX410/4
-
Imaging Techniques II
(193)
GTX212/3 - Introduction to Medical
Imaging Mathematics (134)
GTX411/4
-
Radiotherapy Techniques
(193)
GTX213/3 - Basic Science of Nuclear
Medicine (135)
GTX412/3
-
Nuclear Medicine Imaging
Techniques
(194)
GTX214/3 - Basic Science of Diagnostic
Radiology (135)
GTX413/3
-
Professional Training (194)
GTX302/2 - Radiation Protection and Safety
I (168)
GTX307/3 - Radiation Protection and Safety
II (168)
GTX314/2 - Introduction to Radiation
Dosimetry (169)
GTX316/3 - Diagnostic Radiology Imaging
(169)
GTX317/3 - Nuclear Medicine Imaging
(169-170)
GTX320/3 - Principles of Radiotherapy
(170)
GTX321/4 - Imaging Techniques I (170)
GTX402/2 - Brachytherapy (191)
GTX405/2 - Quality Assurance in Medical
Radiation I (191)
258
NURSING
GTJ101/4 -
Nursing Foundation I (98-99)
GTJ315/2
-
Medical-Surgical Nursing V
(Dermatology, Immunology,
Hematology and Oncology)
(152)
GTJ108/2 -
Health Communication and
Education (99)
GTJ205/4 -
Nursing Foundation III (121)
GTJ316/2
-
Gerontology Nursing (152)
GTJ207/2 -
Medical-Surgical Nursing II
(Gastrointestinal and
Renal/Urology) (121)
GTJ317/2
-
Principles of Health
Management (153)
GTJ318/2
-
GTJ209/3 -
Nursing Foundation II
(121-122)
Neonatal and Pediatric
Nursing (153)
GTJ405/5
-
Medical Nursing Practicum
(180)
GTJ406/4
-
Surgical Nursing Practicum
(180-181)
GTJ210/3 -
Primary Health Care, Family
and Community Nursing
(122)
GTJ211/2 -
Medical-Surgical Nursing I
(Cardiovascular and
Respiratory) (122)
GTJ407/4
-
Critical Care and Community
Nursing Practicum (181)
GTJ212/2 -
Obstetrics and Gynecology
Nursing (123)
GTJ408/4
-
Maternal, Child and Women
Health Nursing Practicum
(181-182)
GTJ309/2 -
Critical Care Nursing (149)
GTU201/2
-
Health and Society (134)
GTJ310/2 -
Medical-Surgical Nursing III
(Endocrine and
Musculoskeletal) (149-150)
GTJ311/2 -
Mental Health and Psychiatric
Nursing (150)
GTJ312/6 -
Research Project (150)
GTJ313/2 -
Medical-Surgical Nursing IV
(Neurology,
Otorhinolaryngology and
Ophthalmology) (151)
GTJ314/2 -
Nursing Education (151)
259
NUTRITION
GTN101/3
-
Food Science
(100-101)
GTN405/3 -
Current Issues in Nutrition
(185)
GTN202/3
-
Principle of Food
Preparation (125)
GTN407/3 -
Nutrition and Dietetic
Seminars (186)
GTN207/3
-
Principle of Nutrition (125)
GTN208/3
-
Nutrition Biochemistry
(126)
GTN209/3
-
Nutrition in a Life Cycle
(126)
GTN210/2
-
Nutrition for Health and
Fitness (126-127)
GTN211/3
-
Food Analysis (127)
GTN212/3
-
Assessment of Nutritional
Status (127-128)
GTN301/3
-
Community Nutrition and
Dietetics Services Practicum
(157)
GTN309/3
-
Nutrition and Diseases
(157)
GTN310/2
-
Food and Nutrition
Toxicology (158)
GTN311/3
-
Food Service Management
(158)
GTN312/3
-
Food Microbiology
(158-159)
GTN314/2
-
Nutrition Anthropology
(159)
GTN401/3
-
Food Services and Industry
Practicum (184)
GTN403/6
-
Research Project in Nutrition
(185)
260
SPEECH PATHOLOGY
GTP101/2
-
Child Language
Development (101)
GTP305/2
-
Counselling for Special
Population (161)
GTP102/2
-
Basic Linguistics (101)
GTP306/3
-
Voice and Resonance
Disorders (161-162)
GTP103/2
-
Introduction to Clinical
Audiology and SpeechLanguage Pathology
(102)
GTP307/3
-
Acquired Communication
Disorders (162)
GTP308/4
-
Speech Pathology Clinic IV
(162-163)
Developmental Psychology
for Speech and Hearing
(102)
GTP309/3
-
Hearing Impairment (163)
GTP310/2
-
Speech Pathology Clinical
Placement (163)
GTP401/2
-
Augmentative and
Alternative Communication
(186)
GTP104/3
GTP201/2
-
-
Linguistics for Speech
Pathology (128)
GTP202/3
-
Introduction to Speech and
Language Disorders (128)
GTP402/6
-
Research Project (186-187)
GTP203/2
-
Speech Pathology Clinic I
(129)
GTP403/6
-
Speech Pathology Clinic V
(187)
Paediatrics for Audiology
and Speech Pathology (129)
GTP404/2
-
Swallowing Problems (187)
GTP204/2
-
GTP205/2
-
Speech Acoustic and
Phonetics (129-130)
GTP406/6
-
Speech Pathology Clinic VI
(188)
GTP206/1
-
Practical Phonetics for
Speech Pathology (130)
GTP407/2
-
Learning Disabilities (188)
GTP207/2
-
Speech Pathology Clinic II
(130)
GTP208/3
-
Speech Disorders (131)
GTP301/2
-
Psycholinguistics (159-160)
GTP302/2
-
Language Disorders (160)
GTP303/2
-
Neuropsychology (160)
GTP304/3
-
Speech Pathology Clinic III
(161)
261
FORENSIC SCIENCE
GTF103/3
- Physical Chemistry (96)
GTF306/3 - Fire Investigation (146)
GTF104/3
- Inorganic Chemistry (96-97)
GTF309/3 - Forensic DNA Analysis
(146-147)
GTF105/2
- General Chemistry Practical I
(97)
GTF311/3 - Forensic Anthropology (147)
GTF106/3
- Analytical Chemistry I (97)
GTF312/3 - Organic Chemistry III (148)
GTF107/3
- Organic Chemistry I (98)
GTF313/3 - Food Chemistry (148)
GTF108/2
- General Chemistry Practical
II (98)
GTF314/2 - Forensic Serology (148-149)
GTF200/3
- Criminalistic (116)
GTF203/2
- Introduction to Criminology
(116-117)
GTF204/3
- Forensic Psychology (117)
GTF205/3
- Analytical Chemistry II
(117)
GTF400/3 - Forensic Medicine (177-178)
GTF402/4 - Ballistic and Chemistry of
Explosives (178)
GTF406/6 - Research Project (178-179)
GTF407/8 - Forensic Practicum (179)
GTF408/2 - Forensic Documents
Examination (179-180)
GTF206/3
- Organic Chemistry II (118)
GTF207/2
- Analytical Chemistry
Practical (118-119)
GTF208/2
- Organic Chemistry Practical
(119)
GTF209/2
- Pollutions and Environment
Chemistry (119-120)
GTF210/3
- Material Chemistry (120)
GTF211/2
- Natural Products Chemistry
(120)
GTF300/2
- Biological Evidence (145)
GTF301/3
- Physical Evidence (145)
GTF305/4
- Forensic Toxicology and
Chemistry of Drug (146)
262
DIPLOMA OF NURSING
DGN101/2
-
Professional Nursing I
(238)
DGN204/3
-
DGN102/3
-
Nursing Skills
(Activities of Daily
Living) (238)
DGN205/3
- Psychology for Nursing
(244)
DGN103/2
-
Professional Nursing II
(238)
DGN206/2
- Mental Health for Nursing
(244)
DGN104/2
-
Health Communication
(239)
DGN207/3
-
DGN105/3
-
Sociology in Nursing
(239)
DGN301/4
- Professional Nursing III
(247)
DGN106/2
-
Biology for Nursing
(239)
DGN302/3
- Obstetric Nursing (247)
DGN303/2
- Gynecology Nursing (247)
DGN107/3
-
Nursing Practicum 1
(239-240)
DGN108/3
-
Health Assessment
(240)
DGN304/3
-
Medical - Surgical Nursing
IV (248)
DGN109/3
-
Therapeutic
Intervention (240)
DGN305/2
-
Nursing Practicum V (248)
DGN306/5
- Nursing Practicum VI
(248-249)
DGN307/3
-
DGN308/3
- Community Nursing (249)
DGN309/7
-
DGN110/2
-
Medical - Surgical
Nursing I (241)
DGN111/2
-
Human Biology I (241)
DGN112/3
-
Nursing Practicum II
(241)
DGN201/4
-
Human Biology II
(243)
DGN202/3
-
Medical - Surgical
Nursing II (243)
DGN203/3
-
Nursing Practicum III
(243)
263
Medical - Surgical Nursing
III (244)
Nursing Practicum IV
(245)
Neonate and Pediatric
Nursing (249)
Nursing Practicum VII
(250)
ELECTIVE
GEG103/3
-
Fitness and Health (196)
GEG109/2
-
History of Health Sciences (196)
GEG114/2
-
Oral Health (196-197)
GEG201/2
-
Women’s Health (197)
GEG203/2
-
Health Economic (198)
GEG204/3
-
Gender Perspectives in Health (198)
GEG208/2
-
Human Resource Management in Healthcare
Organizations (199)
GEG213/3
-
Stress Management (199-200)
GEG214/2
-
Personality and Health (200)
GEG302/3
-
Violence & Society (200-201)
GEG303/2
-
Tissue Banking (201)
GEG304/2
-
Communication & Self Development (201)
GEG305/2
-
Forensic Sciences (202)
GEG308/2
-
Tropical Natural Resource Management (202)
GEG309/2
-
Principles of Forensic Dentistry (203)
GEG311/2
-
Botany and Health (203)
LAA100/2
-
Arabic Language I (204)
LAA200/2
-
Arabic Language II (204-205)
LAJ100/2
-
Japanese Language I (204)
LAJ200/2
-
Japanese Language II (205)
264
11.0
STUDENTS’ FEEDBACK
The aim of this feedback form is to obtain students’ response regarding the content
of this guidebook. The information obtained will be useful in improving it.
Please respond to items 1 - 5 below based on the following 4-point scale.
1 - Strongly Disagree
2 - Disagree
3 - Agree
4 - Strongly Agree
Please circle the number.
1.
This guidebook is very useful.
1
2.
2
3
4
The information provided in this guidebook is accurate.
1
2
3
4
If you chose 1 or 2 for question no. 2, please provide the number of the
pages(s) that contain the inaccurate information.
3.
The information provided in this guidebook is clear and easy to understand.
1
4.
4
2
3
4
I prefer to use the CD that is provided compared to this guidebook.
1
6.
3
Overall, I would rate the quality of this guidebook as good.
1
5.
2
2
3
4
If there is any other information that you think should be included in the
guidebook, please suggest in the space below.
Please send this feedback form to School’s General Office in the 4th week of
Semester I, Academic Session 2012/2013
265